STUDENT HANDBOOK

Applicable for students admitted into

M.Tech Programs from 2012-2013

1
INSIDE
S.NO DETAILS PAGE NO
I. Contact Details 3
II. About University 4
III. Academic Regulation 25
IV. Programs Offered 27
1. Master of Technology in Biotechnology (BT) 42
2. Master of Technology in Structural Engineering (SE) 57
3. Master of Technology in Computer Science & Engineering (CS) 71
4. Master of Technology in Computer Networks and Security (CNS) 90
5. Master of Technology in Communication and Radar Systems (CRS) 111
6. Master of Technology in Very Large Scale Integration (VLSI) 133
7. Master of Technology in Embedded Systems (ES) 147
8. Master of Technology in Power Electronics and Drives (PED) 175
9. Master of Technology in Power Systems (PS) 196
10. Master of Technology in Thermal Engineering (TE) 215

2
CONTACT DETAILS

Postal Address

KoneruLakshmaiah Education Foundation,

Official Admin. Office, 29-36-38, Museum Road, Governorpet,
Communication Vijayawada. A.P., India.
Pincode: 520 002.

K L University,
Green Fields, Vaddeswaram,
Campus
Guntur District, A.P., INDIA.
Pincode : 522 502.

Phone Number

Administrative
0866 - 2577715
Office

Campus 0863-2399999

Fax Number

Campus 0863-2388999

Note: While every effort has been made to ensure that this book is accurate and up to date, it
may include typographical or other errors. Changes are periodically made to this publication
and will be incorporated in new editions.

3
ABOUT UNIVERSITY

4
VISION:
To be a globally renowned university.

MISSION :
To impart quality higher education and to undertake research and extension with emphasis on
application and innovation that cater to the emerging societal needs through all-round
development of students of all sections enabling them to be globally competitive and socially
responsible citizens with intrinsic values.
OBJECTIVES :

Focus Objective

1. To offer academic flexibility by means of Choice based credit systems

and the like.
2. To identify and introduce new specializations and offer programs in
emerging areas therein
3. To incorporate into the curriculum the Application orientation and use
high standards of competence for academic delivery
4. To design and implement educational system adhering to outcome based
Academics International models.
5. To introduce and implement innovation in teaching and learning process
to strengthen academic delivery
6. To offer academic programs at UG, PG, doctoral, Post-Doctoral which
are industry focused, and incorporates Trans-discipline, inter-discipline
aspects of the education system
7. To deliver higher education that includes technologies and meeting the
global requirements

8. To promote inter-disciplinary studies and create needful facilities that

enhance inter-disciplinary research and innovation
9. To create an ambience that is conducive for undertaking sponsored
research, internal funded research and offering consultancy services to
Research wide spectrum of originations
10. To establish centers of excellence in frontier areas of research, and
design innovation centers with industry collaboration
11. To create environment to innovate and incubate the products and
services that addresses the societal requirements

5
 12. To integrate research into all academic programs
13. To maintain high standards in achieving research outcomes
14. To promote International conferences / Seminars / Workshops / in
collaboration with professional bodies for creation of avenues for
research exchange

15. To generate means and avenues for carrying out extramural research for
Industry and Academia
Extramural and 16. To organize extension activities covering literacy promotion, health
extension awareness and improve the living standards of community
17. To make the research outcomes useful and applicable for the societal
needs

18. To promote and maintain state of the art facilities for academic delivery,
research and co & extra-curricular facilities and develop congenial and
eco-friendly fully residential campus
Infrastructure
19. To create and strengthen focused and modern infrastructure that address
the national needs through generation of dedicated funds from Industry,
Government and research organizations,

20. To provide and promote the opportunities to higher education to socially

deprived communities and remove disparities by promoting women,
Equity / Access differently abled and socially deprived
21. To provide equal access to meritorious both in terms of admissions and
financial support

22. To lay emphasis on effective usage of ICT, WEB –resources and train
the faculty on the latest advancements thereof and develop effective e-
content
ICT 23. To develop and maintain world class ICT infrastructure and lay
emphasis on its effective usage, extend regular training to both faculty
and students on its latest advancements there by ensure interactive
academic delivery

24. To introduce reforms in the examination and evaluation system that

Examinations
brings out knowledge application skills and competencies of the students
and evaluations
and ensure transparency

6
Ecology and 25. To Build into curriculum, issues related to social awareness about
Environment ecology and environment towards achieving greener society

26. To promote collaborations with international and national organizations

for advancements of academics, research, Technology transfer and
Intellectual property rights.
27. To Indigenize the global technological solutions and develop the
Linkages products, and services that transforms the standard of living of rural
India
28. Design new products and services that address commercially attractive
needs and opportunities while leveraging the available resources in the
form of un-employed and under-employed Individuals

29. To provide skills through curriculum and training that are essential in
fostering entrepreneurial thoughts, employability prospects and at the
same time provides necessary support for incubating the innovations and
assisting them for prospective commercialization.
30. To provide necessary business infrastructure that allows attracting and
sustaining the industry to commence their business establishments
within the University Campus and aid in life long sustenance of
employment.
Employability
31. To develop industrial cluster that helps the students to start their industry
after incubating the products at the incubating centers which will create
Jobs
32. To develop National depositories for meeting the goals of National skill
development council
33. Train people to profile neighborhood and communities for the needs and
commercial opportunities that will support financially sustainable new
businesses

34. To institute measures for transparent administration that aid in

improving efficiency, accountability and reliance
35. To comply with regulations of all the statutory bodies.
Governance
36. To install professional managers who are global visionaries, thought
leaders, and thinkers into the management of the University so as to
contribute to the ideals of the University system

7
 37. To continuously upgrade the faculty in curriculum design, teaching
pedagogy, usage of ICT and various processes pertaining to academics,
research and University administration
38. To develop mechanism that attracts talented, qualified and experienced
faculty from across the globe for pursuing their academic and research
careers at the University.
39. To consider and implement norms, metrics, standards, procedures and
benchmarks for assessing and improving the quality in every aspect of
Quality
University system and achieve quality certifications by National and
International bodies.
40. To establish Internal quality Assurance cell (IQAC) and install a quality
systems that is integral part of all the University processes
41. To continuously upkeep overall quality of the University based on
aspects of regular feedback from the stake holders
42. To improve the quality of faculty through faculty incentives, awards and
recognitions

43. To mold the students to possess professional ethics, moral values and
intrapersonal skills that shape them into effective leaders and who are
having the thoughts of equality and unanimity towards all walks and
sects of life.
44. To inculcate the self-consistency, self-reliance and self-learning qualities
for shaping the students to lead their life on their own.
Value 45. To sharpen the critical thinking and reasoning skills by making students
orientation tackle problems and ideas that are yet to be tackled through application
of their intellectual discovery.
46. Developing the students towards human intellectual achievement and
make them rich in cultural experience
47. Students to be encouraged and provided with necessary support enabling
them to choose and pursue careers of their choice & interest that make
them professionally satisfied.

48. To expand the University in all its modes of delivery so as to contribute

National to the Nation’s increase in Gross Enrolment Ratio
development 49. To align the academic programs and courses to match the requirements
of the National goals

8
 50. To develop technology that helps sustainable socio economic
development

History
The President of KoneruLakshmaiah Education foundation, Er.KoneruSatyanarayana, along
with Late Sri.KoneruLakshmaiah, founded the K L College of Engineering in the Academic
year 1980-81. With the mighty vision and restless efforts of Er.KoneruSatyanarayana K L
College of Engineering carved a niche for itself through excellence in engineering education,
discipline and record numbers of placements and was the leading college in the state of AP. K
L College of Engineering achieved NBA Accreditation for all its B.Tech. programs in 2004
and later re-accredited in 2007. K L College of Engineering was transformed into an
autonomous engineering college in the year 2006. In 2008 this college received a record grade
of 3.76 on a 4 points scale with “A” Grade from NAAC; and in February 2009, the college,
through its founding society “KoneruLakshmaiah Education Foundation” was recognized as
Deemed to be University by the MHRD-Govt. of India, Under Section 3 of UGC Act 1956.
This Deemed to be University is named as “K L University”.

Location
Vijayawada is located on the banks of river Krishna in the state of Andhra Pradesh and has
been historically a cultural, political and educational center. It is also a part of Andhra Pradesh
Capital Region. The city is well connected by National Highway and Rail with Chennai (440
km), Hyderabad (275 km), Vizag (385 km) and is a central junction for trains running from
North to South India. Daily flights operate from Hyderabad and Bangalore.
K L University is situated in a spacious 100-acre campus on the banks of Buckingham Canal of
river Krishna, eight kilometers from Vijayawada city. Built within a rural setting of lush green
fields, the institute is a virtual paradise of pristine nature and idyllic beauty. The campus has
been aptly named "Green Fields" and the splendid avenue of trees and gardens bear testimony
to the importance of ecology and environment. The campus ambience is most befitting for
scholastic pursuits. The University has been situated on a built up area of around 15, 00,000 S.
Ft.

9
ACCREDITATIONS:
 Declared as Deemed to be University u/s 3 of UGC Act 1956.
 Accredited by National Assessment and Accreditation Council (NAAC) of UGC as
‘A’ Grade with 3.16 CGPA on 4 point scale.
 Approved by All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE), New Delhi.
 ISO 9001 - 2008 Certified Institution.

FACILITIES :
Central Library: E-Resources
The Central Library is the largest, and holds materials to serve the whole University
community. It has materials relevant to the Engineering, Science & Humanities courses
offered by the University.
The library system contains more than one lakh and fifty thousand books and periodicals on
all subjects related to the teaching and research interests of the University staff and students.
The library has over 15,000 electronic journal titles, academic databases and 5000 eBooks.
Access is available on campus on student computers and remotely.
A new library building will be opened shortly on par with international standard with
modern IT facilities.
Every department of the college maintains their library to cater the needs of students and
faculty. All foreign and Indian journals are made available in the department library for the
convenience of faculty and students.
The libraries render following library services.
 Circulation of library documentary.
 Inter-library loan services.
 Photo copying services.
 Reference service.
 CD-ROM search services.
 Inter Net services.
 OPAC
 WEB OPAC
 Audio visual
 Online lectures

10
 The Data Center
A State-of-the-Art Data center with advanced servers provides highly interactive learning
environment with full-fledged hardware and software training facilities.
Hardware:
The configuration of high end stream of servers that provides various services is
Super Computer
HPC Infrastructure (Super Computer):
 5.3 TERA Flops ( CPU + GPU)
 HP SL 230 4* SL230s Gen8, (2 * 2.6 GHz, 32GB RAM, 2x500GB HD, 10G IB HCA)
providing -1.3TF
 HP SL 250 2* SL250s Gen8, (2 * 2.6 GHz, 32GB RAM, 2x500GB HD, 10G IB HCA + 2
NVIDIA K20 GPU providing -4TF. Master Node:
 HP DL 380P 1* DL380p Gen8 (2* 2.6Ghz, 64GB RAM, 2x2TB HD, 10G IB HCA).
 Compute Switch (48 Port Low latency switch)QLogic IB QDR 36 Port Switch.
 Intel® Composer XE for Linux.
The data centers consists of BYOD Servers& Backup Server, Sun Servers, Dell and HP
Blade Servers, Apple Server Xserve:
SPECIAL LABORATORIES
The institute is equipped with various Industry Collaborated Labs

Name of the
S. No Discipline Research Group Associated
Lab

1. Computer Science and Engineering CISCO Computer Networks and security

Software Engineering
2. Computer Science and Engineering IBM
Knowledge Engineering

Embedded Systems

3. Computer Science and Engineering Microsoft Software Engineering

Knowledge Engineering

4. Computer Science and Engineering Adobe Web technologies

11
 Image processing

5. Computer Science and Engineering Oracle Knowledge Engineering

6. Electronics Communication Engineering NI Lab View Communications Systems

Physical Education- Sports Facilities:

KL University encourages students to explore their latent talents by providing good games and
sports facilities. The institute is equipped with the following.
 Athletic track
 Hockey Field
 Badminton Courts -4
 Tenni-koit Courts -2
 Cricket Field with Net practice - 3
 Volleyball Courts -4
 Tennis Courts - 2
 Handball Court
 Netball Courts - 2
 Throw ball courts - 2
 Beach Volleyball Court
 Football Field
 Basketball Courts – 2
 Kabaddi Courts – 2
 Table Tennis - 6
 Chess
 Caroms
 Kho Kho Court
 Soft Ball
 Archery
The University had State-of- the - Art Indoor stadium of 30000 sq.ft with:
 4 wooden Shuttle Courts/ Basketball Court
 Yoga and Meditation Center
 Dramatics
12
  8 Table Tennis Tables
 Hobby Center
 Gymnasium for Girls
 Gymnasium for Boys
 Multipurpose room with Chess, Carroms etc.
 Power lifting/Weight Lifting

Accommodation- Hostels
 KL University has separate hostels for boys and girls with well furnished rooms and modern
amenities. The overall atmosphere is very conducive for the students to concentrate on
studies.
 A state- of – the- art kitchen and spacious dining area has been provided for both the hostels.
 Generators have been provided as power back up.
 Emphasis has been laid on hygiene and cleanliness for healthy living. A customized menu
caters to the student needs and it keeps changing according to their tastes.
 Teaching staff will have to address academic and personal problems of the students.
 Round-the-clock security, communication, dispensary facilities are also available.
 The Girls Hostel
The girl’s hostel is within the campus with a capacity of 1192 in 500 rooms. Different rooms
accommodating 2 per room, 3 per room with attached toilets as well as A.C. rooms are available.
Suite rooms with modern furniture and separate study room are also available.
 The Boys Hostel
It is a short walk from the university with a capacity of 2040 in 780 rooms. Different rooms
accommodating 2 per room, 3 per room with attached toilets as well as A.C. rooms are available.
 Facilities in the Hostels
Protected drinking water, state of the art kitchen, dining hall, newspapers, telephones, toilets and
bathrooms are well maintained. Every student in the hostel is provided with a cot, study table, chair
and a rack. Fan and light are also provided in each room.
 Gas & Steam based hygienic food preparation
 Palatable regional, national and international cuisines
 Cleanliness and Safety

13
 STD/ISD Facilities
 Medical Kits and First Aid Boxes
 Soft drinks, snacks, Fruits etc.
 Laundry
 Stationary shop

 Hostel Rules & Regulations

 Students are hereby informed that while staying in the hostel, it is essential to be responsible in
maintaining dignity by upholding discipline. They must be obedient to the hostel warden/floor
in – charges.
 Valuable items like jewelry etc., should not be kept with students while staying in the hostel. It
is student’s own responsibility to safeguard her/his Laptops, Money by locking suitcases and
bags. If any loss is found, management will not take any responsibility.
 Student has to intimate to the hostel authorities before you giving police complaint against
losses.
 Students are not allowed to indulge in smoking, consumption of Alcohol, Narcotic drugs etc.,
and defaulters will be strictly viewed upon.
 Students are directed that after locking their rooms they have to hand over the keys to security
and can collect them on returning back to the hostel.
 Students must switch off Fans, Lights, Geysers, A/C’s etc., before leaving their rooms.
 Visitors are not allowed inside the hostel at any time, however they are allowed into the
visitor’s hall with the prior permission of the warden. Only family members listed by the
parents are allowed to contact the student. Visiting hours are up to 7.30 pm only and after 7.30
pm visitors are required to leave premises.
 Hostel students are not allowed to come into the hostel after 3.00 pm in case morning shift
students and 6.00pm for day shift students. Those students who are utilizing computer lab,
library etc., after the times specified have to submit the permission slip to the security while
entering into the hostel.
 During public holiday outings, those who seek permission to leave the hostel will have to
obtain a written permission from warden. Permission will be given only to those students
who get permission from parents to leave the hostel during holidays/outings. Moving out of
14
 campus without permission are strictly prohibited.
 Strict study hours from 7.30 to10.30 pm shall be maintained in the hostel. The hostellers must
be in their allotted rooms during study hours.
 The general complaints of any kind should be noted in the complaint register, which is
available at the hostel office. Registered complaints only will be entertained.
 Any health problem should be brought to the notice of Warden/Floor In – charge for necessary
treatment.
Transportation:
 The institution runs 70 buses covering all the important points in Vijayawada City,
Mangalagiri, Guntur & Tenali towns with a total seating capacity of 4000 students in two
shifts.
 Transport is available 24 hrs in case of any emergency in the institute / hostels.
 Transportation is available for conducting industrial tours and visits etc.
 Regular transport facility available up to 10 PM.
Health Centre
A full-fledged health center with all the facilities is established to cater to the needs of the students,
staff, Faculty and to the general public in the adopted villages. It consists of three doctors
(Homoeopathy, Ayurvedic& Allopathy).
Cafeteria
 KL University has a spacious canteen with latest equipment and hygienic environment
which provides quality food and prompts service and caters to needs of all the students
and the staff.
 A central cafeteria of 1500 Sq.m. is available in the campus. Mini cafes and fast-food
centers are available in various blocks.
 The canteen is open from 6:30 a.m. to 8:30 p.m. There is a wide variety of North-Indian
and South-Indian cuisine and the students enjoy the pleasure of eating during the breaks.
Cool aqua water for drinking is available.
Placements:
K L University has meticulously planned to make all its outgoing students employed. The
University had installed the infrastructure, employed well experienced faculty, designed and
delivered programs that help enhancing the communication and soft skills which are required for

15
making the students employable. An excellent system is in place that considers all the issues that
make a student employable. The University has been successful for the last 7 years, in employing
all the students who have registered and eligible for placement through its offices located across the
country. About 50 trained personnel work extensively to make the students ready for recruitment
by the Industry.
Counselling & Career Guidance
A special Counseling Cell consisting of professional student counselors, psychologists, senior
professors counsels/helps the students in preparing themselves to cope with studies, perform well
in the tests & various competitions. This Cell provides its services to the students in getting the
solutions for their personal problems and also provides career guidance with the help of Industrial
Relations and Placements (IRP) department.
A group of 20 students are allotted to a senior faculty member who counsels them regularly and
acts as their mentor.
Social Service Wing
KL University has a social service wing which is used to channelizing the social service activities
of the faculty, the staff and the students. It has adopted 5 nearby villages and conducts activities
like medical camps, literacy camps and educates the villagers regarding hygiene and health care on
a regular basis.
NSS Wing of Institute
Regularly organizes Blood donation camps, Blood grouping camps, Fund collection and
distribution to poor children and old age homes, distribution of old clothes and free medicines to
slum dwellers, tree plantations, AIDS awareness program, teaching basic computer skills to a target
group of 500 people in villages.
Hobby Clubs
Wholly and solely managed by the students, the clubs have in the past contributed much to the
cultural life of the campus and to the cultural evolution of the students, A number of student bodies
and clubs operate in the campus like music society, dance club, drama society, literary and
debating club, English press club, drawing club, painting club, mime club, computer club etc.
Students manage entire activities and budget of the organization for the entire semester in advance.
Around 4000 students are the active members of the Hobby Clubs.
Life Skills and Inner Engineering

16
KL University feels that it is its responsibility to mould the students as good human beings
contributing to the country and to the society by producing responsible citizens. Along with the
regular programs every student admitted into KLU undergoes a one week special life skills
/orientation program. Through this program, KLU is producing the students with the clarity of
thoughts and charity at hearts. Strict regularity, implicit obedience, courtesy in speech and conduct,
cleanliness in dress and person is expected of each KLU student. Life skills and inner engineering
teach a student his/her obligations towards GOD, himself /herself his/her country and fellow
human beings. Every student is encouraged to practise his/her own religious faith and be tolerant
and respectful towards other religions.
Technical Festival
KLU organizes various programs for the all round development of the students. The technical
festival and project exhibition is being organized in the odd semester (October) every year to elicit
the innovative ideas and technical skills of the students.
Cultural Festival
The cultural festival in the even semester (February) of every year is the best platform for the
students for exhibiting their talents and creativity. Through these festivals KLU is imparting
organizational skills, leadership skills, competitive spirit, and team behavior skills to our students.
Along with the knowledge, KLU festivals are providing recreation to the student community.
INNOVATION, INCUBATION AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP CENTER
KLU being a pioneering institute supporting Academics and Research in Engineering, Science and
Technology is endowed with all the infrastructure and highly experienced faculty, has an
Innovation, Incubation and Entrepreneurship Centre (IIE) that comprises of:
 Innovation centre which aims to inculcate a spirit of innovation.
 Incubation centre which aims to incubate the innovations through prototype product
development.
 Entrepreneurship Development Centre (EDC) which aims at fostering
entrepreneurial skills among the students.

17
 UNIVERSITY ADMINISTRATION
KoneruSatyanarayana,
President
Sri KoneruSatyanarayana, BE, FIE, FIETE, MIEEE graduated in
Electronics and Communication Engineering in the year 1977. Along with
Sri KoneruLakshmaiah, he is the co-founder of the Institute which was
established in the year 1980. He is an educationist of eminence and also
an industrialist of great repute. He runs a number of industries in and around Vijayawada.

Dr. M Ramamoorty
Chancellor
Dr. Ramamoorty assumed charge as Chancellor, K L University with
effect from 30th March 2015 after successful career as a Professor in IIT
Kanpur and also as first Director General of CPRI.
Dr. Ramamoorty obtained his B.E. (Honors) from Andhra University in
1957 and M.E. from IISc Bangalore in 1959. He obtained his MASc and PhD from Toronto
University in 1965 and 1967 respectively.
He was a Commonwealth Fellow at U of T from 1964 to 1967. He then joined IIT Kanpur as a
faculty member in the Electrical Engineering Department and became a professor in 1972. He
had established the first graduate program in Power Electronics in India in 1968 at IIT Kanpur.
He had supervised 12 doctoral projects and was associated with many sponsored research
activities with industries like BHEL and Hindustan Steel Limited during his tenure at IIT
Kanpur.

Dr.L.S.S Reddy
Vice Chancellor
Dr. L.S.S. Reddy is an eminent Professor in Computer Science and
Engineering Department holding Ph.D in Computer Science Engineering
from BITS Pilani. Dr. Reddy is an outstanding administrator, a prolific
researcher and a forward looking educationist. Dr. Reddy has over 30

18
years of experience in Teaching, Research and Administration at prestigious institutes like BITS
Pilani, CBIT etc.
Dr.L.S.S.Reddy had joined KoneruLakshmaiah College of Engineering in December 1995 and
proved his administrative excellence as a Head of Department of Computer Science and
Engineering. Dr. Reddy was instrumental and a driving force as Principal (2002-2009) in
promoting KLCE as one of leading Institutions in India.

Dr.A.V.S.Prasad
Pro-Vice Chancellor
Dr.A.V.S.Prasad, M.E (Hydraulics & Irrigation Engineering) and Ph.D
(Environmental Sciences and Technology) from JNTU, Hyderabad is a
Professor in Civil Engineering. He has a rich experience of 27 Years in
academics and 20 years in administration at various caders ranging from
Head of the Department, Dean, Principal and Director.

Dean (Academics I/C) Prof. N Venkatram dean.academics@kluniversity.in

Dean (R&D) Dr.K.L.Narayana drkln@kluniversity.in

Dean (School of Engineering) Prof.A.Anand Kumar anandkumar@kluniversity.in

Dean (P&D) Dr. J.K.R.Sastry drsastry@kluniversity.in

Dean (Student Affairs) Dr.Habibulla Khan habibulla@kluniversity.in

Dean (Examinations &

Dr.Ch. Hanumantha Rao hrao_ce@kluniversity.in
Evaluation)

Principal, KLU College of

Prof.A.Anand Kumar principal_engg@kluniversity.in
Engineering

Principal, KLU Academic Staff

Dr. A. Srinath srinath@kluniversity.in
College

19
Controller of Examinations Dr.K.J. Babu kjbabu_ipe@kluniversity.in

Director (Internal Quality

Prof. K. Subba Rao director.anqc@kluniversity.in
Assurance)

Director (Placements) Prof. N B V Prasad nbvprasaad@kluniversity.in

Director-Academic
Dr. B. Thirumala Rao drbtrao@kluniversity.in
Registrations

FED Coordinator Dr. B. Raghu Kumar raghu@kluniversity.in

Director (Practice School) Dr.P.V.Chalapathi pvc@kluniversity.in

Director - Consultancy cell,

School of Civil and Dr. K. Ramesh kookutlaramesh@kluniversity.in
Architecture

Director (Engineering-PG) Dr. K. Sarat Kumar kksarat@kluniversity.in

Director (Innovation,
Incubation and Dr.K. Rajasekhar rajasekhar_cse@kluniversity.in
Entrepreneurship Cell)

Vice-Principal, KLU College of

Dr. V. Srikanth vsrikanth@kluniversity.in
Engineering

Associate Dean-Academics Dr. K. Thirupathi Rao kthirupathirao@kluniversity.in

Associate Dean-Academics Dr. G.V Subbba Rao gvs0raos@kluniversity.in

Associate Dean-Academics Prof. DVA Rama Sastry dvarsastry@kluniversity.in

Dr.
Associate Dean-Academics dr.v.v.madhav@kluniversity.in
Vedantamvenumadhav

20
Associate Dean-Academic
Dr. K. Subrahmanyam smkodukula@kluniversity.in
research

HOD, BT Dr.K. Srinivasulu, nikhi_bt@kluniversity.in

Dr. C. Ravi Kumar

HOD, CIVIL drcrkreddy@kluniversity.in
Reddy

HOD, CSE Dr.V. Srikanth vsrikanth@kluniversity.in

HOD, ECE Dr.A.S.C.S.Sastry ascssastry@kluniversity.in

HOD, EEE Dr. O. Chandra Sekhar sekharobbu@kluniversity.in

HOD, ECM Dr.M. Suman suman.maloji@kluniversity.in

Prof.Y.V.Hanumantha
HOD, MECH dryvhrao@kluniversity.in
Rao

HOD, PE Dr.G.Ravi Kumar ravig@kluniversity.in

HOD, MBA Dr.M Kishore Babu kishore@kluniversity.in

HOD, COMMERCE Prof.A.V.N. Murthy dravnmurty@kluniversity.in

HOD, MATHEMATICS Dr.V. Vasantha Kumar vvkumar@kluniversity.in

HOD, PHYSICS DR.Ch.Rajesh chrajesh@kluniversity.in

Dr.J V Shanmukha
HOD, CHEMISTRY shanmukh_fed@kluniversity.in
Kumar

HOD, ENGLISH Dr.M. Latha mlatha@kluniversity.in

haritha_donavalli@kluniversity.
HOD, BES Dr.D. Haritha
in

21
Head, Super Computer Centre
& In-charge ERP Prof.S. Venkateswarlu somu23@kluniversity.in
Implementation Project

Department of Visual
Sri Jai Kishan Y jaikishan@kluniversity.in
Communications

Professor In-charge (Training) Sri T.Ravi Kumar rktata@kluniversity.in

Professor In-charge (Centre for

Mr.J. Somlal jarupulasomu@kluniversity.in
Competitive Examinations)

Doctoral Admissions Dr.K.L.Narayana drkln@kluniversity.in

Dr.J V Shanmukha
Foreign Student Admissions shanmukh_fed@kluniversity.in
Kumar

22
23
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS

1.0 INTRODUCTION TO THE PROGRAMME

The Koneru Lakshmaiah Education Foundation (K L University), Vaddeswaram shall confer

M.Tech Post graduate degree to candidates who are admitted to the Master of Technology
Programme and fulfill all the requirements for the award of the degree.

1. Student will be studying 8 CDC courses and 4 electives from the given courses.

2. Evaluation Component Seminar in semesters I/I and I/II will be 2 credits (0-0-2). The
students will be registering in the courses of his choice where they will be presenting the
seminar on any topic related to the subject but not from the syllabus.
3. Thesis component in 3rd semester should be continued in the 4th semester until unless a
student opts for industry project.
4. The minimum credits required for graduation will be 85 – 90 credits.
2.0 BRANCHES OF STUDY

M.Tech duration: 2 Years with following specializations.

 Bio-Technology
 Computer Science & Engineering
 Computer Networks & Security
 Communication & Radar Systems
 VLSI
 Embedded Systems
 Power Electronics & Drives
 Power Systems
 Thermal Engineering
 Structural Engineering
 Mechatronics
 Wireless Sensor Networks
 Signal Processing

24
3.0 PROGRAMME MODEL

 The course duration of M.Tech is 2 years.

 KL University operates in the semester pattern.

 Each semester has 90 working days.

 The total number credits to earned is 85 to 90

 The University awards M.Tech for post graduate degree programme.

 The maximum course duration is 4 years

 Academic regulations are approved by the Academic Council.

 The medium of instruction is English.

4.0 PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES

The Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs) are the statements that describe the expected
achievements from the programme. They are guided by global and local needs, vision of the
Institution, long term goals etc. The Programme Educational Objectives of M.Tech Programme
include:
I. To mould the students to become effective global science students in the competitive
environment of modern society.
II. To provide students with strong foundation in contemporary practices of Science,
different functional areas and scientific environment
III. To emphasize on application oriented learning.
IV. To develop communication, analytical, decision-making, motivational, leadership,
problem solving and human relations skills of the students.
V. To inculcate professional and ethical attitude in students.
VI. To pursue lifelong learning as a means of enhancing knowledge and skills necessary to
contribute to the betterment of profession.

5.0 PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

The M.Tech programme is designed to meet the following outcomes:
a. Ability to practically apply various technological concepts.
b. Demonstrate knowledge of innovative and modern engineering practices.
c. Ability to apply the specialized expertise in relevant practical fields.
d. Ability to communicate effectively and professionally.
25
e. Ability to solve critical practical oriented real time problems.
f. Ability to manage people effectively and become good leaders.
g. Develop professional and ethical attitude and become socially responsible citizens.
h. Ability to carry out cutting edge research in the emerging areas.
i. Understand the global business scenario.
j. Demonstrate their role as engineers or entrepreneurs and contribute to the society.
6.0 PROGRAMME STRUCTURE
6.1 Distribution of courses over the semesters

S Course
SEMESTER – I L T P Cr
No code
1. Core Course - 1
Core Course - 2
2.
3. Core Course - 3
Core Course 4
4.
5. ELECTIVE-I 3 0 0 3
6. ELECTIVE-II 3 0 0 3
7. Seminar 0 0 4 2
TOTAL CREDITS: 24-26

S Course
SEMESTER – II L T P Cr
No code
1. Core Course - 5
Core Course - 6
2.
3. Core Course - 7
4. Core Course 8
5. ELECTIVE-III 3 0 0 3
6. ELECTIVE-IV 3 0 0 3
7. Term Paper 0 0 4 2
TOTAL CREDITS: 24-26

S.No Course Code Second Year Credits

1 Dissertation 36
TOTAL CREDITS: 85-90

26
6.2 Course Precedence

To impart quality higher education and to undertake research and extension with emphasis on
application and innovation that caters to the emerging societal needs through all-round
development of students of all sections enabling them to be globally competitive and socially
responsible citizens with intrinsic values.

6.3 Specialization Streams

A student will be awarded a Degree with Specialization if he/she completes 4 courses from a
particular stream within the discipline. By a careful selection of electives within a particular
stream, a student can get a degree with specialization. That is, a student can get a Degree with
Specialization during regular M.Tech programme, without overloading himself / herself.

7.0 ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA

Admissions to the M.Tech programme shall be made subject to the eligibility, qualifications
and specialization prescribed by the University for each Programme, from time to time.

Admissions shall be made either on the basis of merit rank obtained by the qualifying
candidates at an Entrance Test conducted by the K.L.University or on the basis of GATE /
PGECET score, subject to reservation prescribed by the University or Government policies
from time to time.

8.0 ATTENDANCE AND DETENTION

Attendance
a) It is mandatory for, a student to attend all the classes, tutorials, laboratories and other
evaluation components conducted by the University. A student may be detained from
appearing for an examination on grounds of shortage of attendance.
b) In each course attendance will be treated as evaluation component and marks are awarded
as shown below:
c)

% of Attendance in
Marks awarded
Theory & Practical classes
≥ 95 5
≥ 90 and < 95 4
≥ 85 and < 90 3
≥ 80 and < 85 2
≥ 75 and < 80 1

27
Detention

a) 75% attendance and 40% internal marks (internal evaluation components) are mandatory to
attain eligibility to appear for the comprehensive examination in a course. If a student fails
to maintain 75% attendance and 40% internal marks in a course he/she will be awarded
with NA Report in that course. In such cases, student will not be permitted to attend the
comprehensive examination of that course(s) where he/she has obtained NA Report. He/she
has to register and repeat the course whenever it is offered.

b) However, some relaxation to this rule is possible in the case of students participating in
extra -curricular activities as identified below:
 One week for state level competitions.
 Two weeks for National level competitions and
 Three weeks for International events irrespective of the
number of events and/the number of participations in a semester.

c) If the period of absence in a semester is for a short duration (of not more than one week)
prior application for leave should be submitted to the Head of the Department clearly
stating the reasons for absence along with supporting documents. The Head of the
Department will grant such leave at his/her discretion. He/ She may be allowed for makeup
of Laboratory/workshop classes conducted during the period of absence.
d) Absence for a period not exceeding one week in a semester due to sickness or any other
unavoidable reason for which prior application could not be made may be condoned by the
Dean-Academics, provided he is satisfied with the explanation.
e) If the period of absence is likely to exceed one week, a prior application for grant of leave
should be submitted to the Head of the Department.
f) In special cases and for sufficient cause shown, the Dean-Academics on the
recommendation of the Head of the Department may condone the deficiency not exceeding
10% in attendance due to ill-health, when the application submitted at the time of the actual
illness is supported by a certificate from an authorized medical officer.
g) A student must intimate his/her absence to the Superintendent /Warden of the Hostel in
which he/she is residing, before availing of any leave. Failing to do so will be construed as
breach of discipline.

28
9.0 REGISTRATION
A student (newly admitted or on rolls) has to register for the course on the day of registration
for each semester. Students failing to register for the course will not be permitted to attend
classes.
Students will be permitted to register only if they have:
1. Cleared all the fees, outstanding dues of University and / or hostel of previous semesters,
paid all prescribed fees for the current semester, and not been debarred from registering for
a specified period on disciplinary or any other ground.
2. Normally, no late registration shall be permitted. However, considering any compelling
reason, a student may be permitted for late registration (within one week of commencement
of semester) with prior approval from the Director (Academic Registration). Late
registration may be done with payment of requisite fine.
3. The University reserves the right to cancel the registration of a student from a course or
semester or debar from the degree on disciplinary grounds.
4. Registration of students in each semester will be organized by the Academic Section. The
registration will be done in respective departments; the course details being verified by the
faculty mentor of the batch. Payment of dues etc., will be verified by the Academic Section.
5. A student who does not register on the day announced for the purpose may be permitted by
Dean Registration, in consideration of any compelling reason, late registration within next 5
working days on payment of an additional fee as prescribed by the University.
Normally no late registration shall be permitted after the fifth working day from the
scheduled date, except in special cases, a serious medical problem, a family calamity or
participation in a national event, to be approved by the Director on recommendation of
Dean Registration.
9.1 Fees and payments
A student admitted to any course shall be required to pay, at the time of joining, and also in
subsequent semesters, prevalent tuition and other fees as prescribed by the University till
he/she is on roll including the period beyond the normal four-year duration.
There is no discount in fees for reduced academic load. Normally the fee structure will not
change during the programme; but if the University revises the structure in the middle of a
programme, a student is obliged to comply. The fee will be collected under the broad heads:
Admission fee, Tuition fee, Student Activity fee, Hostel rent, Caution deposit, Convocation fee
and miscellaneous fees. Caution deposit collected will be returned at the end of the programme
after due adjustment, if any, except for those who leave the University prematurely.
29
When a student leaves the University on successful completion of the course, caution deposit is
refundable after deduction of dues and charges, if any.

 If a student is removed or he withdraws/leaves the University in the mid-session without

completing the entire course, all fees paid including the caution deposit will be forfeited by
the University. Mess advance may be refunded after deduction of dues, if any.
 If a student does not register in three consecutive semesters his name will be struck off the
rolls.
Exceptions

Notwithstanding anything stated in the rules, the Academic Council can make special
provisions and exceptions depending on the merit of a case. Such cases shall not be cited as
precedence in future occasions of similar nature.

9.2 Pre-Requisites

Admission to the M.Tech programme shall be made subject to the eligibility, qualifications and
specialization prescribed by the University for each Programme, from time to time.
Admissions shall be made either on the basis of merit rank obtained by the qualifying
candidates at an Entrance Test conducted by the K.L.University or on the basis of GATE /
PGECET score, subject to reservations prescribed by the University or Government policies
from time to time.

10.0 PROGRAMME DELIVERY SYSTEM

LTP Structure
Learning well is understood as acquiring knowledge and skills at higher cognitive levels, which
include Apply, Analyze, Evaluate and Create. Such learning is ensured by making it heavily
activity and practice oriented rather than lecture oriented.

Based on the nature of the course the learning pedagogy will change that is reflected by L-T-P
structure for a course. ‘L’ (Lecture classes) stands for class room contact sessions. ‘T’ stands
for Tutorial sessions for reinforced learning through participatory discussion/self-study/desk
work and such other novel methods that make a student absorb and assimilate more effectively
the contents delivered in the lecture classes. ‘P’ stands for Practice/Practical sessions for
laboratory/field studies that equip students to acquire the much required skill component. A
credit is defined to be as one hour of lecture or two hours of laboratory per week or one hour of
tutorial per week over a semester.

30
11.0 BACKLOG COURSES
A course is considered to be a backlog if the student has obtained ‘F’ grade / NA Report in the
course; the following regulations apply to a student who has backlog(s):

a) A student having backlogs has to clear backlog courses first.

b) If the backlog course(s) becomes prerequisite for any other course, he cannot register for
those prescribed courses.

c) A student, who has backlog courses, when he/she appears in Academic Counseling Board,
shall come under all regulations mentioned in ACB.

d) A student detained due to lack of credits / more number of backlogs in a semester has to
register only for that semester after acquiring the eligibility for promotion. Under no
circumstances he/she is allowed to register for next semester without registering for the
detained one. This is applicable for those joined from 2010-11 academic year onwards.

12.0 GRADES AND REPORTS

A candidate shall be eligible for the award of the respective degree if he satisfies the minimum
academic requirements in every course and secures ‘satisfactory’ or higher grade in the
courses/report on his dissertation/dissertation and viva-voce.

For the award of M.Tech degree a student must have earned stipulated credits (as approved by
respective B.O.S) and obtained a minimum CGPA of 5.5.

 M.Tech Degree with Second class will be offered to those having CGPA < 6.5.
 M.Tech Degree with First class will be offered to those having CGPA ≥ 6.5.
 First class with distinction will be offered to those having CGPA ≥ 7.5 provided the
student has cleared all the courses in first attempt (Regular) within the stipulated time.

31
 At the end of all evaluation - components based on the
performance of the student in courses and seminars, each
student is awarded with letter grade on a relative scale.
The list of letter grades and its connotation are given
below:

Grade Qualitative Grade

X Meaning
Excellent Point
10
A Very Good attached
8
B Good 7
C Fair 6
D Satisfactory 5
E Pass 4
F Fail 0

The grades ‘X’ and ‘F’ will be earned and remaining

grades will be awarded. A student scoring 80% or more
of overall score will earn an ‘X’ grade.

A student getting less than 50% of overall score and 40%

in the comprehensive examination will be considered to
have earned F grade.

a) To earn an X grade, the student should have scored aggregate marks of ≥ 80%.
b) A student who obtains ‘F’ grade has to reappear for the comprehensive examination.
However, such a student need not attend the classes and marks obtained in internal evaluation
components and attendance will be carried forward to the subsequent attempts of the student.
c) In case of a student who has earned F grade, after the student has fulfilled all the
requirements for passing it will be converted into a valid grade by considering grade cutoffs
of the batch in which he/she had appeared for the course for 1st time.
d) The overall performance of the student is described by Cumulative Grade Point Average
(CGPA) and is calculated taking into consideration grade obtained by the student in all credited
courses and credits attached to it. It is the weighted average of the grade points of all the letter
grades obtained in credited courses by the student from his entry into the University. CGPA is
computed as follows:

c1 g1  c2 g 2  .....  cn g n
CGPA  32
c1  c2  .....  cn
 where c1,c2 ….. cg denotes credits associated with the course applied and g1, g2…denotes grades
obtained by the student.

e) At the end of each semester the University issues grade sheet indicating the CGPA of the
student. However, grade sheet will not be issued to the student if he/she has any outstanding
dues.

f) The Instructor/Course Coordinator can award the following reports depending on the cases:

(i) NA (Not Attended) is awarded to the student if the student has shortage of attendance.
When student is given NA he/she has to repeat the course. It should be noted here that NA
is different from F grade. For a student with F grade his/her internal marks, attendance
and attendance marks will be carried forward. While for a student awarded with NA
Report has to attend the classes.
(ii) NR (Not Registered) is awarded when a student has not registered for a course. When a
student is given NR grade he/she has to register for the course when offered next. If a
course in which a student is given NR grade is pre-requisite grade for another course, the
student shall not be registered for such a course.
(iii)GP (Grade Pending) is awarded in situations where Course Coordinator cannot
communicate the grade in time because of operational difficulties. The GP report has to
be converted into valid grade by the Course Coordinator at a later stage.
(iv) RC (Registration Cancelled) is awarded to a student for various reasons when the
registration for the course is cancelled by the University. Such a student will have a
register for the course in subsequent semester / summer semester whenever the course is
offered next.
(v) DIP (Discontinued from Programme) is awarded in situations where a student wants to
discontinue with the prior approval of the University.

13.0 ACADEMIC COUNSELING BOARD (ACB)

1. A student will be put under Academic Counseling Board under the following circumstances:

a. Has CGPA of less than 5.5 for Post graduate degree programmes.

b. Has ‘F’ grade in more than two courses.

2. The students under Academic Counseling Board may not be allowed to register for all regular
courses in the semester based on the recommendation of Academic Council Board. That is,
University reserves all rights to decelerate the degree programme of the student.
3. Remedial classes will be conducted for students who are in ACB.
33
14.0 OVERLOADING AND UNDERLOADING

A student is permitted to overload himself/herself (registering for more courses) in a semester

subject to certain restrictive conditions.

15.0 ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION

University offers flexibility for M.Tech degree students in doing the courses. In addition to the
prescribed courses, a student can register for more electives, summer term courses, evening
courses provided his/her timetable and University facility permits. Any extra courses done by
acceleration would be reflected in the transcript but not in the CGPA. The University permits a
student to decelerate his degree programme as well. Any student is permitted to withdraw from
the courses for which he/she has registered, owing to his personal problems or any other valid
reason.

16.0 ELECTIVE COURSE

The University offers a pool of electives in all disciplines. A student is permitted to choose the
elective courses of his/her choice within his own discipline.

17.0 RE-APPEARANCE

The University permits a student to repeat a course to improve the grade subject to certain
restrictive conditions.

18.0 BETTERMENT BY RE-REGISTRATION

A candidate having low SGPA / CGPA can reappear in the end examination when he has
obtained C or D grade for improvement before the completion of M.Tech programme. The
internal evaluation components in such case will be carried forward and grading will be done
with the current batch of students. However the grades obtained out of improvement will not be
considered for award of distinction or Gold medal.

19.0 WITHDRAWAL AND SUBSTITUTION OF COURSE

a) A Student is permitted to withdraw from an elective course within one week after the
commencement of the semester with the approval of Dean-Academics.
b) A Student is normally not permitted to withdraw from compulsory course(s) of the
discipline.
However if a student desires to withdraw from compulsory courses of the discipline, he/she
should seek prior permission from Dean-Academics.

34
 However, a student is not permitted to withdraw from compulsory course and substitute the
same with an elective course.
In situations, when a student withdraws from a compulsory course, he/she must have to
complete the course before graduation.

c) Whenever a student withdraws from compulsory course(s), the student has to register for
the course(s) from which he/she is permitted to withdraw whenever the course(s) are
offered. This implies, a student has to complete all the compulsory courses prescribed by
the Department for graduation.

Within one week of the commencement of the semester, a student is permitted to substitute
an elective course (substitution) with prior approval of Dean-Academics subject to
availability.

20.0 SUMMER TERM AND EVENING COURSES

If the number of F grades and/or registration cancelled (detained) in a course taught in even or
odd semester is significant, a department may offer the course during the summer vacation.
When a summer course is offered, it will be compulsory for all students who have secured an
‘F’ grade in that course. There will be no alternative mid semester or supplementary
examination in that course. Students who need to sit for supplementary or alternative mid
semester exams on medical, family calamity or any other reason except poor academic
performance may sit in the corresponding exams of the summer course, without attending
classes if they satisfy the attendance requirement.

The summer courses will be identical in scope and manner of execution to the
corresponding courses of regular semesters, except that the number of class hours per week
may be higher. Attendance requirement will also be identical. The examinations will be
conducted by the academic section in the usual manner. No separate examination will be
arranged for students who miss the summer course, or any other examination.

21.0 DEGREE WITH SPECIALIZATION

A student will be awarded a Degree with Specialization if he/she completes courses from a
particular stream within the discipline. By a careful selection of electives within a particular
stream, a student can get a degree with specialization. That is, a student can get a Degree with
Specialization during regular programme, without overloading himself / herself.

35
22.0 GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS

A student must fulfill the following requirements for graduating:

1. Must have cleared a minimum of 85-90 credits.
2. Cleared all the requirements of discipline.
3. Obtained a minimum GPA of 5.5.
4. Must have finished all the above mentioned requirements in less than twice the period
mentioned in the Academic structure for each programme which includes deceleration
period chosen by the student, deceleration imposed by University or debarred from the
University.

Credit Distribution

The four semester M.Tech. Programmes offered in various disciplines and streams by different
departments of the institute are based on the credit system and provide a student with wide
choice of courses. Each programme comprises of several core and elective courses and project
work. These programmes, along with the course structure, are indicated here under.

The Programme is spread over a period of four semesters that embodies 12 courses with a
credit load of 85-87 credits.

S.
Type of the course Number Credits Percentage
No
1 Core courses 8 33-38 40.2
Professional
2 4 12-14 13.7
electives
3 Term Paper 1 2 0.25
4 Seminar 6 2 0.25
5 Dissertation work 1 36 41.3
Total 20 85-90 100

Core Courses
A paper which should compulsorily be studied by a candidate as a core-requirement to
complete the requirements of a degree is defined as a Core Paper. A student has to
compulsorily undergo 8 core courses.

36
Elective Courses

The students can pursue elective courses in different areas of his interest. Each student must
choose four elective courses.

23.0 EXAMINATIONS

The Examination office of the Academic Section will centrally conduct the Mid-semester and
End-semester Examinations in respect of theory courses unless otherwise arranged. The
examinations will normally be “closed book type”, where the students are not permitted to
bring any material. All necessary charts and tables will be provided by the University. It is the
responsibility of the course faculty to recommend the material to be provided, and to check
with the examination office that the arrangement has indeed been done.

While normal scientific calculators are permitted, other electronic devices such as
programmable calculators and calculators containing communication devices are forbidden.
Any exception to these provisions must be specially approved by the Academic Council.

24.0 EVALUATION

Teaching and Evaluation

I. Teaching
a. Course(s) taught by a single instructor (theory) is referred to as single section course and
course(s) taught by group of instructors in more than one section is referred to as multi-
section courses.
b. The teacher for single section courses or associated with multi-section courses is referred to
as Instructor.
c. In case of multi- section courses, the team is led by an instructor known as Course
Coordinator. For single section courses, an Instructor will be designated as Course
Coordinator. Course Coordinator is also an instructor in multi-section course.
d. A team of instructors, under the leadership of Course Coordinator, work together for
meeting all requirements of teaching, evaluation and administrative aspects of the course.
The Course Coordinator has the responsibility of conducting the course with the
cooperation of all instructors in the team.
e. Course Handout shall be given to the students. It shall also be placed on the E-Learning
portal.
f. Students will be assessed on formative basis with a weightage of 40 per cent. The
summative assessment carries a weightage of 60 per cent.

37
24.1 Evaluation of Internal Examinations

Evaluation Scheme
a) Formative Assessment: Max Marks: 40
S. No Component Duration Weightage

Internal assessment Exams (Test 1 & 2)

1 (75% of the higher score and 25% of the 1½ hours 15
lower score will be considered)

Assignment/Assignment Test/Written Case

Analysis/ Live Project/Reading
2 15
Seminar/Mini-project/Paper
Presentations/Operation workout

Surprise Test - Objective or Descriptive 10 to 20

3 5
(Average of two tests will be considered) minutes

4 Class attendance 5
Total 40
i. Two internal assessment exams (Test 1 & Test 2) will be conducted for all courses during
the semester. The internal exams will be conducted for 30 marks which in turn will be
scaled to 15 marks. The schedule of exams will be notified by the Principal.
ii. A Surprise Test is of objective or subjective nature decided by the Course Coordinator
and is conducted without prior intimation. There will be two such tests in a semester.
iii. Assignment /Assignment Test/ Live Project /Reading Seminar / Written Case Analysis/
Mini-project / Paper Presentations / Operation workout:
One or two of these components as detailed in Table No. 1 will be implemented for each
course. Applicable component(s) will also be detailed in the Course Handout. Wherever
applicable, presentation by a student would be integrated with the component.
iv. Class attendance is monitored by each Instructor and based on the percentage of
attendance marks are awarded.
v. In order to maintain transparency in evaluation, the answer sheets of all formative
assessment components shall be shown to the students within THREE days of conducting
the tests. If a student is not convinced with the marks awarded he/she can apply for
recheck. However, the student can apply for recheck on the day of returning the answer
sheet within the classroom only.
vi. It shall be the responsibility of the Course Coordinator to display solution key on the
notice board immediately after the evaluation component with evaluation scheme. The
Instructor should stick to the evaluation scheme announced while checking the answer
sheets.

38
vii. Where there are multiple Course Instructors, the Coordinator shall ensure that a common
question paper is administered for Test 1 and Test 2.

Distribution of Weightage

examination
Type of

Marks %
Nature of
S. No

examination
Scheme of examination
and mode of
Assessment
Semester end
This examination question
examination
60 paper in theory subjects will be
(external
for a maximum of 60 marks.
evaluation)
Test 2 mid - exams each for 20
1 marks and of 1 1/2 hr duration
are to be conducted. For a total
20
Test of 20 marks, 75% of better of
2 the two and 25% of the other
are added and reported.
6 Question to be released in
Assignme
nt Test
* Theory

advance. 2 Questions allotted

5
1 by Examiners choice to be
answered. Duration 45 min.
40
Assignme
Home

Average of Home Assignments

nt

5
minimum 2 per subject.

Surprise A maximum of two surprise

5
Quiz quizzes per subject
Attendance/
Class notes

5 marks are allotted for

5
attendance and class notes

39
 60 marks are allotted
Semester end
6 for semester end
Lab exam
0 laboratory/ drawing
(ext. evaluation)
examination.
Mid-term Lab Tests in

* Practical
Internal
2 lab experiments/
2 evaluatio
0 drawing/Job works and
n
4 Record.
0 Internal
1 Continuous Viva Voce
evaluatio
5 evaluation.
n
5 Attendance.
Two Status reports and
Internal two seminars in first
evaluatio semester-50 marks
Dissertation n Two Status reports and
work 100
3 300 two seminars in second
Semester- %
IV External semester-50 marks
evaluatio Final report – 100
n marks
Viva-voce – 100 marks

*Note:
1. For pure Theory & pure Lab courses follow the above
Evaluation.
2. For Combined Theory & Lab courses follow the proportion rule as given below:

a) 3-0-2 nature Theory Credits & Lab Credits are in 3:1 ratio Hence the Internal marks
evaluated for Theory & Lab as above to be divided in the ratio 3:1 and clubbed.

b) 3-1-2 nature Theory & Lab credits are in 4:1 ratio. Hence the Internal marks evaluated for
Theory & Lab as above to be divided in the ratio 4:1 and clubbed.

The performance of the candidate in each semester shall be evaluated course wise, with a
maximum of 100 marks for pure Theory courses and 100 marks for theory and practicals, on
the basis of continuous Internal Evaluation and Semester end comprehensive Examination.
Evaluation of Dissertation
Every candidate shall be required to submit dissertation after taking up a topic approved by the
Department /University.

 A DAC consisting of HOD and Supervisor shall monitor the progress of the dissertation.
40
 The duration of the dissertation shall be two semesters. The candidate shall submit
dissertation with the approval of DAC at the end of 4th semester.
 A candidate shall be allowed to take viva voce examination only after completion of all the
course papers. The Viva-voce examination may be conducted once in two months for all the
candidates submitted during that period.
 Three copies of the dissertation in the prescribed format certified by the supervisor & HOD
shall be presented to DAC. One copy which is sent to the examiner will be forwarded to the
dept. library after adjudication and one copy to the supervisor.
 Besides the supervisor, one senior faculty from the Department of English will adjudicate
the dissertation.
 If the report of the examiner is favorable, Viva-voce examination shall be conducted by a
board consisting of the Supervisor, HOD and an external examiner. The board shall jointly
report on candidate’s work based on the total marks obtained in dissertation through both
internal evaluation and external evaluation.
If the report of the Viva-voce is not satisfactory the candidate will retake the Viva-voce
examination after three months.
25.0 RUSTICATION

A Student may be rusticated from the University on disciplinary grounds based on the
recommendations of a committee constituted by the Vice Chancellor.

26.0 AWARD OF DEGREE

A candidate shall be eligible for the award of respective degree if he satisfies the minimum academic
requirements in every course and secures ‘satisfactory’ or higher grade in the courses/report on his
Dissertation/dissertation and viva-voce.

 For the award of M.Tech degree a student must have earned stipulated credits (as approved by
respective B.O.S) and obtained a minimum CGPA of 5.50.
 M.Tech Degree with Second class will be offered to those having CGPA < 6.5
 M.Tech Degree with First class will be offered to those having CGPA ≥ 6.5
 And first class with distinction will be offered to those having CGPA ≥ 7.5 provided the student has
cleared all the courses in first attempt within the stipulated time.
With – Holding of Results
If the candidate has not paid dues to the University or if any case of in-discipline is pending
against him, the result of the candidate shall be withheld and he will not be allowed/ promoted
into the next/higher semester. The issue of degree is liable to be withheld in such cases.

41
 M. TECH (BT)
DEPARTMENT OF BIOTECHNOLOGY

42
DEPARTMENT OF BIOTECHNOLOGY
S.No Course Code Course Title L-T-P Credits
Semester -1
1 BTC501 Mathematics and Biostatistics 4-0-0 4
2 BTC502 Biochemical Reaction Engineering 3-1-2 5
3 BTC503 Molecular biology and rDNA Technology 3-0-2 4
4 BTC530 Food Biotechnology 3-0-0 3
5 BTC504 Applied Bioinformatics 3-1-2 5
6 BTC531 Medical Biotechnology 3-0-0 3
7 12BT001 Seminar 0-0-4 2
Total Credits 26
Semester -2
1 12BT505 Plant and Animal Biotechnology 3-1-2 5
2 12BT506 Immuno Technology 3-0-2 4
3 12BT507 Bioreactor modeling and simulation 4-0-0 4
Down stream Processing
4 3-0-2
12BT508 4
5 12BT532 Enzyme Technology 3-0-0 3
6 12BT533 Molecular modeling and drug design 3-0-0 3
7 KLUC502 Term paper 0-0-4 2
Total Credits 25
Semester -3 &4
1 BTCT01 Project 36
Total Credits 36
Total Course credits
87

43
 MATHEMATICS & BIOSTATISTICS
Course Code: BTC501 L-T-P: 4-0-0
Prerequisites: Nil Credits:4
Syllabus:
Numerical Methods Solutions of algebraic & transcendental equations - Bisection Method,New-
Raphson Method, Solution of linear simultaneous equations, Simpson’s rule, Trapezoidal rule.
Linear-Differential equation:1st order differential equations, solutions of 1st order,
variableseparable, homogeneous equation linear and enact equations. Linear differential equations
ofhigher order with constant co efficient. Rules for finding complementary function and particular
integral.
Presentation of data & Measures of central tendency-Frequency distribution,
graphicalpresentation of data by histogram, frequency curve and cumulative frequency curves.
Mean,medium, mode, and their simple properties (without derivation), range, mean deviation,
standard deviation and coefficient of variation.
Correlation, Regression and Tests of significance -Simple correlation and regression coefficients
and their relations. Limits of correlationcoefficient, effect of change of origin and scale on
correlation coefficient, Linear regression and equations of line of regression, association
and independence of attributes. Paired and unpaired t-test for correlation and regression coefficient.
T- test for comparison of variances of two populations. Chi-square testindependence
of attributes, goodness of fit, and homogeneity of sample.
Experimental designs- Principles of experimental design, completely randomized design,
randomized block design and Latin square design. Analysis of variance (ANOVA) and its use in
the analysis of RBD. F-test.
Recommended Textbooks:
1. Norman T.J. Bailey, Statistical methods in biology (3rd edition), Cambridge University Press
(1995).
2. Bernard Rosner, Fundamentals of Biostatistics, 5th edition, Thomson Brooks/ Cole, 2000.
3. Higher engineering mathematics by B.S Grawel
References Books:
1. S.C.Gupta and V.K. Kapoor – Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, 9th Extensively
revised edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, 1999.
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Michael D.Greenberg, Pearson Education.
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Ervin Kreyszic.
4. Higher engineering mathematics by Bird john

44
 BIOCHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Course Code: BTC503 L-T-P: 3-1-2

Prerequisites: Nil Credits:5

Syllabus:
Introduction to Biochemical reactions :Types of reactions (Simple stepwise and Parallel)
andtheir applications in fermentations, reaction rates, kinetics of homogenous
reactions,molecularity and order of reaction and temperature dependency of reaction rate.
Design and Operation of Bioreactors : Mass transfer aspect, Bioreactor types and
design,Continuous stirred tank bioreactors, fed batch bioreactors, airlift bioreactors, Fluidised
bedbioreactor, Bioreactors for plant and animal cell, scale up of bioreactor using constant p/v and
constant KLa
Mass Transfer in Bioprocess Operation :Mass transfer by diffusion, Theories of Diffusional
mass transfer film theory, Penetration theory, Surface renewal theory Mass transfer byconvection,
Gas-liquid mass transfer, correlation for mass transfer coefficient, measurement of
KLa, O2 transfer, methodology in fermenters, specific oxygen uptake rate, critical oxygen
concentration, maximum cell concentration.
Heterogeneous reactor systems : Classification of reaction systems, (homogenous,
heterogeneous), mass transfer consideration in heterogeneous systems, Intra particle diffusion and
reaction rates, Effectiveness factor and Thiele modules, observed Thiele modules, criterion
for mass transfers limitations.
Non-ideal flow in bioreactors: Reasons for non-ideality, RTD studies (F-Curve, C-Curve for ideal
and non-ideal CSTR and plug flow reactors), mean and variance of residence time, conversion
using tracer information, modeling of non-ideal flow behavior by dispersion model.
Recommended textbooks:
1. Introduction to Biochemical Engineering by D.G.Rao
2. Biochemical Engineering fundamentals by Bailey and Oliss
Reference Books:
1. Bioprocess Engineering Principles by Pauline and Doran

45
 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY & R-DNA TECHNOLOGY

Course Code: BTC503 L-T-P: 3-0-2

Prerequisites: Nil Credits: 4

Syllabus:

DNA Structure & Replication : Structure of DNA:-Watson & Crick’s model, Types of DNA,
Denaturation and renaturation Kinetics, Replication of DNA- Semi conservative, bi-directional
replication. DNA damage and repair: Types of DNA damages- deamination, alkylation, pyrimidine
dimmers; Repair mechanisms-Excision, mismatch and SOS repair, Recombination: Homologous
and non homologous; rec gene and its role in DNA repair.

Transcription And Translation : Structure of Promoters-RNA Polymerases of Prokaryotic and

Eukaryotic Organism; Transcription- Initiation, Elongation and Termination; Prokaryotic &
Eukaryotic transcription; Post Transcriptional Processing of Eukaryotic RNA. Translation in
prokaryotic and Eukaryotes: initiation of translation, elongation of polypeptide chain, termination
of translation. Post-translational modifications.

Regulation of Gene Expression : Regulation of Gene expression in bacteria- Operon concept, lac,
trp, ara operons. Control of gene expression by sigma factor and post transcriptional control.
Absolute control by antisense RNA’s; enhancers, upstream controlling elements, structural Motifs
of transcription factors: helix turn, zinc finger motifs, leucine zippers and homeotic genes.

Enzymes And Vectors In Cloning : Restriction Enzymes; DNA ligase, Alkaline phosphatase;
Cohesive and blunt end ligation; Linkers; Adaptors; Homopolymeric tailing; Labeling of DNA:
Nick translation, Random priming, Radioactive and non-radioactive probes, Hybridization
techniques: Northern, Southern, Colony hybridization & FISH, Plasmids; Phagemids; Cosmids;
Shuttle vectors, Artificial chromosome vectors (YACs; BACs); Expression vectors: Baculovirus
and pichia vectors system; Plant based vectors: Ti and Ri vectors, Construction of cDNA and
genomic libraries; cDNA and genomic cloning; Expression cloning; Yeast two hybrid system;
Phage display.

PCR, Sequencing & RNA Technologies : Primer design; Fidelity of thermostable enzymes; DNA
polymerases; Types of PCR; PCR Applications Sequencing methods; Enzymatic DNA sequencing;
Chemical sequencing of DNA; Automated DNA sequencing; Introduction to siRNA; siRNA
technology; Micro RNA; Principle and application of gene silencing; Gene knockouts and Gene
Therapy; knockout mice; Disease model; Transgenics; Differential gene expression and protein
array.
Text Books:
1. Fundamentals of Molecular Biology by Avinash & Kakoli Upadhyay; Himalaya
Reference books:
1. Current protocols in Molecular biology; Wiley Publishers.

46
 APPLIED BIOINFORMATICS

Course Code: BTC504 L-T-P: 3-1-2

Prerequisites: Nil Credits:5

Syllabus:

Comparative Genomics Genetic mapping, Physical mapping, SNPs, ESTs, GSS, Gene prediction
methods, Gene prediction tools, Gene annotation, Molecular Predictions with DNA sequence,
Human Genome Project.

Protein Structure Prediction and Evaluation methods

Structure of Protein – PDB, MMDB; Ramachandran Plots; Structure visualization – Rasmol;
Methods of Structure prediction – Homology modeling - SPDBV, Threading, Ab-initio method;
Structure Evaluation – DSSP, ProCheck, Verify 3D; Structure comparison.

Protein Identification And Interactions

Proteomics approaches for protein analysis; Protein identification Programs – Mascot, GFS;
Comparative Proteomics methods; Protein interactions; Protein Interaction dbs – GRID, MINT;
Network Mapping; Biological Pathway dbs – EcoCyc, KEGG; Pathway prediction; Metabolic
pathway reconstruction.

Gene Expression Analysis

Introduction; Serial Analysis of Gene Expression; Microarray, Types of Microarrays, Microarray
Fabrication, Microarray hybridization and detection, Microarray Image Processing and analysis,
Expression ratios, Transformations of the Expression ratio, Data Normalization.

System Biology
Foundations of System Biology- Objectives of System Biology-Strategies relating to In Silico
Modeling of biological processes- Metabolic Networks- Signal Transduction pathways, Gene
Expression patterns – Applications of System Biology Markup Language (SBML), E-cell, V-cell
simulations and Applications

Recommended Textbooks:
1. G. Gibson and SV Muse, A Primer of Genome Science, Second Edition – Sinauer Associates,
Inc.
2. CW Sensen, Essentials of genomics and Bioinformatics, Wiley-VCH publication.
Reference textbooks:
1. Speed T. (ed.) Statistical analysis of gene expression microarray data (CRC, 2003)

47
 PLANT AND ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY

Course Code: 12BT505 L-T-P: 3-1-2

Prerequisites: Nil Credits: 5
Syllabus:

Introduction & Overview

Introduction & Historical Overview of Plant Tissue Culture, Totipotency, Growth &
Cytodifferentiation of Cultured Plant Tissues Nutritional Media- Obligatory & Optional
Constituents, Growth Regulators. Concept of sterilization and aseptic technique, Incubation
Systems: Light & Dark, Static & Agitated, And Problems in Plant Tissue Culture: Contamination,
Phenolics, Recalcitrance and Seasonal variation.

Micro Propagation and Secondary Metabolites

Homozygous Plant Production through Anther Culture. Callus & Suspension Culture Systems and
Organogenesis: Direct & Indirect- Basic aspects, Somatic Embryogenesis, Somaclonal &
Gametoclonal Variation. Plant Secondary Metabolites: Commercial Production using appropriate
media supplements (Elicitors, Growth Factors, Stress Factors, Precursors, Anti-metabolites and
Defense Proteins.

Gene Transfer Techniques and Applications

Gene transfer methods (Direct and Indirect), current status and limitations. Agro bacterium
mediated genetic transformation and application in crop improvement. Herbicide, stress and
disease resistant plants and callus/cell line selection for resistance. Applications of Plant Tissue
culture.

Animal cell culture

Basic requirements for animal cell culture; Cell culture media and reagents; Animal cell, tissue and
organ cultures; Primary culture, secondary culture; Continuous cell lines; Suspension cultures;
Somatic cell cloning and hybridization. Transfection and transformation of cells; Commercial scale
production of animal cells; Stem cells and their application; Application of animal cell culture, for
in vitro testing of drugs; Testing of toxicity of environmental pollutants in
cell culture; Application of cell culture technology in production of human and animal vaccines
and pharmaceutical proteins.

Animal Reproductive Biotechnology

Culture of embryos; Micromanipulation of animal embryos; Cryopreservation of embryos; Embryo
transfer; Embryo-splitting; Embryo sexing; Transgenic animal technology and its different
applications; Animal viral vectors; Animal cloning- basic concepts; Cloning from embryonic cells
and adult cells; Ethical, social and moral issues related to cloning. Introduction to animal
genomics; Different methods for the characterization of animal genomes, SNP, STR, QTLS, RFLP,
RAPD, Genetic basis for disease resistance; Biocrimes and Bioterrorism.
Recommended textbooks:
1. Experiments in Plant Tissue Culture (Dodds, J.H. and Roberts, L.W.) 1985.
2. Ed. John R.W. Masters, Animal Cell Culture - Practical Approach, 3rd Edition, OUP, 2000.
3. Ed. Martin, Clynes Animal Cell Culture Techniques, Springer, 1998.
48
4. Plant Tissue Culture methods and application in agriculture (Thorpe, T.A.) 1981;
Reference books:
1. An Introduction to Plant Tissue Culture.MK Razdan.2nd Ed.2003. Oxford and IBH.
2. Plant Biotechnology by C.Chawla.2004.Oxford and IBH.
3. Animal Cell Biotechnology. Portner, 2nd Edition, Humana Press, 2007.
4. Plant Biotechnology and its applications in Plant tissue culture by Ashwani Kumar and Shikha
Roy.

IMMUNO TECHNOLOGY

Course Code: 12BT506 L-T-P: 3-0-2

Prerequisites: Nil Credits:4

Syllabus:
Immune system overview, innate and acquired immune system. Components of immune
system.Phagocytosis; Inflammation, opsonization. Primary and secondary lymphoid organs.
Complement. B cell, T cell ontogeny. Characteristics of antigen, T cell dependent and independent
antigens and Super antigens. Types and applications of Hapten and Adjuvant.

Immune response
Generation of immune response - Primary and Secondary immune responses. Structure, functions
of antibody and BCR.. Generation of Antibody diversity. TCR structure, δγTCR. MHCI and II
gene, polymorphism. T helper, T cytotoxic cells. MHC peptide interaction. Antigen
presentation, secondary signaling.

Immunological disorders
Immunological disorders; Hypersensitivity and autoimmune diseases. Immune response to viral
and bacterial lymphatic infection. Kinetics of immune response. Techniques in humoral and
cellular immunology.

Immunotechnology
Animal models and transgenic animals and their use in immunology. Experimental immunology.
Hybridoma technology. Chimeric antibodies, phage display, antibody engineering; Large scale
manufacture of antibodies. Manufacturing of immunodiagnostics.

Disease diagnosis and Vaccines

Concept of vaccination & Vaccine development. Strategies for development of vaccines against
dreadful diseases – malaria, tuberculosis, HIV. Diagnostic tools and Kit development technology.

Recommended textbooks:
1. Kuby, RA Goldsby, Thomas J. Kindt, Barbara, A. Osborne Immunology, 6th Edition, Freeman,
2002.
2. Janeway et al., Immunobiology, 4th Edition, Current Biology publications., 1999.
Reference books:
1. Brostoff J, Seaddin JK, Male D, Roitt IM., Clinical Immunology, 6th Edition, Gower Medical
Publishing, 2002.
2. Paul.W.E, Fundamental of Immunology, 4th edition, Lippencott Raven.
49
 BIOREACTOR MODELING AND SIMULATION

Course Code:12BT507 L-T-P: 4-0-0

Prerequisites: Nil Credits: 4

Syllabus:

Fundamentals of Modeling
Different approaches towards modeling, (Empirical and Modeling approach), applications and
advantages of modeling and simulations, general flow diagrams for model building, simulation
tools (Berkeley-Madonna, Mat Lab- Simu Link)

Enzymes and growth kinetic models

Michaelis-Menten equation, graphical determination of Km and Vmax, Double Michaelis Menten
kinetic model, inhibition models (Competitive, Non-Competitive, Uncompetitive, Deactivation
Kinetics models) Monad growth kinetics model, equation for inhibition of growth, Product
inhibition, , Teisser equation for growth, Contoin equation, Moses equation for growth models.

Modeling of batch cultures

Unstructured growth models, structural kinetic model, metabolic models for batch cultures.

Product formation Kinetics

Product formation kinetic models, unstructured models, chemically structured models, genetically
structured models.

Case studies of simulations

Programme for simulation of Batch fermentation, continuous fermentation, steady state and fed
batch fermentation.

Recommended textbooks:
1. Biological reaction Engineering- J.J.Dunn, E.Heinzle, J.Ingham, J.E.Presnosil
2. Biochemical Engineering fundamentals- James.E.Bailey and David.F.Ollis, TMH Edition
3. Franks.R.G.E (1973), Modeling and simulation in chemical Engineering, Wiley, NY

Reference Books
1. Modeling and simulation in Biochemical Engineering. Adv, Biochemical Engineering, 3,
127-165
2. Hanm, B, Ruth. B (1997) Modeling dynamic biological systems, Springer-Verlag, NY.

50
 DOWN STREAM PROCESSING

Course Code: 12BT508 L-T-P: 3-0-2

Prerequisites: Nil Credits:4

Syllabus:

Down Stream Processing In Biotechnology

Overview of bioseparations, Characterization of Biomolecules, characterization of Bioprocess,
characterization of fermentation broth: Morphology of cells, structure of the cell wall, product
concentrations, Biomass density, Rheological Behavior of fermentation broth.

Primary Separation and Recovery Processes : Recovery of intracellular products: Cell

disruption methods-physical methods (osmotic shock, grinding with abrasives, solid shear, liquid
shear) – chemical methods (alkali, detergents)- enzymatic methods.

Removal of suspended solids:

Foam separation, filtration. Filtration equipment, centrifugation, tubular bowl centrifuge, disk.
Bowl centrifuge, basket centrifuge, scale up of centrifuges.

Product Enrichment Operations : Membrane based separations – Classification &

characteristics of membrane separation, merits of the process. Micro filtration, ultra filtration,
Reverse osmosis, dialysis & electro dialysis. Selection of membrane, operational requirements of
membrane. Retention coefficient, concentration factor, permeate yield & solid yield in membrane
separation processes. Membrane modules: Plate & Frame, hollow fiber, spiral wound, shell & tube,
cross flow micro filtration.

Aqueous two-phase extraction process: Applications of aqueous two-phase extraction, reversed

micelles extraction principle, micellar structures, critical micelle concentration. Protein
solubilization, limitation of reversed micelles. Precipitations of proteins with salts and organic
solvents, kinetics of protein aggregation.

Product Purification : Chromatographic Separations: Classification of chromatographic

techniques, column chromatography, elusion frontal displacement techniques, partition coefficient,
retention time and volume, capacity factor, column efficiency, design and scale up of
chromatography. Principles & practices of Gel Filtration, Ion Exchange and Affinity
chromatography.

Alternative Separation Methods and Product Polishing

Super critical extraction: principles of SCE, Flow scheme of a simple SCE system.

Formulation
strategies: Importance of formulation, formulation of beakers yeast, Enzymes, formulation of
pharmaceutical products.

51
Polishing: Crystallization, Principles of crystallization and equipment. Principles of drying and
lyophilization, Freeze dryer.

Recommended Textbooks
1. Butterworth and Heinmann. Product recovery in bioprocess Technology-Biotol series,
2. B.Siva Sankar. Bioseperations
References Books:
1. Harvey Blanch. Biochemical Engineering
2. Christie J.Geankoplis., Transport processes and Unit operations

(ELECTIVES)
FOOD TECHNOLOGY

Course Code: BTC530 L-T-P: 3-0-0

Prerequisites: Nil Credits:3

Syllabus:
Food associated Microbes
History of microorganisms in food, historical developments. Biotechnology in relation to the food
industry, nutritive value of food, types of microorganism’s associated with food, its sources,
types and behavior in foods. Role and significance of microorganisms in food. Intrinsic and
extrinsic parameters of foods that affect microbial growth.
Food processing
Bioprocessing of meat, fisheries, vegetables, diary product, enzymes and chemicals used in food
processing, biochemical engineering for flavour and food productions. Emerging processing and
preservation technologies for milk and dairy products.
Food preservation
Food preservation using irradiation, Characteristics of Radiations of interest in food preservation.
Principles underlying the destruction of Microorganisms by irradiation, processing of foods for
irradiation. Application of radiation, Radappertization, Radicidation, and Radurization of foods.
Legal status of food irradiation. Effect of irradiation of food constituents.
Storage of foods
Stability of food preservation with low temperatures, high temperatures, drying. Indicator and food
borne pathogens. Food borne illness, quality control, HFCS (High Fructose Corn Syrup) and
mycoproteins. Air sampling, metabolically injured organisms, enumeration and detection of
foodborne organisms.
Food microbiology
Utilization of microorganisms in food industries, genetic manipulations. Thermophiles and
Radiation-resistant microorganisms, characteristics and growth of thermophilic microorganisms,
Nature of Radiation resistance in microorganisms. Rheology of food production.

Recommended textbooks:
1. Lidsay, Willis Biotechnology, Challenges for the flavour and food industries, Elsevier
Applied Science. 1988.
52
2. Food Science and Food Biotechnology by F.F.G. Lopez & G.V. B. Canovas (2003), CRC
Press, Florida, USA.

Reference Books:
1. George J.B. Basic Food Microbilogy, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 1987.
2. Roger, A., Gordan B., and John T. Food Biotechnology, 1989.

MEDICAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
Course Code: BT C531 L-T-P: 3-0-0
Prerequisites: Nil Credits:3
Syllabus
SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY: Introduction and applications of medical
Biotechnology. Artificial organs – methods and production principles. Artificial pancreas, Liver
and Heart. Therapeutic proteins: Production of interferons, cytokinins, insulin etc.

UNIT II
MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS: Immunodiagnostic techniques: monoclonal antibodies production as
diagnostic reagents; Diagnosis by ELISA and Western blot. DNA sequencing and diagnosis. PCR
and Array based techniques in diagnosis; Present methods for diagnosis of Specific diseases like
Tuberculosis, Malaria and AIDS ethics in Molecular Diagnosis.

UNIT III
GENE TRANSFER TECHNOLOGY: Gene therapy; Intracellular barriers to gene delivery;
Overview of inherited and acquired diseases for gene therapy , Retro and adeno virus mediated
gene transfer. Liposome and nanoparticles mediated gene delivery Cellular therapy.

UNIT IV
STEM CELL TECHNOLOGY: Stem cells; definition, properties and potency of stem cells;
Sources; embryonic and adult stem cells Concept of tissue engineering; Role of scaffolds; Role of
growth factors; Role of adult and embryonic stem cells. Clinical applications; Ethical issues.

UNIT V
HYBRIDOMA TECHNOLOGY: Hybridoma techniques and monoclonal antibody production.
Production, purification, characterization and applications of monoclonal antibodies. Antibody
engineering – chimeric antibody, diabody.

Text Books:
1. F.C. Hay, O.M.R. Westwood, Practical Immunology, 4th Edition-, Blackwell
Publishing,2002.

53
 2. Pratibha Nallari, V. Venugopal Rao; Medical Biotechnology, oxford University press,
2010.

Reference Books:
1. James W. Goding , Monoclonal antibodies; Principles and Practice , 3rd Edition ,
Academic Press 1996.
2. George Patrinos and Wilhelm Ansorage, Molecular Diagnostics, 1st Edition , Academic
Press,2005.
3. Lela Buchingham and Maribeth L Flawsm , Molecular Diagnostics; Fundamentals,
Methods and Clinical Application , 1st Edition F.A. Davis Company Philadelphia USA,
2007.

ENZYME TECHNOLOGY

Course Code: 12BT532 L-T-P: 3-0-0

Prerequisites: Nil Credits:3
Syllabus:
SYLLABUS:

UNIT–I
INTRODUCTION TO ENZYME TECHNOLOGY: Source of enzymes; Production, isolation and
purification of enzymes; Characterization in terms of pH, temperature, ionic strength, substrate and
product tolerance, effects of metal ions etc.; Various production methods for commercial enzymes;
Large scale production of enzymes. Production of recombinant proteins (Insulin, Interleukin,
Interferon); Important commercial enzymes; Amylases; Proteases; Lipases; Cellulases.

UNIT–II
ENZYME KINETICS: Michaelis-Menten equation, alterations and significance. General mechanisms
of enzyme regulation, Types of inhibition; Irreversible inhibition (proteases), Reversible (glutamine
synthase & phosphorylase), competitive inhibition, Non & Un-competitive, mixed inhibition, and
substrate & product.inhibition; Allosteric enzymes, qualitative description of concerted & sequential
models for allosteric enzymes. Allo-steric regulation of enzymes; Deactivation kinetics. Feed back
inhibition and feed forward stimulation. Half site reactivity, Flipflop mechanism, positive and negative
co-operativity with special reference to aspartate transcarbamoylase. Protein-ligand binding
measurement, analysis of binding isotherms, Hill and Scatchard plots.

UNIT–III
ENZYME ENGINEERING: Enzymes as biological catalysts; Active site, Functional group, Enzyme
substrate complex, Cofactors; Acidbase catalysis, covalent catalysis, proximity, orientation effect.
Strain & distortion theory. Chemical modification of active site groups. Random and rational approach
of protein engineering; Directed evolution and its applications in the field of biocatalysis; Various
approaches of creating variant enzyme molecules; Site directed mutagenesis of enzymes. Mechanism of
action of chymotrypsin, lysozyme, carboxypeptidase and alcohol dehydrogenase.

54
UNIT–IV
ENZYME IMMOBILIZATION AND APPLICATIONS: Introduction to enzyme immobilization;
various immobilization methods; physical and chemical techniques for enzyme immobilization –
adsorption; Matrix entrapment, encapsulation; Cross-linking; Covalent binding; Medical and analytical
applications of immobilized enzymes; Design of enzyme electrode & their application in clinical
diagnostics. Role of enzymes in recombinant DNA technology; Enzymes for diagnostic and Analytical
purposes. Use of enzymes in analysis-types of sensing-gadgetry and methods. Case studies on
application – chiral conversion, esterification.

UNIT–V
MASS TRANSFER EFFECTS IN IMMOBILIZED SYSTEMS: Analysis of Film and Pore
Diffusion Effects on kinetics of Immobilized Enzyme Reactions; Calculations of diffusion resistances
and Thiele’s modulus; Multi step immobilized enzyme systems; Solutions of numerical problems;
Application and future of immobilized enzyme technology. Concentration gradients and Reaction rates
in solid catalysts; Internal mass transfer and reaction; Steady state Shell Mass balance; Formulation of
dimensionless groups and calculation of Effectiveness factors .

Text Books:
1. Nelson and Cox, Principles of Biochemistry, 4th Edition, W. H. Freeman, 2004.
2. J. Rehm and G. Reed, Enzyme Technology, Vol. 7a, VCH-Verlag.
3. Trevor Palmer: ENZYMES – Biochemistry, Biotechnology, Clinical chemistry. Harwood Publishing
Ltd. Affiliated East – West Press Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
Reference Books:
1. Biotol Series (This series has many volumes pertaining to different subjects including
white, red, blue and green biotechnology).

MOLECULAR MODELING AND DRUG DESIGN

Course Code: 12BT533 L-T-P: 3-0-0

Prerequisites: Nil Credits:3

Syllabus:
Empirical Force Fields and Molecular Mechanisms
Models, Approximations and Reality, Force Field concepts and Mathematical Expressions,
Molecular Mechanical and Quantum Mechanical Force Fields, Parameterization, Generation of
Potential energy surfaces. Bond Stretching, Angle bending, Torsional I terms, Out of plane,
Bonding Motions, Electrostatic interactions, Vander Walls interactions, Effective pair potentials,
Hydrogen Bonding, Simulation of liquid water.
Computer Simulation Methods
Time averages, Ensemble averages, Free energy methods, Thermo dynamic Perturbation Methods,
Thermodynamic Integration Methods. Calculation of thermodynamics properties. Phase space;
Practical aspects of computer simulation; Boundaries monitoring Equilibrium; Long range process;
Analyzing results of simulation and estimation errors.
Molecular Dynamics Simulation Methods
Molecular Dynamics using simple modules; Molecular Dynamics with continuous potentials;
Running Molecular Dynamics Simulation; Constant Dynamics; Time dependent properties;
Molecular Dynamics at constant temperature and pressure.
55
Monte Carlo Simulation Methods
Metropolis methods; Monte Carlo simulation of molecules; Monte Carlo simulation of Polymers;
Calculating Chemical potentials; Monte Carlo simulation and molecular dynamics.
Molecular Modeling In Drug Discovery
Molecular modeling in drug discovery-Deriving and using 3D Pharma cores, Molecular docking
Structure Based methods to identify lead components-Denovo ligand design. QSARs and QSPRs,
QSAR Methodology, Various Descriptors used in QSARs: Electronic; Topology;
Quantum Chemical based Descriptors
Recommended textbooks:
1. Molecular Modeling Principles and Applications- AR Leach, Longman, 1996.
2. Molecular Dynamics Simulation-Elementary Methods- John Wiley and Sons, 1997.
Reference textbooks:
1. Current Protocols in Protein Science, Wiley Publishers, 2005; Deuflhard P., et al.
Computational molecular dynamics - Challenges, methods, ideas.(Springer,1999).

56
 M. TECH (CE)

DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

57
 M.Tech- STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

First Year [First Semester]

S No Code Course Title L T P Cr
1 11CE501 Applied Mathematics 3 2 0 4
2 11CE502 Theory of Elasticity 3 2 0 4
3 11CE503 Structural Dynamics 3 0 2 4
4 11CE504 Advanced Prestressed Concrete 3 0 2 4
5 11CE531 REPAIR AND REHABITAITON OF STRUCTURES 3 0 0 3
6 11CE541 GEO TECHNICAL EARTH QUAKE ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
7 11CE551 Seminar 0 0 4 2
Total Credits: 24

First Year [Second Semester]

S No Code Course Title L T P Cr
1 11CE601 Finite Element Analysis 3 0 2 4
2 11CE602 Bridge Engineering 3 2 0 4
3 11CE603 Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures 3 0 2 4
4 11CE604 Theory of Plates and Shells 3 2 0 4
5 11CE631 INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES 3 0 0 3
6 11CE643 GREEN BUILDINGS 3 0 0 3
7 11CE651 Term Paper 0 0 4 2
Total Credits: 24

Second Year
S No Code Course Title L T P Cr
1 15 IE 6050 DISSERTATION 0 0 72 36
Total Credits: 36

58
APPLIED MATHEMATICS

Course Code :11 CE 501 L-T-P : 3-2-0

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 4
Syllabus:

One Dimensional Wave and Heat Equations

Laplace transform methods for one-dimensional wave equation – Displacements in a long string
– longitudinal vibration of an elastic bar – Fourier transform methods for one-dimensional heat
conduction problems in infinite and semi-infinite rods.

Elliptic Equation
Laplace equation – Properties of harmonic functions – Solution of Laplace’s equation by means
of Fourier transforms in a half plane, in an infinite strip and in a semi-infinite strip – Solution of
Poisson equation by Fourier transform method.

Calculus of Variations
Concept of variation and its properties – Euler’s equation – Functional dependant on first and
higher order derivatives – Functionals dependant on functions of several independent variables –
Variational problems with moving boundaries –Direct methods – Ritz and Kantorovich methods.

Eigen Value Problems

Methods of solutions: Faddeev – Leverrier Method, Power Method with deflation – Approximate
Methods: Rayleigh – Ritz Method

Numerical Integration
Gaussian Quadrature – One and Two Dimensions – Gauss Hermite Quadrature – Monte Carlo
Method – Multiple Integration by using mapping function

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Introduction to Partial Differential Equations by K. Sankara Rao, Prentice Hall of

India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
2. Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering A Practical Approach by S.
Rajasekaran, A. H. Wheeler and Company Private Limited, 1986.
3. Calculus of Variations with Applications by A.S. Gupta, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
4. Integral Transforms for Engineers by L.C. Andrews and B. K. Shivamoggi, Prentice Hall
of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.

59
THEORY OF ELASTICITY

Course Code :11 CE 502 L-T-P : 3-2-0

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 4
Syllabus:

Two-dimensional problems in rectangular coordinates

Plane stress ; Plane strain; Differential equations of equilibrium; Boundary conditions;
Compatibility equations; Stress function; Governing differential equation; Solution by
Polynomials; End effects – Saint-Venant’s Principle; Determination of displacements; Bending
of a cantilever loaded at the end; Bending of a beam by uniform load

Two-dimensional problems in polar coordinates

General equations in polar coordinates; Stress distribution symmetrical about an axis; Effect of
circular holes on stress distribution in plates; Concentrated force at a point of a straight
boundary; Concentrated force acting on a beam; Stresses in a circular disc, general solutions of
the two dimensional problem in polar coordinates, applications of the general solutions in polar
coordinates.

Strain energy methods

Total strain energy; Principle of virtual work; Griffith’s theory of rupture; Castigliano’s theorem;
Principle of least work (Stationary potential energy), applications of the principle of least
workrectangular plates, shear lag

Analysis of stress and strain in three dimensions

Stress at a point – components of stress; Principal stresses; Stress ellipsoid and stress director
surface; Determination of principal stresses; Stress invariants; Determination of maximum shear
stresses; Octahedral shear stress; strain at a point – Components of strain; differential equations
of equilibrium, the principle of superposition

Torsion
Torsion of straight bars – Saint Venant’s theory; Elliptic cross section; Membrane analogy;
Torsion of a bar of narrow rectangular cross-section; Torsion of rolled profile sections; Torsion
of thin tubes

Text Books:
1. Theory of Elasticity by Timoshenko, S. and Goodier J.N., McGraw Hill Book Co., Newyork,
1988.

Reference Books
1. Sadhu Singh, "Theory of Elasticity", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi 1988.
2. Hearn , E.J. “Mechanics of Materials”, Vol.2, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1985
3. Irving H.Shames and James, M.Pitarresi, “Introduction to Solid Mechanics”, Prentice Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd., Newl Delhi -2002.

60
STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS

Course Code :11 CE 503 L-T-P : 3-0-2

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 4
Syllabus:

Equation of Motions, Problem Statement, Solution Methods of Single Degree of Freedom

Systems (SDOF) : Basic concepts of structural dynamics; single degree of freedom system,
force displacement relationship, damping force, equation of motion, mass-spring-damper system,
methods of solution of differential equation.
Free Vibration (SDOF): Undamped free vibration, viscously damped free vibration, energy
in free vibration.
Response to Harmonic and Periodic Excitations (SDOF) : Harmonic vibration of undamped
systems, Harmonic vibration with viscous damping, response to vibration generator, natural
frequency and damping from harmonic test, force transmission and vibration isolation, vibration
measuring instruments, energy dissipated in viscous damping. Response to periodic force.
Response to Arbitrary, Step And Pulse Excitations (SDOF) : Response to unit impuse,
response to arbitrary force, step force, ramp force, response to pulse excitations, solution
methods, effects of viscous damping.
Numerical Evaluation of Dynamic Response (SDOF) : Time stepping methods, methods
based on interpolation of excitation, central difference method, newmark’s method, stability and
computational error, analysis of nonlinear response by newmark’s method.Earthquake Response
to Linear Systems (SDOF)
Earthquake excitation, equation of motion, response quantities, response history, response
spectrum concept, deformation, pseudo-velocity and pseudo acceleration response spectra, peak
structural response from the response spectrum, response spectrum characteristics, elastic design
spectrum, comparison and distinction between design and response spectra.
Generalised Single Degree of Freedom Systems : Generalised SDOF systems, rigid body
assemblages, systems with distributed mass and elasticity, lumped mass system-shear building,
natural vibration frequency by Rayleigh’s method.
Multi -degree of freedom systems (MDOF) : Equation of motions: simple system-two storey
shear building, general approach for linear systems, static condensation, symmetric plan systems:
ground motion. Multiple support excitation, methods of solving the equation of motions.
Free Vibration (MDOF) : Natural frequencies and modes: systems without damping, modal
and spectral matrices, orthogonality of modes, normalization of modes. Solution of undamped
free vibration systems, solution methods for eigenvalue problem.

Text Books:
1. Dynamics of structures by Anil K Chopra; Prentice-Hall of India Limited, New
Delhi.3rd
edition 2006.
2. Dynamics of Structures by R.W. Clough and P.E. Penzien, McGraw-Hill. 1st edition
1975
Reference Books:
1. Structural Dynamics for Structural Engineers by G. C. Hart & K. Wang; John Wiley &
Sons. 1st edition 1991
2. Structural Dynamics by Mario Paz, CBS Publishers.1st edition.
61
 ADVANCED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

Course Code :11 CE 504 L-T-P : 3-0-2

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 4
Syllabus:

Introduction, Prestressing Systems and Material

Properties
Basic concepts of pre-stressing; Historical development; Advantages and Types of Pre-stressing,
Pre-tensioning Systems and Devices, Post-tensioning Systems and Devices, Need for High
strength steel and High strength concrete; Losses Of Prestress: Nature of losses of pre-stress;
Loss due to elastic deformation of concrete, shrinkage of concrete, creep of concrete, relaxation
of stress in steel, friction and anchorage slip; Total losses allowed for in design.
Analysis of Prestressed Member
Analysis of Members under Axial Load: Analysis at Transfer, Analysis at Service , Analysis for
Ultimate Strength, Analysis of Member under Flexure:, Analysis at Transfer and at Service,
Cracking Moment, Kern Point, Pressure Line, Analysis for Ultimate Strength, design loads and
strength, Calculation of Crack Width, Variation of Stress in Steel, Analysis of a Rectangular
Section, Analysis of a Flanged Section.
Deflections of Prestressed Concrete Members:
Importance of control of deflections; Factors influencing deflections; Short term deflections of
uncracked members. Long term deflection of cracked member; Transmission Of Pre-Stress:
Transmission of Pre-stressing force by bond; Transmission length; Bond stresses; Transverse
tensile stresses; End zone reinforcement; Flexural bond stresses in pre –tensioned and post –
tensioned grouted beams, stress distribution in end block, Anchorage zone reinforcements;
Shear And Torsion Resistance Of Prestressed Concrete Member: Shear and Principal
stresses; Ultimate shear resistance of pre-stressed concrete members; Design of shear
reinforcement, pre-stressed concrete members in torsion, Design of reinforcements for torsion,
shear and bending.
Design of Pre-Stressed Members : Design of sections for flexure, Design of Sections for Axial
Tension, Design of Sections for compression and bending, design of pre-stressed section for
shear and torsion, design of pre-stressed member for bond. Dimensioning of flexural member,
design for pre-tensioning member, design of post-tensioning members.
Composite Construction of Prestressed Concrete : Composite structural member, types of
composite construction, analysis of stresses, differential shrinkages, deflection of composite
member, flexural strength of composite sections, shear strength of composite section; Design of
Continuous Prestressed Concrete Member: Advantages of continuous members, ultimate load
analysis of continuous pre-stressed member, design of continuous pre-stressed concrete beams.
Text Books: (supplemented with IS: 1343)
1. Prestressed Concrete by N. Krishna Raju; Tata Mc Graw - Hill Publishing Company Limited,
New Delhi.3rd edition, 1995.
2. Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures by T.Y. Lin & Ned H. Burns; John Wiley & Sons,
3rd edition, 1981.
Reference Books
1. Prestressed concrete by N. Rajagopalan; Narosa Publishing House.2nd edition, 2005.
2. Design of Prestressed Concrete by A. Nilson; John Willey & Sons.2nd edition, 1987.

62
REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES

Course Code :11 CE 531 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 3
Syllabus:
Introduction
Deterioration of structures with aging; Need for rehabilitation
Distress in concrete /steel structures
Types of damages; Sources or causes for damages; effects of damages; Case studies

Damage assessment and evaluation models

Damage testing methods; Non-destructive testing methods

Rehabilitation methods
Grouting; Detailing; Imbalance of structural stability; Case studies

Methods of Repair
Shortcreting; Grouting; Epoxy-cement mortar injection; Crack ceiling

Seismic Retrofitting of reinforced concrete buildings

Introduction; Considerations in retrofitting of structures; Source of weakness in RC frame
building – Structural damage due to discontinuous load path; Structural damage due to lack of
deformation; Quality of workmanship and materials; Classification of retrofitting techniques;
Retrofitting strategies for RC buildings – Structural level (global) retrofit methods; Member
level (local) retrofit methods; Comparative analysis of methods of retrofitting

Text Books:
1. Diagnosis and treatment of structures in distress by R.N.Raikar, Published by R&D Centre
of Structural Designers & Consultants Pvt.Ltd., Mumbai, 1994.
2. Handbook on Repair and Rehabilitation of RCC buildings, Published by CPWD, Delhi,
2002.
3. Earthquake resistant design of structures by Pankaj Agarwal and Manish Shrikhande,
Prentice-Hall of India, 2006.

63
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING

Course Code :11 CE 541 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 3
Syllabus:

Seismology and Earthquakes

Introduction, Seismic Hazards, seismic waves, internal structure of earth, Continental drift and
plate tectonics, faults, elastics rebound theory, geometric notations, location of earthquakes, size
of earthquakes.

Strong Ground Motion

Strong ground motion measurement, ground motion parameters, estimation of ground motion
parameters.
Seismic Hazard Analysis: Identification and Evaluation of Earthquake Sources, deterministic
seismic hazard analysis, probabilistic seismic hazard analysis.

Wave propagation
Waves in unbounded media, waves in a semi – infinite body, waves in a layered media,
attenuation of stress waves.
Dynamic soil properties: Measurement of dynamic soil properties using field and laboratory
tests (overview), stress strain behavior of cyclically loaded soils, strength of cyclically loaded
soils.

Ground Response Analysis

One – Dimensional Ground response Analysis – Linear and Non-Linear Approaches.
Local Site Effects: Effect of local site conditions on ground motion, design parameters,
development of design parameters.

Liquefaction
Flow liquefaction, cyclic mobility, evaluation of liquefaction hazards, liquefaction susceptibility,
initiation of liquefaction, effects of liquefaction.
Soil Improvement for Remediation of Seismic Hazards: Densification techniques,
Reinforcement Techniques, Grouting and Mixing techniques, Drainage techniques.

TEXT BOOK:
Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering by Steven L. Kramer, prentice Hall, 1st edition,
1996.

REFERENCE BOOK:
Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering Handbook by Robert W. Day, McGraw-Hill.2nd
edition,
2010.

64
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

Course Code :11 CE 601 L-T-P : 3-0-2

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 4
Syllabus:

Basic Principles
Equilibrium equations; Strain-displacement relations; linear constitutive relations;Principle
virtual work; Principle of stationary potential energy
Element Properties
Different types of elements; Displacement models; Relation between nodal degrees of freedom
and generalized coordinates; Convergence requirements; Compatibility requirement; Geometric
invariance; Natural coordinate systems; Shape functions; Element strains and stresses; Element
stiffness matrix; Element nodal load vector. Isoparametric elements – Definition, Two-
dimensional isoparametric elements – Jacobian transformation, Numerical integration
Direct Stiffness method and Solution Technique
Assemblage of elements–Obtaining Global stiffness matrix and Global load vector; Governing
equilibrium equation for static problems; Storage of Global stiffness matrix in banded and
skyline form; Incorporation of boundary conditions; Solution to resulting simultaneous
equations by Gauss elimination method
Plane-stress and Plane-strain analysis
Solving plane stress and plane-strain problems using constant strain triangle and four nodded
isoparametric element
Analysis of plate bending
Basic theory of plate bending; Shear deformation plates; Plate bending analysis using four noded
isoparametric elements

Text Books:
1. Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering by R.T. Chandrupatla and A.D. Belegundu,
Prentice Hall of India, 1997.

Reference Books:
1. Finite Element Analysis by Abel and Desai, New Age Publishers, 2007.
2. Finite Element Analysis: Theory and Programming by C. S. Krishnamoorthy, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 1995
3. Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis by K. J. Bathe, Prentice Hall Inc.,
1996.
4. The Finite Element Method by O.C. Zienkiewicz, and R.L.Taylor, McGraw – Hill, 1987.

65
BRIDGE ENGINEERING

Course Code :11 CE 603 L-T-P : 3-2-0

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 4

Syllabus:

I.R.C. Specifications For Road Bridges

Different types of bridges; I.R.C. specifications for road bridges; Design Of R.C Slab Culvert:
Loads considered for design, Design of R.C. slab culvert.

Design of T – Beam Bridge

Pigeaud’s method for computation of slab moments; courbon’s method for computation of
moments in girders; Design of simply supported T-beam Bridge.

Design of Sub Structure For Bridges

Pier and abutment caps; Materials for piers and abutments’ Design of pier; Design of abutment;
Backfill behind abutment; approach slab.

Design of Bearings For Bridges

Importance of bearings; bearings for slab bridge; bearings for girder bridges; Expansion
bearings; Fixed bearings; Design of elastomeric pad bearing; Foundations For Bridges: Scour
at abutments and piers; Grip length; Types of foundations; Design of well foundation.

Cable Supported Bridge

Different types of cable supported bridge, difference between suspension bridge and cable
stayed bridge. Different components and factors considered for design of a) suspension bridge,
b) cable stayed bridge.

Text Books:
1. Essentials of Bridge Engineering by Johnson Victor; Oxford & IBH publishing Co. Pvt.
Ltd.2007
2. Cable supported bridges, concepts and design by N J Gimsing. John Willey and Sons, 2 nd
edition

Reference Books:
1. Design of Bridge Structures by T. R Jagadeesh, M.A Jayaram, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd. 2nd edition.

66
EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN OF STRUCTURES

Course Code :11 CE 603 L-T-P : 3-0-2

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 4

Syllabus:

Seismic-resistant building architecture

Introduction; Lateral load resisting systems- moment resisting frame, Building with shear wall or
bearing wall system, building with dual system; Building configuration – Problems and
solutions; Building characteristics – Mode shape and fundamental period, building frequency and
ground period, damping, ductility, seismic weight, hyperstaticity/redundancy, non-structural
elements, foundation soil/ liquefaction. Foundations; Quality of construction and materials –
quality of concrete, construction joints, general detailing requirements

Design forces for buildings

Introduction; Equivalent static method; Mode superposition technique; Dynamic inelastic-
time history analysis; Advantages and disadvantages of these methods; Determination of
lateral forces as per IS 1893(Part 1) – Equivalent static method, Model analysis using response
spectrum

Ductility considerations in earthquake resistant design of RCC buildings

Introduction; Impact of ductility; Requirements for ductility; Assessment of ductility–
Member/element ductility, Structural ductility; Factor affecting ductility; Ductility factors;
Ductility considerations as per IS13920

Earthquake resistant design of a long two-storey, two-bay RCC building

Determination of lateral forces on an intermediate plane frame using Equivalent static
method and Model analysis using response spectrum; Analysis of the intermediate frame for
various load combinations as per IS1893(Part 1); Identification of design forces and moments in
the members; Design and detailing of typical flexural member ,typical column, footing and
detailing of a exterior joint as per IS13920.

Base isolation of structures

Introduction; Considerations for seismic isolation; Basic elements of seismic isolation; seismic-
isolation design principle; Feasibility of seismic isolation; Seismic-isolation configurations

Text Books:
1. Earthquake resistant design of structures by Pankaj Agarwal and Manish Shrikhande,
Prentice-Hall of India, 2006.
2. Seismic design of reinforced concrete and masonry buildings by T. Paulay and M.J.N.
Priestley, John Wiley & Sons, 1991.
3. The seismic design handbook, Edited by F. Naeim, Kluwer Academic publishers, 2001.

67
THEORY OF PLATES AND SHELLS

Course Code :11 CE 604 L-T-P : 3-2-0

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 4

Syllabus:

Introduction: Assumptions in the theory of thin plates – Pure bending of Plates – Relations
between bending moments and curvature - Particular cases of pure bending of rectangular plates,
Cylindrical bending - immovable simply supported edges – Synclastic bending and Anticlastic
bending – Strain energy in pure bending of plates in Cartesian and polar co-ordinates –
Limitations.

Laterally Loaded Circular Plates:- Differential equation of equilibrium – Uniformly loaded

circular plates with simply supported and fixed boundary conditions – Annular plate with
uniform moment and shear force along the boundaries.

Laterally Loaded Rectangular Plates: - Differential equation of plates – Boundary conditions –

Navier solution for simply supported plates subjected to uniformly distributed load and point
load – Levy’s method of solution for plates having two opposite edges simply supported with
various symmetrical boundary conditions along the other two edges loaded with u. d. l. – Simply
supported plates with moments distributed along the edges - Approximate Methods.

Effect of transverse shear deformation - plates of variable thickness – Anisotropic plates-thick

plates- orthotropic plates and grids - Large Deflection theory.

Deformation of Shells without Bending:- Definitions and notation, shells in the form of a surface
of revolution, displacements, unsymmetrical loading, spherical shell supported at isolated points,
membrane theory of cylindrical shells, the use of stress function in calculating membrane forces
of shells.

General Theory of Cylindrical Shells:- A circular cylindrical shell loaded symmetrically with
respect to its axis, symmetrical deformation, pressure vessels, cylindrical tanks, thermal stresses,
in extensional deformation, general case of deformation, cylindrical shells with supported edges,
approximate investigation of the bending of cylindrical shells, the use of a strain and stress
function, stress analysis of cylindrical roof shells.

Text Books:
1. S.P Timoshenko and S.W Krieger, Theory of Plates and Shells, McGraw Hill, 1989.

Reference Books:
1. R. Szilard, Theory and Analysis of Plates – Classical Numerical Methods’, Prentice Hall
inc, 1974.
2. P.L Gould, Analysis of Shells and Plates, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1988.

68
INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES

Course Code :11 CE 631 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits: 3

Syllabus:

PLANNING AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

Classification of Industries and Industrial structures - planning for Layout Requirements
regarding Lighting, Ventilation and Fire Safety – Protection against noise and vibration -
Guidelines of Factories Act.

INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
Roofs for Industrial Buildings - Steel and RCC - Gantry Girders - Design of Corbels and Nibs –
Machine foundations.

POWER PLANT STRUCTURES

Types of power plants – Design of Turbo generator foundation – containment structures.

POWER TRANSMISSION STRUCTURES

Transmission Line Towers - Substation Structures - Tower Foundations - Testing Towers.

AUXILLIARY STRUCTURES
Chimneys and Cooling Towers – Bunkers and Silos – Pipe supporting structures.

Text Books:
1. Manohar S.N, “Tall Chimneys - Design and Construction”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1985
2. Santha kumar A.R. and Murthy S.S., “Transmission Line Structures”, Tata McGraw Hill,
1992.
3. Srinivasulu P and Vaidyanathan.C, “Handbook of Machine Foundations”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1976.
4. Jurgen Axel Adam, Katharria Hausmann, Frank Juttner, Klauss Daniel, “Industrial
Buildings: A Design Manual”, Birkhauser Publishers, 2004.
5. Proceedings of Advanced course on “Industrial Structures”, Structural Engineering
Research Centre, Chennai, 1982.

69
GREEN BUILDINGS

Course Code :11 CE 643 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Pre-requisite: NIL Credits:3

Syllabus:
Introduction
What is Green Building, Why to go for Green Building, Benefits of Green Buildings,
Green
Building Materials and Equipment in India, What are key Requisites for Constructing a Green
Building, Important Sustainable features for Green Building,
Green Building Concepts and
Practices
Indian Green Building Council, Green Building Moment in India, Benefits Experienced in
Green Buildings, Launch of Green Building Rating Systems, Residential Sector,
Market Transformation;
Green Building Opportunities And Benefits: Opportunities of Green Building, Green Building
Features, Material and Resources, Water Efficiency, Optimum Energy Efficiency, Typical
Energy Saving Approach in Buildings, LEED India Rating System and Energy Efficiency,
GreenBuilding Design
Introduction, Reduction in Energy Demand, Onsite Sources and Sinks, Maximise System
Efficiency, Steps to Reduce Energy Demand and Use Onsite Sources and Sinks, Use of
Renewable Energy Sources. Ecofriendly captive power generation for factory, Building
requirement,
AirConditioning
Introduction,CIIGodrej Green business centre,Design philosophy,Design interventions,Energy
modeling, HVAC System design,Chiller selection,pump selection,Selection of cooling
towers,Selection of air handing units,Precooling of fresh air,Interior lighting system,Key feature
of the building. Eco-friendly captive power generation for factory,Building requirement.
MaterialConservation
Handling of non process waste, waste reduction during construction,materials with
recycledcontent,local materials,material reuse,certified wood ,Rapidly renewable building
materials and furniture;
Indoor Environment Quality And Occupational Health: Air conditioning, Indore air quality,
Sick building syndrome, Tobacco smoke control, Minimum fresh air requirements avoid use of
asbestos in the building, improved fresh air ventilation, Measure of IAQ, Reasons for poor IAQ,
Measures to achieve Acceptable IAQ levels,

Text
Books:
1. Handbook on Green Practices published by Indian Society of Heating Refrigerating
and Air conditioning Engineers, 2009.
2. Green Building Hand Book by Tomwoolley and Samkimings, 2009.

Reference
Books:
1. Complete Guide to Green Buildings by Trish riley
2. Standard for the design for High Performance Green Buildings by Kent Peterson, 2009

70
 M. TECH (CSE)

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

71
DEPARTMENT OF CSE (Y12)
S.No Course Code Course Title L-T-P Credits
Semester -1
DATA STRUCTURES AND
1 11CS501 3-1-2 5
ALGORITHMS
2 11CS502 COMPUTER ORGANIZATION 3-1-0 4
3 11CS503 OPERATING SYSTEMS 3-1-0 4
OBJECT ORIENTED
4 11CS504 3-1-2 5
PROGRAMMING
5 11CSE12 MOBILE COMPUTING 3-0-0 3
6 11CSE23 DATA WARE HOUSING 3-0-0 3
7 11CS505 SEMINAR 0-0-4 2
Semester -2
1 11CS506 COMPUTER NETWORKS 3-1-2 5
2 11CS507 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 3-0-0 3
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
3 11CS508 3-1-2 5
SYSTEMS
4 11CS509 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 3-1-0 4
5 11CSE32 CLOUD COMPUTING 3-0-0 3
6 11CSE43 DATA SECURITY 3-0-0 3
7 11CS510 TERM PAPER 0-0-4 2
Semester -3 & 4
1 11 CS 601 THESIS/PROJECT 36

72
I/II M.Tech I Semester

Course Code : 11CS501

Course Title : Data Structures and Algorithms
Course Structure :3–1-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION: Algorithms, algorithms as a technology, Analyzing algorithms , Designing
algorithms, Asymptotic notations, standard notations, common functions, Recurrences –
substitution method, master method.

SORTING AND ORDER STATISTICS: Merge sort, Quick sort, Heap sort, sorting in linear
time, Median and order statistics.

UNIT-II
DATA STRUCTURES: Elementary Data Structures – Linked lists, Stacks, Queues, Hash Tables
– Direct address tables, Hash tables, Hash functions, Open addressing, Search Trees – Binary
search trees, Red-Black Trees.

ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES: B – Trees, Binomial Heaps, Fibonacci Heaps, Data

Structures for Disjoint Sets.

UNIT-III
GRAPH ALGORITHMS: Elementary graph algorithms – Representation of graphs, BFS, DFS,
Topological Sort, Strongly connected components, Minimum Spanning Trees – The algorithms of
Kruskal and Prim’s. Single-Source Shortest Paths: The Bellman-Ford algorithm, Single source
shortest paths in DAG’s, Dijkstra’s algorithm, All-Pair Shortest paths – Shortest paths and Matrix
multiplication, Floyd-Warshall algorithm. Maximum Flow: Flow networks, The Ford-Fulkerson
method, Maximum Bipartite matching.

UNIT-IV
ADVANCED DESIGN AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES: Greedy Algorithms – An activity –
selection Problem, Elements of greedy strategy, Huffman codes. Dynamic Programming: Matrix
Chain multiplication, Elements of dynamic programming, Optimal Binary Search Trees.

UNIT-V
STRING MATCHING: The naïve string matching algorithm, Rabin-Karp algorithm, Knuth-
Morris-Pratt algorithm.
NP-COMPLETENESS: Polynomial time, Verification, NP-Completeness and reducibility, NP-
Completeness proofs, NP-Complete problems.

Text Books:

73
 1. Introduction to Algorithms, second edition, T.H.Cormen, C.E.Leiserson, R.L.Rivest, and
C.Stein,PHI Pvt.Ltd./ Pearson Education.

Reference Books:
1. Algorithm Design: Foundations,Analysis and Internet examples, M.T.Goodrich and
R.Tomassia,John wiley and sons.
2. Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms,Ellis Horowitz,Satraj Sahni and
S.Rajasekharam,Galgotia publications pvt. Ltd.
3. Introduction to Design and Analysis of Algorithms A strategic approach, R.C.T.Lee,
S.S.Tseng, R.C.Chang and T.Tsai, Mc Graw Hill.
4. Data structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++, Allen Weiss, Second edition, Pearson
education.
5. Design and Analysis of algorithms, Aho, Ullman and Hopcroft, Pearson education.

***

74
Course Code : 11CS502
Course Title : Computer Organization
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
REGISTER TRANSFER & MICRO-OPERATIONS: Register Transfer Language, Register
Transfer, Bus & memory Transfers, Arithmetic Micro-operations, Logic Micro-operations, Shift
Micro-operations, Arithmetic Logic Shift Unit.

UNIT II
BASIC COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND DESIGN: Introduction codes, Computer
Registers, Computer Instructions, Timing and Control, Instruction cycle, Memory-Reference
Instruct ion, Input-Output and Interrupt, Design of Basic Computer, Design of Accumulator Logic.
MICRO PROGRAMMED CONTROL: Control Memory, Address Sequencing, Micro-Program
example, Design of Control Unit.

UNIT III
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT: General registers Organization, Stack Organization,
Instruction Formats, Addressing Modes, Data Transfer and Manipulation, Program Control,
Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC). COMPUTER ARITHMETIC: Addition and
Subtraction, Multiplication Algorithms, Division Algorithms Floating-point Arithmetic operations.

UNIT IV
MEMORY ORGANIZATION: Memory Hierarchy, Main Memory, Auxiliary memory,
Associative Men Cache Memory, Virtual Memory, Memory Management hardware.

UNIT V
INPUT-OUTPUT ORGANISATION: Peripheral Devices, Input-Output Interface,
Asynchronous Data Transfer, Modes of Transfer, Priority Interrupt, Direct Memory Access
(DMA), Input-Output Processor, Serial Communication.

Text Books:
1. Morris M. Mano, ‘Computer Systems Architecture’, 3rd Edition.

Reference Books:
1. John P Hayes, ‘Computer Architecture and Organisation’ 2nd edition.
2.V.Carl Hamacher et.al, ‘Computer Organization’ 2nd edition.

***

75
Course Code : 11CS503
Course Title : Operating Systems
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION: Computer-System Organization, Computer-System Architecture, Operating-
System Structure, Operating-System Operations, Process Management, Memory Management,
Storage Management, Protection and Security, Distributed Systems, Special-Purpose Systems.

OPERATING-SYSTEM STRUCTURES: Operating-System Services , User Operating-System

Interface, System Calls , Types of System Calls, System Programs , Operating-System Design and
Implementation, Operating-System Structure, Virtual Machines, Operating-System Generation,
System Boot.

UNIT II
PROCESSES: Concept, Process Scheduling, Operations on Processes, Inter-process
Communication Examples of IPC Systems, Communication in Client-Server Systems.

MULTITHREADED PROGRAMMING: Multithreading Models, Thread Libraries, Threading

Issues.

PROCESS SCHEDULING: Scheduling Criteria, Scheduling Algorithms, Multiple-Processor

Scheduling.

UNIT III
SYNCHRONIZATION: The Critical-Section Problem, Peterson’s Solution, Synchronization
Hardware, Semaphores, Classic Problems of Synchronization, Monitors, Synchronization
Examples, and Atomic Transactions.

DEADLOCKS: System Model, Deadlock Characterization, Methods for Handling Deadlocks,

Deadlock Prevention. Deadlock Avoidance, Deadlock Detection. Recovery from Deadlock.

UNIT IV
MEMORY MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES: Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation,
Paging, Structure of the Page Table, Segmentation.

VIRTUAL MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Demand Paging, Page Replacement, Allocation of

Frames, Thrashing , Memory-Mapped Files , Allocating Kernel Memory.

UNIT V
FILE-SYSTEM: The Concept of a File, Access Methods, Directory Structure, File-System
Mounting, File Sharing, Protection.

IMPLEMENTING FILE SYSTEM: File-System Structure, File-System Implementation,

Directory Implementation, Allocation Methods, Free-Space Management, Efficiency and
Performance, Recovery.

76
Text Book:
1. Silberschatz & Galvin, ‘Operating System Concepts’, 7th edition, Wiley.

Reference Books:
1. William Stallings-“Operating Systems”- 5th Edition – PHI.
2. Charles Crowley, ‘Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach’, Tata McGraw Hill
Co., 1998 edition.
3. Andrew S.Tanenbaum, ‘Modern Operating Systems’, 2nd edition, 1995, PHI.

***
Course Code : 11CS504
Course Title : Object Oriented Programming
Course Structure :3–1-2
SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO OOPS: Origins of C++, Object Oriented Programming, C++
fundamentals, Headers & Name Spaces, C++ Classes, Function overloading, Operator
overloading, Inheritance, Constructors & Destructors.

CLASSES & OBJECTS: Parameterized Constructors, Friend functions, Default function

arguments. Structures, Unions, and Inline functions, passing objects to functions, Returning
objects, Object assignment, Arrays of objects, Pointers to objects.
UNIT II
FUNCTION & OPERATOR OVERLOADING: Overloading constructors, Localizing
variables, Function overloading & Ambiguity, Finding the address of an overloaded function, This
Pointer, Operator overloading, References using reference to overload a unary operator,
Overloading [] and (), Applying operator overloading.

INHERITANCE: Inheritance and the access specifiers, Constructors and Destructors in derived
classes, Multiple Inheritance, Multilevel Inheritance, Diamond Inheritance, Hybrid Inheritance,
Passing parameters to a basic class.

UNIT III
POLYMORPHISM AND VIRTUAL FUNCTIONS: Pointer Objects, Pointer to Objects,
Pointers and references to derived types, Virtual Functions, Pure virtual functions and abstract
types, Early vs Late binding, Virtual Base Class.
THE C++ 1/0 CLASS LIBRARY: C++ streams, The C++ Stream classes, Creating own inserter
and extractors, Formatting I/O, Creating your own manipulator functions.

77
UNIT IV
FILES IN C++: File I/O, Unformatted and Binary I/O.

TEMPLATES: Generic Functions and classes.

EXCEPTIONS: Exception Handling, Fundamentals, options Un-caught exception (), Applying

exception Handling, and RTTI, casting operators.

UNIT V
MISCELLANEOUS C+ + TOPICS: Dynamic allocation using new and delete, static class
members, constant member functions and mutable, volatile member functions, Using the asm
keyword, linkage specification, The .* and ->* operators, Creating conversion functions, Copy
constructors, Granting access, Namespaces, Explicit constructors.
THE STANDARD TEMPLATE LIBRARY AND THE STRING CLASS: An overview of the
STL

Text Books:

1. Herbert Schieldt ,The Complete Reference - Borland C++ Builder ,2007,4th ed., TMH.

Reference Books:
1. E. Balaguruswamy, Object Oriented Programming using C++, 2nd ed., TMH.
2. Deitel HM and Deitel PJ: C++ How to Program, Third Edition, PHI.

***

78
Course Code : 11CSE12
Course Title : Mobile Computing
Course Structure :3–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT–I
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS: AN OVERVIEW: Mobile communication, Mobile
computing, Mobile computing architecture, Mobile Devices, Mobile system Networks, Data
dissemination, Mobility management.

MOBILE DEVICES AND SYSTEMS: Mobile phones, Digital music players, Handheld pocket
computers, Handheld devices, Smart systems, Limitations of mobile devices, Automotivesystems.

UNIT–II
GSM AND SIMILAR ARCHITECTURES: GSM – Services and system architecture, Radio
interfaces, Protocols, Localization, Calling, Handover, Security, New data services, General packet
radio service, High speed circuit switched data, DECT.

WIRELESS MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL AND CDMA-BASED COMMUNICATION:

Medium access control, Introduction to CDMA- based systems, Spread spectrum in CDMA
systems, Coding methods in CDMA, IMT-2000, i-mode, OFDM.

UNIT–III
MOBILE IP NETWORK LAYER: IP and mobile IP network layers, Packet delivery and
handover Management, Location management, Registration, Tunneling and encapsulation, Route
optimization,Dynamichostconfigurationprotocol.

MOBILE TRANSPORT LAYER: Conventional TCP/ IP transport layer protocol, Indirect TCP,
Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Other Methods of TCP-layer transmission for mobile networks,
TCPover2.5G/3Gmobilenetworks.

DATABASES: Database hoarding techniques, Data caching, Client-Server computing and

Adaptation, Transactional models, Query processing, Data recovery process, Issues relating to
Quality of service.

UNIT–IV
DATA DISSEMINATION AND BROADCASTING SYSTEMS: Communication asymmetry,
Classification of data-delivery mechanisms, Data dissemination broadcast models, Selective tuning
and indexing techniques, Digital audio broadcast models, Selective tuning and indexing
techniques, Digital audio broadcasting, Digital video broadcasting.

DATA SYNCHRONIZATION IN MOBILE COMPUTING SYSTEMS: Synchronization,

Synchronization software for model devices, Synchronization protocols, SyncML-Synchronization
language for mobile computing, Sync4J, Synchronized multimedia markup language.

79
MOBILE DEVICES: SERVER AND MANAGEMENT: Mobile agent, Application server,
Gateways, Protocol, Service discovery, Device management, Mobile file systems, Security.

MOBILE AD-HOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS: Introduction to Mobile Ad-hoc Networks,

MANET, Wireless sensor networks.

UNIT–V
WIRELESS LAN, MOBILE INTERNET CONNECTIVITY, AND PERSONAL AREA
NETWORK: Wireless LAN architecture and protocol, WAP 1.1 and WAP 2.0 architecture,
XHTML-MP, Bluetooth-enabled devices network, Layers in Bluetooth protocol, Security in
Bluetooth protocolIrDA,ZigBee.

MOBILE APPLICATION LANGUAGESXML, JAVA, J2ME, AND JAVACARD:

Introduction , XML, JAVA,Java2microedition,JavaCard.

MOBILE OPERATING SYSTEMS: Operating system, palmOS, Windows CE, Symbian OS,
Linux for mobile devices.

Text Books:
1. Raj Kamal, “Mobile Computing”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2007.

References Books:
1. Jochen H. Schller, “Mobile Communications”, second edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2007.
2. Jon W. Mark, Weihua Zhuang, “Wireless Communications and Networking”, Prentice
Hall, New Delhi, 2007.
***

80
Course Code : 11CSE23
Course Title : Data warehousing
Course Structure :3–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT–I
THE COMPELLING NEED FOR DATA WAREHOUSING: Escalating need for strategies
information, Failures of Past Decision-Supporting System, Operational Versus Decision-
Supporting System, Data Warehousing- The only Viable Solution, data Warehouse Defined.

THE BUILDING BLOCKS: Defining Features, Data Warehouse and Data Marts, Overview of
the Components, Metadata in the Data Warehouse.

TRENDS IN DATA WAREHOUSING: Continues Growth in Data Warehousing, Significant

Trends, Emergence of Standards.

PLANNING AND PLANNING MANAGEMENT: Planning your Data Warehousing, The Data
Warehouse Project, The project team, Project Management Considerations.

DEFINING THE BUSINESS REQUIREMENT: Dimension Analysis, Information Package- A

New Concept, Requirements Gathering Methods, Requirements Definition: Scope and content.

REQUIREMENTS AS THE DRIVING FORCE FOR DATA WAREHOUSING: Data

Design, The Architectural Plan, Data Storage Specification, and Information Delivery Strategy.

UNIT–II
THE ARCHITECTURAL COMPONENT: Understanding Data Warehouse Architecture,
Distinguishing Characteristics, Architectural framework, Technical Architecture.

INFRASTRUCTURE AS THE FOUNDATION FOR DATA WAREHOUSING:

Infrastructure Support Architecture, Hardware Operational System, Database Software, Collection
of Tools.

THE SIGNIFICANT ROLE OF METADATA: Why Metadata is Important, Metadata Types by

Functional Areas, Business Metadata, How to Provide Metadata.

UNIT–III
PRINCIPLES OF DIMENSIONAL MODELING: From Requirement to Data Design, The
STAR Schema, STAR Schema keys, Advantages of STAR Schema.

DIMENSIONAL MODELING: Updates to the Dimensional Tables, Miscellaneous Dimensions,

The Snowflake Schema, Aggregate Fact Tables, and Families of STARS.

DATA EXTRACTION, TRANSFORMATION, AND LOADING: ETL overview, Data

Extraction, Data Transformation, Data Loading, ETL Summary.

DATA QUALITY: Why data is quality critical, Data Quality Challenges, Data Quality Tools,
Data Quality Initiative.

UNIT–IV

81
MATCHING INFORMATION TO THE CLASSES OF USERS: Information from the Data
Warehouse, Who will Use the Information?, Information Delivery, Information Delivery Tools.

OLAP IN THE DATA WAREHOUSE: Demand for Online Analytical Processing, Major
Features and Functions, OLAP Models, OLAP Implementation Consideration.

DATA WAREHOUSING AND THE WEB: Web-Enabled Data Warehouse, Web-Based

Information Delivery, OLAP and the Web, Building a Web- Enabled Data Warehouse.

UNIT–V
THE PHYSICAL DESIGN PROCESS: Physical Design Steps, Physical Design Considerations,
Physical Storage, Indexing the Data Warehouse, Performance Enhancement Techniques.

DATA WAREHOUSE DEPLOYMENT: Major Deployment Activities, Considerations for a

Pilot, Security, Backup and Recovery.

GROWTH AND MAINTENANCE: Monitoring the Data Warehouse, User Training and
Support, Managing the Data Warehouse.

***

82
I/II M.Tech II Semester

Course Code : 11CS506

Course Title : Computer Networks
Course Structure : 3-1-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT–I
INTRODUCTION: Use of Computer Networks, Network Hardware, Network software,
Reference models, Example Networks.

PHYSICAL LAYER: The theoretical basis for Data Communication, Guided Transmission
media, Modems, ADSL, Trunks and Multiplexing, switching.

UNIT–II
DATA LINK LAYER: DLL design issues. Error Detection and Correction, Elementary data link
protocols, sliding window protocols.

MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL SUB LAYER: Channel allocation problem, multiple access
protocols, Ethernet, Data link Layer switching.

UNIT–III
NETWORK LAYER: Network layer design issues, Routing algorithms, congestion control
algorithms, Quality of service, Internetworking, network layer in the Internet

UNIT–IV
TRANSPORT LAYER: Transport service, Elements of transport protocols, Internet transport
protocols: TCP & UDP, Performance Issues
UNIT–V
APPLICATION LAYER: Domain Name System, Electronic Mail, World Wide Web.

Text Books:
1. Andrew S.Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, 2003,PHI, Fourth Edition.

Reference Books:
1. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, Pearson Edition,Seventh
Edition ,2007.
2. Behrouz A. Fourouzan, TCP/IP Protocol Suite, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2006.
***

83
Course Code : 11CS507
Course Title : Software Engineering
Course Structure :3–0–0

SYLLABUS:
UNIT–I
SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE ENGINEERING: Nature of software, software application
domains, unique nature of web applications, software engineering, software process, software
engineering practice, software myths.

PROCESS MODELS: Generic process model, prescriptive process models, specialized process
models, unified process, personal and team process models, product and process.

AGILE DEVELOPMENT: Agility, agile process, extreme programming and other agile process
models.

UNIT–II
MODELING: Core principles, principles that guide each frame work activity.

UNDERSTANDING REQUIREMENTS: Identify stakeholders, Recognizing multiple view

points, Eliciting requirements, building requirement model, negotiating requirements, validating
requirements.

REQUIREMENT MODELING: Analysis, Rules of Thumb, domain analysis, requirement

modeling approaches, scenario based modeling, Data modeling concepts, Flow oriented modeling,
creating behavioral model, patterns for requirement modeling,

UNIT–III
DESIGN CONCEPTS: Design process, Design concepts, design model.

ARCHITECTURE DESIGN: Software architecture, architectural styles, architectural design,

assessing alternative architectural designs, architectural mappings using data flow.

COMPONENT-LEVEL DESIGN: Designing class based components, conducting component

level design.

UNIT–IV
USER INTERFACE DESIGN: The golden rules, user interface analysis and design, interface
analysis, interface design steps.

QUALITY CONCEPTS: software quality, software quality dilemma, achieving software quality.
SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE: Elements of software quality assurance, sqa tasks,
goals. Formal approaches.

UNIT–V
SOFTWARE TESTING STRATEGIES: A strategic approach to software testing, strategic
issues, test strategies for conventional software, validation testing, system testing.

84
Text Books:
1. Roger S.Pressman ,”Software Engineering – A Practitioner’s Approach 7th Edition 2010,
Mc Graw Hill.

Reference Books:
1. Ian Sommerville,‘Software Engineering’, Sixth Edition,2001,Pearson Education.

Course Code : 11CS508

Course Title : Database Management System

Course Structure : 3-1-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT–I
DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS: DBMS characteristics & Advantages, Database environment,
Data base users, Database architecture, data independence, Languages, tools and interfaces in
DBMS. DBMS Types.

UNIT-II
DATA MODELING: ER Model, Notation used in ER diagram, Constraints, types, relationships
in ER Model and other considerations in designing ER diagram. Enhanced ER Data Model, EER
Diagram, Specialization and Generalization, Lattice, Union and Disjoint properties, Constraints
and relationships, other issues in designing EER Diagram. Algorithms for ER to Relational
mapping

UNIT–III
SQL: Data definition and other languages in SQL, Creating Tables, and Data types, Constraints,
DML statements, Functions and writing SQL statements using nested sub queries, complex
queries, joining relations. Embedded SQL - Writing Functions and procedures with PL/SQL.
Relational Model, Relational Algebra, Operators in Relational Algebra.

UNIT–IV
NORMALIZATION: Guidelines for good database design, Normalization – Normal Forms, First,
Second, Third Normal Forms, BCNF (Boyce Codd Normal Form). Multi value and join
dependencies, 4th and 5th Normal forms. Decomposition algorithms for normalization. File and
storage structures: File storage, index structures, indexing and hashing (Basics) Query Processing:
Issues in query processing, simple algorithms for insert, project, join and other operators.

UNIT–V
TRANSACTION PROCESSING: Transaction processing issues, Transaction states, problems
during multiple transaction processing, ACID properties, System Log.

CONCURRENCY CONTROL TECHNIQUES: Binary Locks, Exclusive Locks, Lock based

Techniques, Timestamp based techniques. Versioning in Locks, Multiversion Locking techniques.

85
Text Books:
1. Elmasri & Navathe Fundamentals of Data base Systems, 2008,4th edition, Pearson.

Reference Books:
1. A Silberschatz , Henry F Korth, S. Sudarshan ,“Database System Concepts” ,2003 , Fifth
Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database management systems”, 2004 ,
2nd edition, Tata McGraw Hill.
***
Course Code : 11CS509
Course Title : Embedded Systems
Course Structure :3–1-0
SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
ES BASICS: Introduction to Embedded Systems: Definition, Comparison with Loaded Systems,
Challenges of Embedded systems, Application of Embedded Systems. Hardware fundamentals and
devices: CHIPS, GATES, PCB, Power and decoupling, Timing Diagrams, Signal Processing
related issues, Clocks, Flip Flops, Memories, Micro Processors, PINS, ports, Address Resolution,
Address Decoding within Micro Processors, Micro Processors VS Micro Controllers, Busses and
Bus Handling, DMA, UART and RS232, PAL, FPGA, Timers, Counters, Pulse width Modulators
for speed control, LCD Controllers, Key Pad Controllers, Stepper motor controllers, A/D
Converters.Introduction to temp Sensors, Flow Control devices, Humidity Control devices, Speed
Control devices.

UNIT II
INTERFACING: Communication basics, Basic Terminology, Basic Protocol concepts, I/O
Addressing: Port Based Addressing, Bus Based addressing, Memory mapped I/O, Standard I/O,
Interfacing Micro Processors through Interrupts and DMA, Arbitration Techniques, Multi Bus
Architecture Serial Communication and Protocols: I2C, CAN, Fire-wire, USB, Parallel
Communication and protocols: PCI Bus, ARM Bus, Wireless Communication and Protocols:
IrDA, Blue Tooth, 802.11g.
UNIT III
ES SOFTWARE PROCESSING PLATFORM: Micro Processor Architecture both CISC and
RISC, Interrupt Processing, Shared data problem, Interrupt Latency, Software Architectures:
Round Robin, Round Robin with Interrupts, Function Queue Scheduling, RTOS, Selecting
architecture.

UNIT IV
REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS: Tasks and Task data, Scheduler, Re-Reentrancy,
Semaphores, Semaphore Problems, Message Queues, Mail Boxes, Pipes, Timer Functions, Event
Handling, Memory Management, Interrupt Processing, and Power saving Functions. Introduction
to μcos and VxWorks.
UNIT V
ANALYSIS, DESIGN AND SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT: Analysis and designing
Embedded Systems using RTOS, Overview, General Design Principles, Hardware and software
CO design in Embedded Systems, Encapsulating Semaphores and Queues, Real Time Scheduling

86
Considerations, Software development process and tools Testing and Debugging Techniques,
Testing and Debugging Tools.
Text Books:
1. Am embedded Software Premier, David E. Simon, Person Education, 1999.
2. Embedded Systems Design, Frank Vahid /Tony Givargis, John Wiley and sons inc.

Reference Books:
1. Embedded Systems, Raj kamal, Tata McGraw- Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2003.

***

Course Code : 11CSE43

Course Title : Data Security

Course Structure : 3-0-0

SYLLABUS:

INTRODUCTION: Security Trends, The OSI Security Architecture, Security Attacks, Security
Services, Security Mechanisms, A Model for Network Security, Recommended Reading & Web
Sites.

CLASSICAL ENCRYPTION TECHNIQUES: Symmetric Cipher Model, Substitution

Techniques, Transposition Techniques, Rotor Machines, Steganography.

BLOCK CIPHERS & THE DATA ENCRYPTION STANDARD: Block Cipher Principles,
The Data Encryption Standard, The Strength of DES, Differential & Linear Cryptanalysis, Block
Cipher Design Principles.

ADVANCED ENCRYPTION STANDARD: Evaluation Criteria for AES, The AES Cipher.

MORE ON SYMMETRIC CIPHERS: Multiple Encryption & Triple DES, Block Cipher Modes
of Operation, Stream Ciphers & RC4.

CONFIDENTIALITY USING SYMMETRIC ENCRYPTION: Placement of Encryption

Function, Traffic Confidentiality, Key Distribution, Random Number Generation.

PUBLIC – KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY & RSA: Principles of Public – key Cryptosystems, The
RSA Algorithm.

KEY MANAGEMENT; OTHER PUBLIC-KEY CRYPTOSYSTEMS: Key Management,

Diffie – Hellman Key Exchange, Elliptic Curve Arithmetic, Elliptic Curve Cryptography.

MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION & HASH FUNCTIONS: Authentication Requirements,

Authentication Functions, Message Authentication Codes, Hash Functions, Security of Hash
Functions & Macs.

HASH & AC ALGORITHMS: Secure Hash Algorithm, Whirlpool, HMAC, CMAC.

DIGITAL SIGNATURES & AUTHENTICATION PROTOCOLS: Digital Signatures,

Authentication Protocols, Digital Signature Standard.

87
AUTHENTICATION APPLICATIONS: Kerberos, X.509 Authentication Service, Public – Key
Infrastructure.

ELECTRONIC MAIL SECURITY: Pretty Good Privacy, S/MIME.

IP SECURITY: IP Security Overview, IP Security Architecture, Authentication Header,

Encapsulating Security Payload, Combining Security Associations, Key Management.

WEB SECURITY: Web Security Considerations, Secure Socket Layer & Transport Layer
Security, Secure Electronic Transaction.

FIREWALLS: Firewall Design Principles, Trusted Systems, Common Criteria for Information
Technology Security Evaluation.
Text Books:
1. ‘Cryptography and Network Security’, William Stallings, 4/E Publisher: Prentice Hall.

Reference Books:
1. ‘Network Security: Private Communication in a Public World’, Charlie Kaufman,
Radia Perlman Mike Speciner, Publisher: Prentice Hall 2/E.
2. ‘Cryptography and Network Security’, Atul Kahate, Publisher TATA McGraw- Hill
Publishing Co Edition 2003.
3. ‘Fundamentals of Network Security’, Eric Maiwald, Publisher TATA McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co 2003.
***

Course Code : 11CSE32

Course Title : Cloud Computing
Course Structure :4–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
CLOUD COMPUTING BASICS: Overview, Applications, Intranet and the Cloud, First Movers
on the cloud, the need for Cloud Computing, Benefits of cloud Computing, Limitations of the
Cloud Computing, security concerns and regulatory issues, over view of different cloud computing
applications which are implemented, Business case for implementing a Cloud.

INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING(Book-2): What and what is not cloud

computing, Moving from collaboration to cloud, Cloud Architectures, cloud storage, cloud
Services, reasons for cloud computing, pros and cons of cloud computing, benefits of cloud
computing, users of cloud computing.

UNIT-II
CLOUD COMPUTING TECHNOLOGIES: Hardware and Infrastructure: Clients, Security,
Network, services.

ACCESSING THE CLOUDS: Platforms, WEB applications, WEB APIS, WB Browsers.

CLOUD STORAGE: Overview, Storage provides.

CLOUD STANDARDS: Applications, Client, Infrastructure, Services.

UNIT-III

88
CLOUD COMPUTING MECHANISMS: Software as a service: Overview, Driving Forces,
Company offerings, Industries, Software + services: Overview, Mobile Device Integration,
Providers, Microsoft Online.

APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT: Google, Microsoft, Intuit Quick base, Cast Iron Cloud,
Bungee. Connect.

DEVELOPMENT PLATFORMS: Google, Sales Force, Azure, Trouble shooting, Application

management.

UNIT-IV
LOCAL CLOUDS: Virtualization, server solutions, Thin Clients.

MIGRATING TO THE CLOUDS: Cloud services for individuals, Mid-market, and Enterprise
wide, Migration, best practices, analyzing the service.

UNIT V
USING CLOUD SERVICES: Collaborating on Calendars, Schedules, and Task Management,
Collaborating on Event management, Collaborating on Contact management, collaborating on
Project Management, Collaborating on Word Processing, Collaborating on Spread sheets,
Collaborating on Databases, Collaborating on presentations, Storing and sharing Files and other
online content, sharing Digital Photographs, controlling the collaborations with Web-Based
Desktops.

ONLINE COLLABORATIONS: Collaborating Via WEB based communication Tools,

Collaborating Via Social Networks and Groupware, collaborating Via Blogs and Wikis.

Text Books:
1. Cloud Computing a Practical approach, Anthony T Velte, Toby J Velte, Robert Elsenpeter,
Tata McGraw-HILL, 2010 Edition.
2. Cloud Computing-Web Based applications that change the way you work and
collaborate online, Michael Miller, Pearson Education, 2009 Edition.

Reference Books:
1. Cloud Computing ,Antonopoulos, Nick; Gillam, Lee,Springer 2010.

***

89
 M. TECH (CNS)

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

90
DEPARTMENT OF CNS (Y12)
S.No Course Code Course Title L-T-P Credits
Semester -1
DATA STRUCTURES AND
1 11CN501 3-1-2 5
ALGORITHMS
ADVANCED COMPUTER
2 11CN502 3-1-0 4
NETWORKS
3 11CN503 TCP / IP PROTOCOLS 3-1-2 5
4 11CN504 ADHOC NETWORKS 3-1-0 4
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION &
5 11CNE12 3-0-0 3
NETWORKS
6 11CNE24 CLOUD COMPUTING 3-0-0 3
7 11CN505 SEMINAR 0-0-4 2
8 26
Semester -2
CRYPTOGRAPHY AND
1 11CN506 3-1-0 4
NETWORK SECURITY
2 11CN507 NETWORK PROGRAMMING 3-0-2 4
3 11CN508 NETWORK ROUTING 3-1-0 4
SECURE SYSTEMS
4 11CN509 3-1-2 5
DEVELOPMENT WITH UML
5 11CNE32 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 3-0-0 3
6 11CNE41 MOBILE COMPUTING 3-0-0 3
7 11CN510 TERM PAPER 0-0-4 2
8 25
Semester -3 & 4
1 11 CS 601 THESIS/PROJECT 36

91
I / II M.Tech. First Semester

Course Code : 11CS501

Course Title : Data Structures and Algorithms
Course Structure :3–1-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION: Algorithms, algorithms as a technology, Analyzing algorithms , Designing
algorithms, Asymptotic notations, standard notations, common functions, Recurrences –
substitution method, master method.

SORTING AND ORDER STATISTICS: Merge sort, Quick sort, Heap sort, sorting in linear
time, Median and order statistics.

UNIT-II
DATA STRUCTURES: Elementary Data Structures – Linked lists, Stacks, Queues, Hash Tables
– Direct address tables, Hash tables, Hash functions, Open addressing, Search Trees – Binary
search trees, Red-Black Trees.

ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES: B – Trees, Binomial Heaps, Fibonacci Heaps, Data

Structures for Disjoint Sets.

UNIT-III
GRAPH ALGORITHMS: Elementary graph algorithms – Representation of graphs, BFS, DFS,
Topological Sort, Strongly connected components, Minimum Spanning Trees – The algorithms of
Kruskal and Prim’s. Single-Source Shortest Paths: The Bellman-Ford algorithm, Single source
shortest paths in DAG’s, Dijkstra’s algorithm, All-Pair Shortest paths – Shortest paths and Matrix
multiplication, Floyd-Warshall algorithm. Maximum Flow: Flow networks, The Ford-Fulkerson
method, Maximum Bipartite matching.

UNIT-IV
ADVANCED DESIGN AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES: Greedy Algorithms – An activity –
selection Problem, Elements of greedy strategy, Huffman codes. Dynamic Programming: Matrix
Chain multiplication, Elements of dynamic programming, Optimal Binary Search Trees.

UNIT-V
STRING MATCHING: The naïve string matching algorithm, Rabin-Karp algorithm, Knuth-
Morris-Pratt algorithm.
NP-COMPLETENESS: Polynomial time, Verification, NP-Completeness and reducibility, NP-
Completeness proofs, NP-Complete problems.

Text Books:
1. Introduction to Algorithms, second edition, T.H.Cormen, C.E.Leiserson, R.L.Rivest, and
C.Stein,PHI Pvt.Ltd./ Pearson Education.

92
Reference Books:
1. Algorithm Design: Foundations,Analysis and Internet examples, M.T.Goodrich and
R.Tomassia,John wiley and sons.
2. Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms,Ellis Horowitz,Satraj Sahni and
S.Rajasekharam,Galgotia publications pvt. Ltd.
3. Introduction to Design and Analysis of Algorithms A strategic approach, R.C.T.Lee,
S.S.Tseng, R.C.Chang and T.Tsai, Mc Graw Hill.
4. Data structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++, Allen Weiss, Second edition, Pearson
education.
5. Design and Analysis of algorithms, Aho, Ullman and Hopcroft, Pearson education.

***

93
Course Code : 11 CN 502
Course Title : Advanced Computer Networks
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT–I
INTERNETWORKING: Introduction, History and Context, Packet switching. Internetworking:
Architectural Principles, Names, Addresses. Interdomain Routing.

UNIT–II
RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: End-to-End Congestion Control , Fair Queuing –WFQ,CSFQ,
Router congestion control –RED,XCP. Quality of Service – Future requirements and IntServ,
Router Design.

UNIT–III
WIRELESS NETWORKS: Wireless Networks Overview and Architectures (MACAW, WTCP),
Wireless Networks in the Real World - roofnet, Routing in ad-hoc Networks, Sensor networks,
topology.

UNIT-IV
APPLICATIONS, NAMING, AND OVERLAYS: Overlay Networks, Distributed Hash Tables,
DNS and the Web, Names, Identifiers, and Network architecture.

UNIT–V
MEASUREMENT and Tracing, Internet Measurement, X Trace, Data-oriented networking and
DTNs, Multicast, Datacenter Networking.

Text Books:
1. Computer Networks: A Systems Approach, 4th Ed. (2007), by Larry Peterson and Bruce
Davie.
2. Computer Networks, Fourth Edition, A. Tanenbaum, Prentice-Hall, 2002.

Reference Books:
1. Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet, 4th Ed. (2007), by
James F. Kurose and Keith W. Ross.
2. TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1: The Protocols by W. Richard Stevens.
3. Unix Network Programming: Networking APIs: Sockets and XTI (Volume 1) by W.
Richard Stevens.
4. Advanced Programming in the Unix Environment by W. Richard Stevens, Addison-
Wesley, 1993.
5. Computer Networks and Internets with Internet Applications, Third Edition, D.E.
Comer,Prentice-Hall, 2001.
6. Communication Networks, Fundamental Concepts and Key Architecture, A. Leon-Garcia
and I. Wadjaja, McGraw-Hill, 2000.
94
7. Data and Computer Communications, Sixth Edition, W.S. Stallings, Prentice-Hall, 1999.
8. Data Communications, Computer Networks and Open Systems, Fourth Edition, F.
Halsall, Addison-Wesley, 1995.
9. Data Networks, Second Edition, D. Bertsekas and R. Gallager, Prentice-Hall, 1992.

***

95
Course Code : 11CN503
Course Title : TCP IP Protocols
Course Structure :3–1-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO INTERNETWORKING: Internetworking Concepts – Architectural
model(TCP/IP-OSI) – Routing – Internet Addressing – Multicast Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) – Reverse Address Resolutions Protocol (RARP) –BOOTP – DHCP. Fragmentation and
Reassembling – Error Processing (ICMP) – Multicast Processing (IGMP).

UNIT II
INTERNET PROTOCOL: IPv-4, IPV6 Protocol – Addressing, IP Security Protocol, Routing
Algorithms – RIP, OSPF.

UNIT III
TCP/IP 1: BGP, and MPLS-MPLS fundamentals, signaling protocol, LDP, traffic engineering. In
MPLS, Transport Layer – TCP, UDP, SCTP and RTP.

UNIT IV
TCP/IP 2: Data Structures Input Processing – Output Processing – Timer Management – Flow
Control and Adaptive Retransmission – Urgent Data Processing.

UNIT V
SERVICE MANAGEMENT: Differentiated Services, Integrated Services, RSVP, Traffic
Engineering – ECMP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS – TE Dynamic TE.

Text Books:
1. Adrian Farrel, “The Internet and Its Protocols – A Comparative Approach” Morgan
Kaufmann, April 2004.
2. Douglas E Comer “Internetworking with TCP/IP principles protocol and architectures”, 4th
edition Volume 2, Prentice Hall, 2000.

Reference Books:
1. Pete Loshin “IPV6 Theory, Protocol and Practice, 2nd Edition”, Morgan Kaufmann.
December 2003.
2. W.Richard Stevens “TCP/IP Illustrated, the Protocols. Volume I”, Pearson Education
India 2003.
3. Comer D.E & Stevens D.L. “Internetworking TCP/IP – Volume III”, Prentice Hall of
India 1997.
***

96
Course Code : 11CN504

Course Title : ADHOC Networks

Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:
UNIT I
AD HOC NETWORK: Introduction & definition, applications, Design challenges, evaluating ad
hoc Network protocols.Collision avoidance protocols: performance of collision avoidance
protocols, Frame work &mechanisms for fair access in ieee802.11.

UNIT II
ROUTING IN MOBILE AD HOC NETWORKS: Flooding, Proactive routing, On-demand
routing, Proactive vs on-demand, Location based routing.Multicasting in ad hoc network:
Classification of protocols, Multicasting protocols, broadcasting, Protocol comparisons, and
Overarching issues.

UNIT III
TRANSPORT LAYER PROTOCOL IN AD HOC NETWORKS: Tcp &ad hoc networks
Tcp &ad hoc networks, Transport layer for adhoc networks, Modified TCP,TCP-aware cross-
layered solutions, Ad-hoc transport protocol. Energy conservation: energy consumption in adhoc
networks, Communication-time energy conservation, Idle-time energy conservation.

UNIT IV
USE OF SMART ANTENNAS: Smart antenna basics, Models, Medium access control with
directional antennas, Medium access control with directional antennas, Medium access control
with directional antennas, Medium access control with directional antennas, Routing with
directional antennas, Broadcast with directional antennas, Broadcast with directional antennas.

UNIT V
QOS ISSUES IN AD HOC NETWORKS: Physical layer, Medium access layer, QoS Routing,
QoS at other networking layer, Inter-layer design approaches,Security in mobile ad hoc network:
Security, Potential attacks, Attack prevention techniques, Intrusion detection techniques.

Text Books:
1. Ad hoc Networks technologies & protocols, prasant mohapatra and srikanth
Krishnamurthy.

Reference Books:
1. Adhoc networks, charless E.perkin, person education.

2. William Stallings “Wireless communication and networking” (Pearson Education/ PHI).

3. Vijay K. Garg “Wireless communication and networking” Morgan Kaufmann Publishers
2007.
4. Andrea GoldSmith “Wireless Communication” Cambridge Press.
5. Anurag Kumar, D. Manjunath and Joy Kuri “Wireless Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers.
***

97
Course Code : 11CNE12

Course Title : Wireless Communication and Networks

Course Structure :3–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION, TRANSMISSION FUNDAMENTALS: signals for conveying information,
analog and digital data transmission, channel capacity, transmission media, multiplexing.

ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION: antennas, propagation modes, line-of-sight

transmission, fading in the mobile environment.

MODULATION TECHNIQUES: signal encoding criteria, digital data, analog signals, analog
data, analog signals, analog data, digital signals, spread spectrum modulation, frequency hopping
spread spectrum, code division multiple access.

COMMUNICATION NETWORKS: LANs, MANs, and WANs, switching techniques, circuit

switching, packet switching, asynchronous transfer mode.

UNIT II
WIRELESS NETWORKS PROTOCOLS AND THE TCP/IP : suite- the need for protocol
architecture, the TCP/IP protocol architecture, the OSI model, internetworking.

CELLULAR WIRELESS NETWORKS: principles of wireless networks, first generation

analog, second-generation TDMA, CDMA, third-generation systems.

UNIT III
WIRELESS LINK IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES: equalization, diversity, error detection,
block error correction codes, convolutional codes, automatic repeat request.

MULTIPLE ACCESS IN WIRELESS SYSTEM: multiple access scheme, frequency, time,

code, space division multiple access, packet radio access.

SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS: satellite parameters and configurations, capacity

allocation-frequency division, time division.

UNIT IV
WIRELESS SYSTEM OPERATIONS AND STANDARDS: cordless systems, wireless local
loop, WiMAX and IEEE 802.16 broadband wireless access standards.

MOBILE IP AND WIRELESS APPLICATION PROTOCOL: mobile IP, wireless application

protocol.

WIRELESS LAN TECHNOLOGY: overview, infrared LANs, spread spectrum LANs,

narrowband microwave LANs.

98
UNIT V
WI-FI AND THE IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LAN STANDARD: IEEE 802 architecture, IEEE
802.11 architecture and services, IEEE 802.11 medium access control, IEEE 802.11 physical layer,
other IEEE 802.11 standards, Wi-Fi protected access.

BLUETOOTH AND IEEE 802.15.500: overview, radio specification, baseband specification,

link manager specification, logical link control and adaptation protocol, IEEE 802.15,538.

Text Books:
1. William Stallings “Wireless communication and networking” (Pearson Education/
PHI).
2. Vijay K. Garg “Wireless communication and networking” Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers 2007.

Reference Books:
1. Andrea GoldSmith “Wireless Communication” Cambridge Press.
2. Anurag Kumar, D. Manjunath and Joy Kuri “Wireless Networking” , Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers.
***

99
Course Code : 11CNE24
Course Title : Cloud Computing
Course Structure :3–0-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT I
CLOUD COMPUTING BASICS: Overview, Applications, Intranet and the Cloud, First Movers
on the cloud, the need for Cloud Computing, Benefits of cloud Computing, Limitations of the
Cloud Computing, security concerns and regulatory issues, over view of different cloud computing
applications which are implemented, Business case for implementing a Cloud.
INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING(BOOK-2): What and what is not cloud
computing, Moving from collaboration to cloud, Cloud Architectures, cloud storage, cloud
Services, reasons for cloud computing, pros and cons of cloud computing, benefits of cloud
computing, users of cloud computing.
UNIT-II
CLOUD COMPUTING TECHNOLOGIES: Hardware and Infrastructure: Clients, Security,
Network, services.
ACCESSING THE CLOUDS: Platforms, WEB applications, WEB APIS, WB Browsers.
CLOUD STORAGE: Overview, Storage provides.
CLOUD STANDARDS: Applications, Client, Infrastructure, Services.
UNIT-III
CLOUD COMPUTING MECHANISMS: Software as a service: Overview, Driving Forces,
Company offerings, Industries, Software + services: Overview, Mobile Device Integration,
Providers, Microsoft Online.
APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT: Google, Microsoft, Intuit Quick base, Cast Iron Cloud,
Bungee Connect.
DEVELOPMENT PLATFORMS: Google, Sales Force, Azure, Trouble shooting, Application
management.
UNIT-IV
LOCAL CLOUDS: Virtualization, server solutions, Thin Clients.
MIGRATING TO THE CLOUDS: Cloud services for individuals, Mid-market, and Enterprise
wide, Migration, best practices, analyzing the service.
UNIT-V
USING CLOUD SERVICES: Collaborating on Calendars, Schedules, and Task Management,
Collaborating on Event management, Collaborating on Contact management, collaborating on
Project Management, Collaborating on Word Processing, Collaborating on Spread sheets,
Collaborating on Databases, Collaborating on presentations, Storing and sharing Files and other
online content, sharing Digital Photographs, controlling the collaborations with Web-Based
Desktops.
ONLINE COLLABORATIONS: Collaborating Via WEB based communication Tools,
Collaborating Via Social Networks and Groupware, collaborating Via Blogs and Wikis.
Text Books:
1. Cloud Computing a practical approach, Anthony T Velte, Toby J Velte, Robert
Elsenpeter , Tata McGraw-HILL,2010 Edition.

2. Cloud Computing-web Based application that change the way you work and collaborate
online, Michael Miller, Pearson Eduction,2009 Edition.
***
100
I/II M.Tech II Semester

Course Code : 11CN506

Course Title : Cryptography and Network Security
Course Structure : 3-1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
BASIC CRYPTOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES
ENCRYPTION - SYMMETRIC TECHNIQUES: Substitution Ciphers, Transposition Ciphers,
Classical Ciphers: Usefulness and Security, The Data Encryption Standard (DES), The Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES), Confidentiality Modes of Operation, Key Channel Establishment for
Symmetric Cryptosystems.

ENCRYPTION - ASYMMETRIC TECHNIQUES: Insecurity of "Textbook Encryption

Algorithms", The Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange Protocol, The Diffie-Hellman Problem and the
Discrete Logarithm Problem, The RSA Cryptosystem (Textbook Version), Cryptanalysis Against
Public-key Cryptosystems, The RSA Problem, The Integer Factorization Problem, Insecurity of
the Textbook RSA Encryption, The Rabin Cryptosystem (Textbook Version), Insecurity of the
Textbook Rabin Encryption, The ElGamal Cryptosystem (Textbook Version), Insecurity of the
Textbook ElGamal Encryption, Need for Stronger Security Notions for Public-key Cryptosystems,
Combination of Asymmetric and Symmetric Cryptography, Key Channel Establishment for
Public-key Cryptosystems.
UNIT II
AUTHENTICATION PROTOCOLS - PRINCIPLES: Authentication and Refined Notions,
Convention, Basic Authentication Techniques, Password-based Authentication, Authenticated Key
Exchange Based on Asymmetric Cryptography, Typical Attacks on Authentication Protocols.

HASH AND MESSAGE DIGESTS: MD5, SHA1, HMAC.

AUTHENTICATION FRAMEWORK FOR PUBLIC-KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Directory-

Based Authentication, Non-Directory Based Public-key Authentication Framework.

UNIT III
FORMAL APPROACHES TO SECURITY ESTABLISHMENT
FORMAL AND STRONG SECURITY DEFINITIONS FOR PUBLIC-KEY
CRYPTOSYSTEMS: Introduction, A Formal Treatment for Security, Semantic Security — the
Debut of Provable Security, Inadequacy of Semantic Security, Beyond Semantic Security.

PROVABLY SECURE AND EFFICIENT PUBLIC-KEY CRYPTOSYSTEMS: Introduction,

The Optimal Asymmetric Encryption Padding, The Cramer-Shoup Public-key Cryptosystem, An
Overview of Provably Secure Hybrid Cryptosystems.

UNIT IV
FORMAL METHODS FOR AUTHENTICATION PROTOCOLS ANALYSIS: Toward
Formal Specification of Authentication Protocols, A Computational View of Correct Protocols —
the Bellare-Rogaway Model, A Symbolic Manipulation View of Correct Protocols, Formal
Analysis Techniques: State System Exploration, Reconciling Two Views of Formal Techniques
for Security.

101
ZERO-KNOWLEDGE PROTOCOLS: Basic Definitions, Zero-knowledge Properties Proof or
Argument, Protocols with Two-sided-error, Round Efficiency, Non-interactive Zero-knowledge.

UNIT V
NETWORK SECURITY STANDARDS: Kerberos V5, PKI, IPsec: AH and ESP, SSL/TLS,
PEM & S/MIME, PGP.

Text Books:
1. Modern Cryptography Theory and Practice, Wenbo Mao, Pearson Education 2008.
2. Network Security: Private Communication in a Public World, Charlie Kaufman,
Radia Perlman Mike Speciner, Prentice Hall 2/E.( Hash and Message Digests, Unit V)

Reference Books:
1. Cryptography and Network Security, William Stallings, 4/E Publisher: Prentice Hall.
2. Information Security Principles & Practice, Mark Stamp, WILEY INDIA 2006.

***

102
Course Code : 11CN507
Course Title : Network Programming
Course Structure :3–0-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
POSIX IPC: IPC Names, Creating and Opening IPC Channels, IPC Permissions.

SYSTEM V IPC: key_t Keys and ftok Function, ipc_perm Structure, Creating and Opening. IPC
Channels, IPC Permissions, Identifier Reuse, ipcs and ipcrm Programs, Kernel Limits.

PIPES AND FIFOS: Pipes, Full-Duplex Pipes, popen and pclose Functions, FIFOs. Additional
Properties of Pipes and FIFOs, Streams and Messages, Pipe and FIFO Limits.

POSIX MESSAGE QUEUES: mq_open, mq_close, and mq_unlink Functions, mq_getattr and
mq_setattr Functions, mq_send and mq_receive Functions, Message Queue Limits.

UNIT-II

SYSTEM V MESSAGE QUEUES: msgget Function, msgsnd Function, msgrcv Function, msgctl
Function, Simple Programs, Client-Server Example, Multiplexing Messages, Message Queues
with select and poll, Message Queue Limits.

POSIX SEMAPHORES: sem_open, sem_close, and sem_unlink Functions, sem_wait and

sem_trywait Functions, sem_post and sem_getvalue Functions, Simple programs.

SYSTEM V SEMAPHORES: semget Function, semop Function, semctl Function, Simple

Programs, File Locking, Semaphore Limits.

UNIT-III

SHARED MEMORY INTRODUCTION: mmap, munmap, and msync Functions, Increment

Counter in a Memory-Mapped File.

POSIX SHARED MEMORY: shm_open and shm_unlink Functions, ftruncate and fstat
Functions, Simple Programs, Incrementing a Shared Counter.

SYSTEM V SHARED MEMORY: SHMGET FUNCTION, SHMAT FUNCTION, SHMDT

FUNCTION, SHMCTL Function, Simple Programs, Shared Memory Limits.

DOORS: Introduction, door_call Function, door_create Function, door_return Function,

door_cred Function, door_info Function, Examples, Descriptor Passing.

UNIT-IV
SOCKETS INTRODUCTION: Socket Address Structures, Value-Result Arguments, Byte
Ordering Functions, Byte Manipulation Functions, inet_aton, inet_addr, and inet_ntoa Functions,
inet_pton and inet_ntop Functions, sock_ntop and Related Functions, readn, writen, and readline
Functions.

ELEMENTARY TCP SOCKETS: socket Function, connect Function, bind Function, listen
Function, accept Function, fork and exec Functions, Concurrent Servers, close Function,
getsockname and getpeername Functions.

103
TCP CLIENT/SERVER EXAMPLE: TCP Echo Server, TCP Echo Client.

I/O MULTIPLEXING: THE SELECT AND POLL FUNCTIONS: I/O Models, select
Function, str_cli Function (with Multiplexing) , Batch Input and Buffering, shutdown Function,
TCP Echo Server (with Multiplexing) , pselect Function, poll Function.

UNIT-V
SOCKET OPTIONS: getsockopt and setsockopt Functions, Checking if an Option Is Supported
and Obtaining the Default, Socket States, Generic Socket Options, IPv4 Socket options, CMPv6
Socket Option, IPv6 Socket Options, TCP Socket Options.

ELEMENTARY UDP SOCKETS: recvfrom and sendto Functions, UDP Echo Server, UDP
Echo Client.

NAME AND ADDRESS CONVERSIONS: Domain Name System (DNS) , gethostbyname

Function, gethostbyaddr Function, getservbyname and getservbyport Functions, getaddrinfo
Function, gai_strerror Functionfreeaddrinfo Function, getaddrinfo Function: IPv6, getaddrinfo
Function: Examples, host_serv Function, tcp_connect Function, tcp_listen Function, udp_client
Function, udp_connect Function, udp_server, Function, getnameinfo Function .

Text Books:
1. UNIX Network Programming, Volume 1: The Sockets Networking API, W. Richard
Stevens, Bill Fenner, Andrew M. Rudoff, Prentice Hall 3/E, 2008 ( Chapters 3, 4, 5.1-
5.5, 6.1-6.6, 6.8-6.10, 7.1-7.9, 8.1-8.6, 11.1-11.17).

2. UNIX Network Programming, Volume 2: Interprocess Communications, W. Richard

Stevens, Prentice Hall 2/E.2007 ( Chapters 2, 3, 4, 5.1-5.5, 6, 10.1-10.5, 11, 12.1-12.3,
13.1-13.5, 14, 15.1-15.8).

Reference Books:

1. TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 2: The Implementation, Gary R. Wright, W. Richard Stevens,

Addison Wesley, 2005.
2. Internetworking with TCP/IP Volume : III Client and Server Programming and
Applications BSD Socket Versions, Douglas E Comer, David L Stevens, Second edition
PHI, 2007.
3. Advanced Programming in the UNIX® Environment, Richard Stevens, Stephen A. Rago,
Addison Wesley Professional/ Pearson, Second Edition, 2009.
4. UNIX Systems Programming: Communication, Concurrency, and Threads,
Kay A. Robbins, Steven Robbins, Prentice Hall PTR, 2009.

***

104
Course Code : 11CN508
Course Title : Network Routing
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
NETWORK AND NETWORK ROUTING: AN INTRODUCTION: Addressing and internet
service: An Overview, Network Routing: An Overview, IP Addressing, On Architectures, Service
Architecture, Protocol Stack Architecture, Router Architecture, Network Topology Architecture,
Network Management Architecture, Public Switched Telephone Network, Communication
Technologies, Standards Committees, Last Two Bits.

ROUTING ALGORITHMS: SHORTEST PATH WIDEST PATH: Background, Bellman-

Ford Algorithm and Distance Vector Approach, Dijkstra’s Algorithm, Comparison of the Bellman-
Ford Algorithm and Dijkstra’s Algorithm, Shortest Path Computation with Candidate Path
Caching, Widest Path Computation with Candidate Path Caching, Widest Path Algorithm, K-
Shortest Paths Algorithm.

ROUTING PROTOCOLS: FRAME WORK AND PRINCIPLES: Routing Protocol, Routing

Algorithm And Routing Table, Routing Information Representation and Protocol Messages,
Distance Vector Routing Protocol, Link State Routing Protocol, Path Vector Routing Protocol,
Link Cost.

NETWORK FLOW MODELING: Terminologies, Single-Commodity Network Flow, Multi

Commodity Network Flow: Three-Node Example, Multi Commodity Network Flow Problem:
General Formulation, Multi Commodity Network Flow Problem: Non-Splittable Flow.

UNIT II
IP ROUTING AND DISTANCE VECTOR PROTOCOL FAMILY: Routers, Networks and
Routing Information: Some Basics, Static Routes, Routing Information Protocol Version 1(RIP
v1), Routing Information Protocol Version 2 (RIP v2), Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing
Protocol (EIGRP), Route Redistribution.

OSPF AND INTEGRATED IS-IS: From a Protocol Family To Instance of a Protocol, OSPF
Packet Format, Examples of Router LSAs and Network LSAs, Integrated IS-IS, Similarities and
Differences Between IS-IS and OSPF.

IP TRAFFIC ENGINEERING: Traffic, stochasticity, Delay and Utilization, Applications View,

Traffic Engineering: An Architectural Framework, Traffic Engineering: A Four-Node Illustration,
Link weight Determination Problem: Preliminary Discussion, Duality of the MNCF Problem,
Illustration Of Link Weight Determination Through Duality, Link Weight Determination: Large
Networks.

UNIT III
BGP: BGP:A brief Overview, BGP: Basic Terminology, BGP Operations, BGP Configuration
Initialization, Two Faces of BGP: External BGP and Internal BGP, Path Attributes, BGP Decision
Process, Internal BGP Scalability, Route Flap Dampening, BGP Additional Features, Finite State
Machine of a BGP Connection, Protocol Message Format.
INTERNET ROUTING ARCHITECTURES: Internet Routing Evolution, Addressing and
Routing: Illustrations, Current Architectural View of the Internet, Allocation of IP Prefixes and AS

105
Number, Policy-Based Routing, Point Of Presence, Traffic Engineering Implications, Internet
Routing Instabilities.

ROUTER ARCHITECTURES: Functions of a Router, Types of Routers, Elements of a Router,

Packet Processing: Fast Path Vs Slow Path, Router Architectures.

UNIT IV
IP ADDRESS LOOKUP ALGORITHMS: Impact of addressing on lookup, Longest Prefix
Matching, Naïve Algorithms, Binary Trees, Multibit Trees, Compressing Multibit Trees, Search by
Length Algorithms, Search by Value Approaches, Hardware Algorithms, Comparing Different
Approaches.

IP PACKET FILTERING AND CLASSIFICATION: Importance of Packet Classification,

Packet Classification Algorithms, Naïve Solutions, Two-dimensional Solutions, Approaches for d
dimensions, Extending Two-Dimensional Solutions, Divide and Conquer Approaches, Tuple
Space Approaches, Decision Tree Approaches, Hardware-Based Solutions.

UNIT V
QUALITY OF SERVICE ROUTING: Background, QOS Attributes, Adapting Shortest Path and
Widest Path Routing: A Basic Framework, Update Frequency, Information Inaccuracy and Impact
on Routing, Lessons from dynamic call Routing in the Telephone Network, Heterogeneous
Service, Single-Link Case, A General Framework for Source-based QOS Routing with Path
Caching, Routing Protocols for QOS Routing.

MPLS AND GMPLS: Background, Traffic Engineering Extension to Routing Protocols,

Multiprotocol Label Switching, Generalized MPLS, MPLS Virtual Private Networks.

ROUTING AND TRAFFIC ENGINEERING WITH MPLS: Traffic Engineering of IP/MPLS

Networks, VPN Traffic Engineering, Routing/Traffic Engineering for Voice Over MPLS.

VOIP ROUTING: INTEROPERABILITY THROUGH IP AND PSTN: Background, PSTN

Call Routing Using the Internet, PSTN Call Routing: Managed IP Approach, IP –PSTN
Interworking for VOIP, IP Multimedia Subsystem, Multiple Heterogeneous Providers
Environment, All-IP Environment for VOIP Services, Addressing Revisited.

Text Books:
1. Network Routing Algorithms, Protocols, and Architectures Deepankar Medhi,
Karthikeyan Ramasamy 2007 by Elsevier Inc.

References Books:

1. Nader F.Mir, ”Computer and Communication Networks”, PHI.

2. Kurose & Ross, “Computer Networks” – A Top-down approach featuring the Internet”,
Pearson Education – Alberto Leon – Garciak.
3. Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, 4th Edition, (Pearson Education / PHI).

***

106
Course Code : 11 CN 509
Course Title : Secure Systems Development with UML
Course Structure : 3-1-2
SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
UML OVERVIEW: Use case diagram, Sequence diagram, Collaboration diagram, Class diagram,
State Chart diagram, Activity diagram, Component diagram, Deployment diagram, Package
Diagram.

UNIT-II
INTRODUCTION: Overview,outline,how to use this book.

WALK THROUGH USING UML FOR SECURITY: security requirements capture with use
case diagrams,secure business processes with activity diagrams,physical security using deployment
diagrams, security-critical Interaction with sequence diagrams.

BACKGROUND: Security Engineering,UML,Analyzing UML Models.

MODEL-BASED SECURITY ENGINEERING WITH UML: UML Security profile,Design

principles for secure systems,Applying security patterns.

UNIT-III
APPLICATIONS: Secure channels,A variant of the IP TLS,Common Electronic Purse
Specifications,Developing Secure Java Programs,Further Applications.

UNIT-IV
TOOL SUPPORT FOR UML SECURITY: Extending UML CASE Tools with analysis
tools,Automated Tools for UML Security,Linking Models to Run time data ,Linking models to
code.

A FORMAL FOUNDATION: UML Machines,UML Machine systems, Refinement,Rely-

Guarantee Specifications,Reasoning about security properties.

UNIT-V
FORMAL SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT WITH UML: Formal Semantics for a Fragment of
UML,Development with UML.

FURTHER MATERIAL: More on the UML security approach,Other approaches to security

Engineering.

Text Books:
1. Secure Systems Development with UML .JAN, JURJENS. SPRINGER 2004.
2. Object Oriented systems development .Ali Bahrami.
Reference Books:
1. R.Heldal and F.Hultin,Bridging model based and language based security.
2. R.Anderson. Security Engineering,A Guide to building dependable distributed
systems , john willey & Sons ,Newyork 2001.
***

107
Course Code : 11CNE32
Course Title : Network Management
Course Structure :3–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW: Analogy of
Telephone Network Management, Communications protocols and Standards, Case Histories of
Networking and Management, Challenges of Information Technology Managers, Network
Management: Goals, Organization, and Functions, Network and System Management, Network
Management System Platform, Current Status and future of Network Management.
UNIT-II
SNMPV1 NETWORK MANAGEMENT: Organization and Information and Information
Models.
MANAGED NETWORK: Case Histories and Examples, The History of SNMP Management,
The SNMP Model, The Organization Model, System Overview, The Information Model.

SNMPV1 NETWORK MANAGEMENT: Communication and Functional Models. The SNMP

Communication Model, Functional model.

UNIT–III
SNMP MANAGEMENT SNMPV2: Major Changes in SNMPv2, SNMPv2 System Architecture,
SNMPv2 Structure of Management Information, The SNMPv2 Management Information Base,
SNMPv2 Protocol, Compatibility with SNMPv1.

SNMP MANAGEMENT: RMON: What is Remote Monitoring? , RMON SMI and MIB,
RMON1, RMON2, ATM Remote Monitoring, A Case Study of Internet Traffic Using RMON

UNIT–IV
TELECOMMUNICATIONS MANAGEMENT NETWORK: Why TMN? , Operations
Systems, TMN Conceptual Model, TMN Standards, TMN Architecture, TMN Management
Service Architecture, An Integrated View of TMN, implementation Issues.
NETWORK MANAGEMENT TOOLS AND SYSTEMS: Network Management Tools,
Network Statistics Measurement Systems, History of Enterprise Management, Network
Management systems, Commercial Network management Systems, System Management, and
Enterprise Management Solutions.

UNIT–V
WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT: NMS with Web Interface and Web-Based Management, Web
Interface to SNMP Management, Embedded Web-Based Management, Desktop management
Interface, Web-Based Enterprise Management, WBEM: Windows Management Instrumentation,
Java management Extensions, Management of a Storage Area Network: , Future Directions.
Text Books:
1. Network Management, Principles and Practice, Mani Subramanian, Pearson Education.
Reference Books:
1. Network management, Morris, Pearson Education.
2. Principles of Network System Administration, Mark Burges, Wiley Dreamtech.

***
108
Course Code : 11CNE41
Course Title : Mobile Computing
Course Structure :3–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT – I
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS: AN OVERVIEW: Mobile communication, Mobile
computing, Mobile computing architecture, Mobile Devices, Mobile system Networks, Data
dissemination, Mobility management.

MOBILE DEVICES AND SYSTEMS: Mobile phones, Digital music players, Handheld pocket
computers, Handheld devices, Smart systems, Limitations of mobile devices, Automotive systems.

UNIT–II
GSM AND SIMILAR ARCHITECTURES: GSM – Services and system architecture, Radio
interfaces, Protocols, Localization, Calling, Handover, Security, New data services, General packet
radio service, High speed circuit switched data, DECT.

WIRELESS MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL AND CDMA-BASED COMMUNICATION:

Medium access control, Introduction to CDMA- based systems, Spread spectrum in CDMA
systems, Coding methods in CDMA, IMT-2000, i-mode, OFDM.

UNIT-III
MOBILE IP NETWORK LAYER: IP and mobile IP network layers, Packet delivery and
handover Management, Location management, Registration, Tunneling and encapsulation, Route
optimization,Dynamichostconfigurationprotocol.

MOBILE TRANSPORT LAYER: Conventional TCP/ IP transport layer protocol, Indirect TCP,
Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Other Methods of TCP-layer transmission for mobile networks,
TCPover2.5G/3Gmobilenetworks.

DATABASES: Database hoarding techniques, Data caching, Client-Server computing and

Adaptation, Transactional models, Query processing, Data recovery process, Issues relating to
Quality of service.

UNIT-IV
DATA DISSEMINATION AND BROADCASTING SYSTEMS: Communication asymmetry,
Classification of data-delivery mechanisms, Data dissemination broadcast models, Selective tuning
and indexing techniques, Digital audio broadcast models, Selective tuning and indexing
techniques, Digital audio broadcasting, Digital video broadcasting.

DATA SYNCHRONIZATION IN MOBILE COMPUTING SYSTEMS: Synchronization,

Synchronization software for model devices, Synchronization protocols, SyncML-Synchronization
language for mobile computing, Sync4J, Synchronized multimedia markuplanguage.

MOBILE DEVICES: SERVER AND MANAGEMENT: Mobile agent, Application server,

Gateways, Protocol, Service discovery, Device management, Mobile file systems, Security.
MOBILE AD-HOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS: Introduction to Mobile Ad-hoc Networks,
MANET, Wireless sensor networks.

109
UNIT–V
WIRELESS LAN, MOBILE INTERNET CONNECTIVITY, AND PERSONAL AREA
NETWORK: Wireless LAN architecture and protocol, WAP 1.1 and WAP 2.0 architecture,
XHTML-MP, Bluetooth-enabled devices network, Layers in Bluetooth protocol, Security in
Bluetooth protocol,IrDA,ZigBee.

MOBILE APPLICATION LANGUAGESXML, JAVA, J2ME, AND JAVACARD:

Introduction , XML, JAVA,Java2microedition,JavaCard.

MOBILE OPERATING SYSTEMS: Operating system, palmOS, Windows CE, Symbian OS,
Linux for mobile devices.

Text Books:
2. Raj Kamal, “Mobile Computing”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2007.

References Books:
3. Jochen H. Schller, “Mobile Communications”, second edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2007.
4. Jon W. Mark, Weihua Zhuang, “Wireless Communications and Networking”, Prentice
Hall, New Delhi, 2007.
***

110
 M. Tech (CRS)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING

111
 MASTER OF TECHNOLGY 2012-13 A.Y
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
COMMUNICATION AND RADAR SYSTEMS

S.NO COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L-T-P CREDITS

SEMESTER1
1 12EC501 MODERN DIGITAL COMMUNICATION 3-1-2 5
2 12EC502 RADIATION SYSTEM 3-1-0 4
3 12EC503 MICROWAVE AND MILLIMETERWAVE CIRCUITS 3-1-2 5
4 12EC520 IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING 3-1-0 4
5 ELECTIVE1 3-0-0 3
6 ELECTIVE2 3-0-0 3
7 KLU C503 SEMINAR 0-0-4 2
26
S.NO COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L-T-P CREDITS
SEMESTER2
1 12EC521 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-1-2 5
2 12EC522 RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-1-0 4
3 12EC504 WIRELESS CELLULAR COMMUNICATION 3-1-0 4
4 12EC566 CMOS RF CIRCUIT DESIGN 3-1-0 4
5 ELECTIVE3 3-0-0 3
6 ELECTIVE4 3-0-0 3
7 KLU C501 TERMPAPER 0-0-4 2
25
S.NO COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L-T-P CREDITS
SEMESTER3&4
1 THESIS 0-0-36 36
TOTAL CREDITS 87

ELECTIVES 1 SEM
1 12EC530 ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
2 12EC559 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
3 12EC223 ARRAY SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
4 12EC526 BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
5 12EC534 OPTICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
6 12EC525 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
7 12EC524 SPEECH PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
8 12EC580 BROAD BAND ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES 3-0-0 3
9 12EC582 OPTICAL NETWORKS 3-0-0 3
3-0-0 3
ELECTIVE 2 SEM 3-0-0 3
1 12EC506 ESTIMATION AND DETECTION THEORY 3-0-0 3
2 12EC583 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 3-0-0 3
3 12EC507 RF SYSTEM DESIGN 3-0-0 3
4 12EC581 HIGH PERFORMANCE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS 3-0-0 3

112
 L T P C
3 1 2 5
COURSE CODE: 12EC501

MODERN DIGITAL COMMUNICATION

Syllabus:
Modern Digital Modulation Techniques:
Introduction, Information Capacity, Bits, Bit Rate, Baud rate & M-ary Encoding, ASK, FSK, PSK
QAM Bandwidth Efficiency Carrier Recovery, Clock Recovery, DPSK, Trellis Code Modulation,
Probability of Error & Bit Error Rate, Error Performance.
Baseband Data Transmission:
Introduction – Baseband Binary PAM Systems – Baseband Pulse Shaping, Optimum Transmitting
and Receiving Filters – Duobinary Baseband PAM System – Use of Controlled ISI in Duobinary
Signaling Schemes, Transmitting and Receiving Filters for Optimum Performance.
M-ary Signaling Schemes
Analysis and Design of M-ary Signaling Schemes, Binary Versus M-ary Signaling Schemes -
Shaping of the Transmitted Signal Spectrum – Effect of Pre coding on the Spectrum, Pulse
Shaping by Digital Methods - Equalization - Transversal Equalizer, Automatic Equalizers

Block and Convolutional Channel Codes: Linear Block Codes - The Generator Matrix and
Parity Check Matrix, Cyclic Codes, Bounds on Minimum Distance of Linear Block Codes, Non
Binary Block Codes – Convolutional Codes – Transfer Function of a Convolutional Code,
Optimum Decoding of Convolutional Code –Distance Properties of Binary Convolutional Codes

Spread Spectrum Signals for Digital Communication: Model of Spread Spectrum Digital
Communication System – Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Signals – Error Rate Performance of
the Decoder, Some Applications of DS Spread Spectrum Signals, Generation of PN Sequences –
Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum Signals – Performance of FH Spread Spectrum Signals in an
AWGN Channel, CDMA System Based on FH Spread Spectrum

Signals Emerging Digital Communication Technologies: The North American Hierarchy,

Digital Services, Broad band Digital Communication: SONET, Digital Switching Technologies,
Broadband Services for Entertainment and Home office Applications, Video Compression, High
Definition Television(HDTV)

Text Books
1. Advanced Electronic Communications Systems, by Wayne Tomasi, 6 Edition Pearson
Education.
2. K Sam Shanmugam, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, John Wiley and sons (Asia)
Pvt Ltd.

References
1. Simon Haykin, Digital communications, John Wiley and sons, 1998
2. Wayne Tomasi, Advanced electronic communication systems, 4th Edition Pearson Education
Asia, 1998
3. B.P.Lathi Modern digital and analog communication systems, 3rd Edition, Oxford University
press
4. Ravindranathan” Communication Systems Modeling Using Matlab & Simulink” Universities
Press

113
COURSE CODE: 12EC502 L T P C
3 1 0 4
RADIATION SYSTEMS
Syllabus

Basics Concepts of Radiation

Radiation from surface current and current line current distribution, Basic antenna parameters,
Radiation mechanism-Current distribution of Antennas, Impedance concept-Balanced to
Unbalanced transformer

Radiation from Apertures

Field equivalence principle, Rectangular and circular apertures, Uniform distribution on an infinite
ground plane, Aperture fields of Horn antenna-Babinets principle, Geometrical theory of
diffraction, Reflector antennas, and Design considerations - Slot antennas

Synthesis of Array Antennas

Types of linear arrays, current distribution in linear arrays, Phased arrays, Optimization of Array
patterns, Continuous aperture sources, Antenna synthesis techniques

Micro Strip Antennas

Radiation mechanisms, Feeding structure, Rectangular patch, Circular patch, Ring antenna. Input
impedance of patch antenna, Microstrip dipole, Microstrip arrays

EMI/EMC/Antenna Measurements:
Log periodic, Bi-conical, Log spiral ridge Guide, Multi turn loop, Traveling Wave antenna,
Antenna measurement and instrumentation, Amplitude and Phase measurement, Gain, Directivity,
Impedance and polarization measurement, Antenna range, Design and Evaluation

Text Books
1. Kraus.J.D.,"Antennas"II Edition, John wiley and Sons.
2. Balanis.A, "Antenna Theory Analysis and Design", John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1982

References
1. RF System Design, Peter Kinget Bell Laboratories, Lucent Technologies Murray Hill,
2. Practical RF system design, Wiley-IEEE, 2003 - Technology & Engineering

114
COURSE CODE: 12EC503 L T P C
3 1 2 5
MICROWAVE AND MILLIMETER WAVE CIRCUITS

Syllabus

Analysis of Microwave Circuits: Introduction, Microwave Components – E-plane Tee, H-plane

Tee, Magic Tee, Directional Coupler, Isolator, Circulator & their Scattering

Transformers & Resonators: Parameters, Impedance Transformers – Quarter wave

Transformers, Microwave Resonators – Rectangular and Cylindrical Resonators.

Filters And Periodic Structures: Design of Narrow Band Low Pass, Band Pass and High Pass
Filters, Maximally flat and Chebyshev Designs, Introduction to Periodic Structures, Floquet’s
Theorem, Circuit Theory Analysis of Infinite and Terminated Structures

Obstacles In Wave Guides: Introduction, Posts in Waveguides, Diaphragms in Waveguides,

Waveguide Junctions, Waveguide Feeds, Excitation of Apertures

Millimeter Wave Circuits: Wave Propagation in microstriplines, Discontinues in Microstrips,

Parallel Coupled lines, Power Dividers and Directional Couplers, Microwave and Millimeter Wave
Integrated Circuits

Text Books
1.Roger F. Harrington, “Time-Harmonic Electromagnetic Fields”, Mc graw-hill
2.Robert E Collin, “Foundation For Microwave Engineering”, Mc Graw-Hill.

Reference Books
1.Analysis Methods for RF, Microwave, and Millimeter-Wave Planar Transmission Line
Structures by Cam Nguyun

115
COURSE CODE: 12EC520

IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING

Syllabus

Fundamentals of Image processing and Image Transforms: Basic steps of Image processing
system sampling and quantization of an Image – Basic relationship between pixels Image
Transforms: 2 – D Discrete Fourier Transform, Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT), Discrete
Wavelet transforms

Image Processing Techniques: Image Enhancement: Spatial Domain methods: Histogram

Processing, Fundamentals of Spatial Filtering, Smoothing Spatial filters, Sharpening Spatial filters
Frequency Domain methods: Basics of filtering in frequency domain, image smoothing, image
sharpening, selective filtering Image Segmentation: Segmentation concepts, point, line and Edge
detection, Thresholding, region based segmentation

Image Compression Image compression fundamentals – coding Redundancy, spatial and

temporal redundancy. Compression models : Lossy and Lossless, Huffmann coding, Arithmetic
coding, LZW coding, run length coding, Bit Plane coding, transform coding, predictive coding ,
wavelet coding, JPEG standards

Basic Steps of Video Processing: Analog video, Digital Video, Time varying Image Formation
models : 3D motion models, Geometric Image formation , Photometric Image formation, sampling
of video signals, filtering operations

2-D Motion Estimation: Optical flow, general methodologies, pixel based motion estimation,
Block matching algorithm, Mesh based motion Estimation, global Motion Estimation, Region
based motion estimation, multi resolution motion estimation. Waveform based coding, Block
based transform coding, predictive coding, Application of motion estimation in video coding.

Text Books
1. Gonzaleze and Woods ,”Digital Image Processing “, 3rd edition , Pearson
2. Yao wang, Joem Ostarmann and Ya – quin Zhang, ”Video processing and communication “,1st
edition , PHI
Reference Text Book
1. M. Tekalp ,”Digital video Processing”, Prentice Hall International

Simulation Text Books

1. Relf, Christopher G.,"Image acquisition and processing with LabVIEW", CRC press
2. Aner ozdemi R, "Inverse Synthetic Aperture Radar Imaging with MATLAB Algorithms", John
Wiley & Sons
3. Chris Solomon, Toby Breckon ,"Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing A Practical
Approach with Examples in Matlab", John Wiley & Sons

116
 L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE CODE: 12EC530

ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING

Syllabus

Complex-Valued Adaptive Signal Processing: Optimization in the Complex Domain, Widely

Linear Adaptive Filtering, Nonlinear Adaptive Filtering with Multilayer Perceptrons, Complex
Independent Component Analysis

Robust Estimation Techniques for Complex-Valued Random Vectors: Statistical

Characterization of Complex Random Vectors, Complex Elliptically Symmetric (CES)
Distributions, Tools to Compare Estimators, Scatter and Pseudo-Scatter Matrices Array Processing
Examples, MVDR Beamformers Based on M-Estimators

Turbo Equalization: Communication Chain, Turbo Decoder: Overview, Forward-Backward

Algorithm, Simplified Algorithm: Interference Canceler, Capacity Analysis, Blind Turbo
Equalization, Convergence, Multichannel and Multiuser Settings

Subspace Tracking for Signal Processing: Linear Algebra Review, Observation Model and
Problem Statement, Preliminary Example: Oja’s Neuron, Subspace Tracking,, Eigenvectors
Tracking, Convergence and Performance Analysis Issues

Particle Filtering: The Basic Idea, The Choice of Proposal Distribution and Resampling, Some
Particle Filtering Methods, Handling Constant Parameters, Rao–Blackwellization, Prediction,
Smoothing,
Text Books
1. Tu¨lay Adalı ,Simon Haykin,” Adaptive Signal Processing”, John Wiley & Sons

117
 L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE CODE: 12EC559

VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING

Syllabus

Introduction to DSP Systems: Introduction, representation of DSP algorithms: Block Diagram,

signal flow graph, data flow graph, dependence graph.

Iteration Bound: Data flow graph representations, loop bound and iteration bound, longest path
matrix algorithm, iteration bound of Multirate data flow graphs.

Pipelining and Parallel Processing: Pipelining and parallel processing of FIR digital filters,
pipeline interleaving in digital filters: signal and multichannel interleaving.

Retiming, Unfolding and Folding: retiming techniques; algorithm for unfolding, Folding
transformation, systolic architecture design, systolic array design methodogy.

Fast Convolution, Filters and Transforms: Cook-toom algorithm, modified cook-toom

algorithm, winogard algorithm, iterated convolution Algorithm strength reduction in filters and
transforms.

Text Book
1.Keshab k. Parhi,” VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems: Design and Implementation”, Wiley,
inter science.

Reference Books
1.S.Y.kung, H.J.White house, T. Kailath,” VLSI and Modern Signal Processing”, Prentice hall

118
 L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE CODE: 12EC523

ARRAY SIGNAL PROCESSING

Syllabus

Spatial Signals, Signals in space and time. Spatial frequency, Direction vs. frequency. Wave
fields. Far field and near field signals.

Sensor Arrays, Spatial sampling, Nyquist criterion. Sensor arrays. Uniform linear arrays, planar
and random arrays. Array transfer (steering) vector. Array steering vector for ULA. Broadband
arrays.

Spatial Frequency, Aliasing in spatial frequency domain. Spatial Frequency Transform, Spatial
spectrum. Spatial Domain Filtering. Beam Forming. Spatially white signal.

Direction of Arrival Estimation, Non parametric methods - Beam forming and Capon methods.
Resolution of Beam forming method. Subspace methods - MUSIC, Minimum Norm and ESPRIT
techniques. Spatial Smoothing.

Text Books
1. Dan E. Dugeon and Don H. Johnson.,” Array Signal Processing: Concepts and Techniques.
Prentice Hall.
2. Petre Stoica and Randolph L. Moses. “Spectral Analysis of Signals. Prentice Hall.

119
 L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE CODE: 12EC526

BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Syllabus

Introduction To Biomedical Signals - Examples of Biomedical signals - ECG, EEG, EMG etc -
Tasks in Biomedical Signal Processing - Computer Aided Diagnosis. Origin of bio potentials -
Review of linear systems - Fourier Transform and Time Frequency Analysis (Wavelet) of
biomedical signals- Processing of Random & Stochastic signals – spectral estimation – Properties
and effects of noise in biomedical instruments - Filtering in biomedical instruments

Concurrent, Coupled and Correlated Processes - illustration with case studies – Adaptive and
optimal filtering - Modelling of Biomedical signals - Detection of biomedical signals in noise -
removal of artifacts of one signal embedded in another -Maternal-Fetal ECG - Muscle-contraction
interference. Event detection - case studies with ECG & EEG - Independent component Analysis -
Cocktail party problem applied to EEG signals - Classification of biomedical signals.

Cardio Vascular Applications : Basic ECG - Electrical Activity of the heart- ECG data
acquisition – ECG parameters & their estimation - Use of multiscale analysis for ECG parameters
estimation - Noise & Artifacts- ECG Signal Processing: Baseline Wandering, Power line
interference, Muscle noise filtering – QRS detection - Arrhythmia analysis

Data Compression: Lossless & Lossy- Heart Rate Variability – Time Domain measures - Heart
Rhythm representation - Spectral analysis of heart rate variability - interaction with other
physiological signals.

Neurological Applications: The electroencephalogram - EEG rhythms & waveform -

categorization of EEG activity - recording techniques - EEG applications- Epilepsy, sleep
disorders, brain computer interface. Modelling EEG- linear, stochastic models – Non linear
modelling of EEG - artifacts in EEG & their characteristics and processing – Model based spectral
analysis - EEG segmentation - Joint Time-Frequency analysis – correlation analysis of EEG
channels - coherence analysis of EEG channels.

Text Books
1. D.C.Reddy, “Biomedical Signal Processing: Principles and techniques” ,Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 2005
2. Willis J Tompkins , Biomedical Signal Processing -, ED, Prentice – Hall, 1993

References Books
1. R. Rangayan, “Biomedical Signal Analysis”, Wiley 2002.
2. Bruce, “Biomedical Signal Processing & Signal Modelling,” Wiley, 2001
3. Sörnmo, “Bioelectrical Signal Processing in Cardiac & Neurological Applications”, Elsevier
4. Semmlow, “Bio-signal and Biomedical Image Processing”, Marcel Dekker
5. Enderle, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering,” 2/e, Elsevier, 2005

120
 L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE CODE: 12EC534

OPTICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Syllabus

Basics of signal processing and optics, Characterization of a General signal, examples of signals,
Spatial signal. Basic laws of geometrical optics, Refractions by mirrors, the lens formulas, General
Imaging conditions, the optical invariant, Optical Aberrations.

Physical Optics, The Fresnel Transforms, the Fourier transform, Examples of Fourier transforms,
the inverse Fourier transform, Extended Fourier transform analysis, Maximum information
capacity and optimum packing density, System coherence.

Spectrum Analysis and Spatial Filtering, Light sources, spatial light modulators, and the
detection process in Fourier domain, System performance parameters, and Dynamic range. Some
fundamentals of signal processing, Spatial Filters

Binary Spatial Filters, Magnitude Spatial Filters, Phase Spatial Filters, Real valued Spatial
Filters, Interferometric techniques for constructing Spatial Filters. Optical signal processor and
filter generator, Applications for optical signal processing.

Acousto-optic cell spatial light modulators, Applications of acousto-optic devices. Basic

Acousto-optic power spectrum analyser. Heterodyne systems: Interference between two waves, the
optical Radio.

Text Books
1. Anthony Vanderlugt ,”Optical signal processing” ,Wiley-Interscience
2. Hiroshi Ishikawa ,”Ultrafast All-Optical Signal Processing Devices”,Wiley

References
1. D. Casasent, “Optical data processing-Applications”, Springer-Verlag, Berlin,
2. H.J. Caulfield, “Handbook of holography”, Academic Press New York 1979
3. P.M. Dufffieux, “The Fourier Transform and its applications to Optics”, John Wiley and sons
4. J. Horner ,”Optical Signal Processing “,Academic Press 1988
5. Joseph W. Goodman,” Introduction to Fourier Optics”, second edition Mc Graw Hill.
6. Francis T. S. Yu, Suganda Jutamulia, ”Optical Signal Processing, Computing, and Neural
Networks”, Krieger Publishing Company; 2nd edition

121
 L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE CODE: 12EC525

WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SIGNAL PROCESSING

Syllabus

Linear Diversity Techniques for Fading Channels System and Fading Channels Models:
Transmission with out Diversity, Spectral Diversity, Temporal Diversity, spatial Diversity,
Diversity methods for multiuser system

Adaptive Interference Suppression: Multiple Access Signal Model, Elements of multiuser

detection, Linear interference suppression, Application to DS-CDMA, Adaptive algorithms

Equalization of Multiuser Channels: Characterization of wireless channels, equalization of

known multipath fading, Blind equalization in multipath slowly time varying channel

Blind Space Time Signal Processing : The wireless propagation environment, signal model and
structure, channel identification & equalization, Blind techniques

Network Capacity, Power control & effective Bandwidth: Basic spread spectrum model & the
MMSE Receiver, performance under random spreading sequences, Capacity and performance
under power control, Multiple classes, maximum power constraints, effective Bandwidth

Text Book
1. H V Poor & G W Wornell, ”Wireless Communication Signal Processing Perspectives”,
PHI

122
 L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE CODE: 12EC524

SPEECH PROCESSING

Syllabus

Basic Concepts: Speech Fundamentals: Articulatory Phonetics – Production and Classification of

Speech Sounds; Acoustic Phonetics – acoustics of speech production; Review of Digital Signal
Processing concepts; Short-Time Fourier Transform, Filter-Bank and LPC Methods.

Speech Analysis: Features, Feature Extraction and Pattern Comparison Techniques: Speech
distortion measures – mathematical and perceptual – Log Spectral Distance, Cepstral Distances,
Weighted Cepstral Distances and Filtering, Likelihood Distortions, Spectral Distortion using a
Warped Frequency Scale, LPC, PLP and MFCC Coefficients, Time Alignment and Normalization
– Dynamic Time Warping, Multiple Time – Alignment Paths.

Speech Modeling: Hidden Markov Models: Markov Processes, HMMs – Evaluation, Optimal
State Sequence – Viterbi Search, Baum-Welch Parameter Re-estimation, Implementation issues.

Speech Recognition: Large Vocabulary Continuous Speech Recognition: Architecture of a large

vocabulary continuous speech recognition system – acoustics and language models – n-grams,
context dependent sub-word units; Applications and present status.

Speech Synthesis: Text-to-Speech Synthesis: Concatenative and waveform synthesis methods,

sub-word units for TTS, intelligibility and naturalness – role of prosody, Applications and present
status.

Text Books
1.Lawrence Rabinerand Biing-Hwang Juang, “Fundamentals of Speech Recognition”, Pearson
Education, 2003.
2.Daniel Jurafsky and James H Martin, “Speech and Language Processing – An Introduction to
Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics, and Speech Recognition”, Pearson
Education.

References
1.Steven W. Smith, “The Scientist and Engineer’s Guide to Digital Signal Processing”, California
Technical Publishing.
2.Thomas F Quatieri, “Discrete-Time Speech Signal Processing – Principles and Practice”,
Pearson Education.
3.Claudio Becchetti and Lucio Prina Ricotti, “Speech Recognition”, John Wiley and Sons, 1999.
4.Ben gold and Nelson Morgan, “Speech and audio signal processing”, processing and perception
of speech and music, Wiley- India Edition, 2006 Edition.
5.Frederick Jelinek, “Statistical Methods of Speech Recognition”, MIT Press.

123
 L T P C
3 0 0 3

COURSE CODE: 12EC580

BROAD BAND ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES

Syllabus

Review Of Access Technologies: Phone-Line modem, cable-access, ISDN, Emerging Broad band
Technologies, Cable DSL, Fiber and Wireless

Digital Subscriber Lines: Asymmetric Digital subscriber lines (ADSL) – Rate Adaptive
subscriber line (RADSL)-ISDN Digital subscriber line (IDSL) - High bit rate DSL (HDSL)-Single
line DSL (SDSL)- very high bit rate DSL (VDSL)- Standards for XDSL & Comparison.

Cable Modem: Cable Modem, DOCSIS – Physical Cabling, Dual Modem Operation, Hub
Restriction, Upstream Operation – Downstream operation – Access control – framing Security sub
layer – Data link layer – LLC & Higher layers – ATM centric VS IP – centric cable modem.

Fiber Access Technologies: Optical Fiber in access networks, Architecture and Technologies-
Hybrid fiber – Coax (HFC) system, Switched Digital Video (SDV) – Passive optical networks
(PON) – FTTX (FTTH, FTTB, FTTC, FTT cab) comparison.

Broad Band Wireless: Fixed Wireless, Direct Broadcast Satellite (DBS), Multi channel multi
point distribution services (MMDS), Local multi point distribution services (LMDS), and
Wideband integrated Digital Interactive Services (WIDIS), Mobile Wireless 3G – IMT 2000.

Text Books
1.Niel Ransom and Albert A. Azzam, “Broadband Access Technologies: ADSL, VDSL Cable
Modem, Fiber and LMDS, McGraw Hill 1999.
2.Gilbert Held, “Next Generation Modems: A Professional Guide to DSL and cable modems”,
John Wiley & sons.

Reference Books
1.Walter j Woralski, “ADSL and DSL Technologies”, McGraw Hill computer Communication
series, 1998.
2.William Webb, “Introduction to Wireless Local Loop broadband and narrow band system”,
Artech House, 2000.
3.Martin P. Clarke, “Wireless Access Network: Fixed Wireless Access and WLL network Design
and operation”, John Wiley & Sons 2000.

124
 L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE CODE: 12EC582

OPTICAL NETWORKS

Syllabus

Optical System Components And Network Design: Optical System Components – Couplers,
Isolators & Circulators, Multiplexers & Filters, Optical Amplifiers, Switches, Wavelength
Converters; Transmission System Engineering – System model, Power penalty - transmitter,
receiver, Optical amplifiers, crosstalk, dispersion; Wavelength stabilization ; Overall design
considerations.

Optical Network Architectures: Introduction to Optical Networks; SONET / SDH, Metropoliton-

Area Networks, Layered Architecture; Broadcast and Select Networks – Topologies, Media-
Access Control Protocols and Testbeds; Wavelength Routing Architecture.

Wavelength Routing Networks: WDM Network Elements; WDM Network Design - Cost
tradeoffs, Virtual Topology Design, Routing and wavelength assignment, Statistical Dimensioning
Models.

Packet Switching And Access Networks: Photonic Packet Switching – OTDM, Multiplexing and
Demultiplexing, Synchronisation, Header Processing, Buffering, Burst Switching, Testbeds;
Access Networks.

Network Management And Survivability: Control and Management – Network management

functions, Configuration management, Performance management, Fault management, Optical
safety, Service interface; network Survivability- Protection in SONET / SDH and IP Networks,
Optical layer Protection, Interworking between layers.

Text Books
1.Rajiv Ramaswami and Kumar N. Sivarajan, “Optical Networks : A Practical Perspective”,
Harcourt Asia Pte Ltd., Second Edition 2006.

References Books
1.C. Siva Ram Moorthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks : Concept, Design and
Algorithms”, Prentice Hall of India, Ist Edition, 2002.
2.P.E. Green, Jr., “Fiber Optic Networks”, Prentice Hall, NJ, 1993.
3.Biswanath Mukherjee, “Optical WDM Networks”, Springer, 2006.

125
 L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE CODE: 12EC504
WIRELESS CELLULAR COMMUNICATION

Syllabus

Introduction to Cellular Mobile Systems: Cellular Mobile Telephone Systems, A Basic Cellular
System, Operation of Cellular Systems.

Elements of Cellular Mobile Radio System Design: General Description of the problem,
Concept of Frequency reuse channels, Co-Channel Interference Reduction Factor, Handoff
Mechanism, Cell Splitting.

Speech Coding for Wireless Systems Applications: Introduction to Digital Signal Processing
(DSP) Techniques in Wireless Telephone and Broadcast Systems, Speech Coding Techniques for
Audio and Voice – Pulse Code Modulation, DPCM, Delta Modulation, Vocoder and Linear
Predictive Coding, Performance Comparison of Speech Processing Techniques.

Radio Propagation and Cellular Engineering Concepts: Fundamental Radio Propagation and
System Concepts, Propagation Characteristics, Models of Multipath-faded radio signals – Un
modulated Carrier, Envelope and Phase faded, Level Crossing rate and fade Duration, Delay
Spread Measurements.

Digital Modulation-Demodulation (Modem) Principles and Architectures: Coherent Modem –

Baseband Modem Equivalence, Coherent and Differentially Coherent Binary Phase Shift Keying
Systems, Synchronization – Carrier Recovery and Symbol Timing Recovery, Differential
Encoding and Decoding Requirement, Quadrature Phase shift Keying – Coincident and offset
Types, Pi/4 DQPSK Modems – Architecture.

Interference In Wireless Digital Communication: Carrier-to-Interference and Carrier-to-Noise

Limited Systems, Cochannel Interference, Adjacent Channel Interference. Externally caused
Cochannel Interference, Definitions and performance of Spectral and Power Efficiency,
Relationship of the Bit-Energy to Noise-Density Ratio and the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio, Power
Efficiency and Bit-Error-Rate performance in an Additive White Gaussian Noise Environment,
Concepts of Diversity Branch and Signal paths; Combining and Switching Methods.

Text Books
1.DR Kamilo Feher Wireless Digital Communications, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi – 1999
2.William Cy Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications, 2nd Edition, MC Graw Hill.

126
 L T P C
3 1 2 5
COURSE CODE: 12EC521

ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Syllabus

Multirate Digital Signal Processing Introduction, Decimation by a Factor D, Interpolation by a

Factor I, Sampling Rate Conversion by a Rational Factor I/D, Filter Design and Implementation
for sampling rate Conversion

Multirate Digital Signal Processing Multistage Implementation of Sampling Rate Conversion,

Applications of Multirate Signal Processing, Sampling Rate Conversion of Bandpass Signals

Linear Prediction And Optimum Linear Filters: Innovations Representation of a Stationary

Random Process, Forward and Backward linear prediction, Solution of the Normal Equations,
Properties of linear prediction-Error Filter, AR Lattice and ARMA Lattice-Ladder Filters.

Power Speciral Estimation: Estimation of Spectra from Finite Duration Observations of a signal,
the Periodogram, Use DFT in power Spectral Estimation, Bartlett, Welch and Blackman, Tukey
methods, Comparison of performance of Non-Parametric Power Spectrum Estimation Methods

Parametric Method Of Power Spectrum Estimation: Parametric Methods for power spectrum
estimation, Relationship between Auto-Correlation and Model Parameters, AR (Auto-Regressive)
Process and Linear Prediction, Yule-Walker, Burg and Unconstructrained Least Squares Methods,
Sequential Estimation, Moving Average(MA) and ARMA Models Minimum Variance Method,
Piscaranko’s Harmonic Decomposition Methods, MUSIC Method.

Text Books
1.Proakis JG and Manolakis DG Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and Application,
PHI.
2.Openheim AV & Schafer RW, Discrete Time Signal Processing PHI.

Simulation Text Books

1.Samuel D Stearns, “Digital Signal Processing with examples in Matlab. “ CRC Press.
2.ES Gopi. “Algorithm collections for Digital Signal Processing Applications using Matlab, “
Springer.
3.Taan S.Elali, “Discrete Systems and Digital Signal Processing with Matlab, “ CRC Press,2005.

127
 L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE CODE: 12EC522

RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING

Syllabus

Angle-of-Arrival Estimation in the Presence of Multipath: The Low-Angle Tracking Radar

Problem, Spectrum Estimation Background, Thomson’s Multi-Taper Method, Test Dataset and a
Comparison of Some Popular Spectrum Estimation Procedures, Multi-taper Spectrum Estimation,
F-Test for the Line Components, Experimental Data Description for a Low-Angle Tracking Radar
Study

Time–Frequency Analysis of Sea Clutter: An Overview of Non-stationary Behaviour and Time–

Frequency Analysis, Theoretical Background on Non-stationary, High-Resolution Multi-taper
Spectrograms

Dynamics of Sea Clutter: Statistical Nature of Sea Clutter: Classical Approach, Is There a Radar
Clutter Attractor, Hybrid AM/FM Model of Sea Clutter, Evidence for Amplitude Modulation,
Frequency Modulation, and More, Modelling Sea Clutter as a Non-stationary Complex
Autoregressive Process

Sea-Clutter Non-stationary: The Influence of Long Waves: Radar and Data Description,
Statistical Data Analyses, Modulation of Long Waves: Hybrid AM/FM Model, Non-stationary AR
Model, Parametric Analysis of Texture Process

Two New Strategies for Target Detection in Sea Clutter: Bayesian Direct Filtering Procedure,
Operational Details, Experimental Results on the Bayesian Direct Filter, Additional Notes on the
Bayesian Direct Filter, Correlation Anomally Detection Strategy

Text Books
1. I. Haykin, Simon S,”Radar Adaptive signal processing”, John Wiley & Sons
2. Mark A Richards, “Fundamentals of Radar signal processing”, M C Graw Hill

128
 L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE CODE: 12EC566

CMOS RF CIRCUIT DESIGN

Syllabus

Introduction to RF Design and Wireless Technology: Design and Applications, Complexity and
Choice of Technology. Basic concepts in RF design: Nonlinearly and Time Variance, Inter symbol
interference, random processes and noise. Sensitivity and dynamic range, conversion of gains and
distortion

RF Modulation: Analog and digital modulation of RF circuits, Comparison of various techniques

for power efficiency, Coherent and non-coherent detection, Mobile RF communication and basics
of Multiple Access techniques. Receiver and Transmitter architectures, Direct conversion and two-
step transmitters

RF Testing: RF testing for heterodyne, Homodyne, Image reject, Direct IF and sub sampled
receivers.

BJT and MOSFET behavior at RF Frequencies: BJT and MOSFET behavior at RF frequencies,
modeling of the transistors and SPICE model, Noise performance and limitations of devices,
integrated parasitic elements at high frequencies and their monolithic implementation

RF Circuits Design: Overview of RF Filter design, Active RF components & modeling, Matching
and Biasing Networks. Basic blocks in RF systems and their VLSI implementation, Low noise
Amplifier design in various technologies, Design of Mixers at GHz frequency range, Various
mixers- working and implementation. Oscillators- Basic topologies VCO and definition of phase
noise, Noise power and trade off. Radio frequency Synthesizers- PLLS, Various RF synthesizer
architectures and frequency dividers, Design issues in integrated RF filters.

Text Books
1. B. Razavi, “RF Microelectronics” PHI 1998
2. R. Jacob Baker, H.W. Li, D.E. Boyce “CMOS Circuit Design, layout and Simulation”, PHI

Reference Books
1. Thomas H. Lee “Design of CMOS RF Integrated Circuits” Cambridge University press 1998.
2. Y.P. Tsividis, “Mixed Analog and Digital Devices and Technology”, TMH 1996

129
 L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC506 3 0 0 3

ESTIMATION AND DETECTION THEORY

Syllabus

Detection Theory: Maximum likelihood decision criterion; Neumann-Pearson criterion;

Probability of error criterion; Bayes risk criterion; minimax criterion; robust detection; Receiver
operating characteristics.

Detection Theory: Vector observations; the general Gaussian problem; Waveform observation in
additive Gaussian noise; the integrating optimum receiver; Matched filter receiver.

Maximum Likelihood Estimation; Bayes cost method Bayes estimation criterion – Mean square
error criterion; Uniform cost function; absolute value cost function; Linear minimum variance -
Least squares method;

Estimation in the presence of Gaussian noise -Linear observation; Non-linear estimation.

Properties of estimators: Bias, Efficiency, Cramer Rao bound asymptotic properties; Sensitivity
and error analysis

Prediction; Kalman filter. Sufficient statistics and statistical estimation of parameters: Concept of
sufficient statistics; Exponential families of distributions; Exponential families and Maximum
likelihood estimation; uniformly minimum variance unbiased estimation.

Text Books
1.Steven M. Kay, Statistical Signal Processing: Vol. 1: Estimation Theory, Vol. 2: Detection
Theory, Prentice Hall Inc., 1998.
2.Harry L. Van Trees, Detection, Estimation and Modulation Theory, Part 1, John Wiley & Sons

References
1.James L. Melsa and David L. Cohn, Decision and Estimation Theory, McGraw Hill, 1978.
2.Dimitri Kazakos, P. Papantoni Kazakos, Detection and Estimation, Computer Science Press,
3.Jerry M. Mendel, Lessons in Estimation Theory for Signal Processing,
Communication and Control, Prentice Hall Inc.
4. Sophocles J. Orfanidis, Optimum Signal Processing 2nd edn., McGraw Hill.
5.Monson H. Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modelling, John Wiley & Sons
6. Scott C. Statistical Signal Processing, June 14, 2004.

130
 L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE CODE: 12EC583
WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS

Syllabus

Characteristics of WSN: Characteristic requirements for WSN - Challenges for WSNs – WSN vs
Adhoc Networks - Sensor node architecture – Commercially available sensor nodes –Imote, IRIS,
Mica Mote, EYES nodes, BTnodes, TelosB, Sunspot -Physical layer and transceiver design
considerations in WSNs, Energy usage profile, Choice of modulation scheme, Dynamic
modulation scaling, Antenna considerations.

Medium Access Control Protocols: Fundamentals of MAC protocols - Low duty cycle protocols
and wakeup concepts - Contention-based protocols - Schedule-based protocols - SMAC - BMAC -
Traffic-adaptive medium access protocol (TRAMA) - The IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocol.

Routing And Data Gathering Protocols Routing Challenges and Design Issues in Wireless
Sensor Networks, Flooding and gossiping – Data centric Routing – SPIN – Directed Diffusion –
Energy aware routing - Gradient-based routing - Rumor Routing – COUGAR – ACQUIRE –
Hierarchical Routing - LEACH, PEGASIS – Location Based Routing – GF, GAF, GEAR, GPSR –
Real Time routing Protocols – TEEN, APTEEN, SPEED, RAP - Data aggregation - data
aggregation operations - Aggregate Queries in Sensor Networks - Aggregation Techniques – TAG,
Tiny DB.

Embedded Operating Systems: Operating Systems for Wireless Sensor Networks – Introduction
- Operating System Design Issues - Examples of Operating Systems – TinyOS – Mate –
MagnetOS – MANTIS - OSPM - EYES OS – SenOS – EMERALDS – PicOS – Introduction to
Tiny OS – NesC – Interfaces and Modules- Configurations and Wiring - Generic Components -
Programming in Tiny OS using NesC, Emulator TOSSIM.

Applications of WSN: WSN Applications - Home Control - Building Automation - Industrial

Automation - Medical Applications - Reconfigurable Sensor Networks - Highway Monitoring -
Military Applications - Civil and Environmental Engineering Applications - Wildfire
Instrumentation - Habitat Monitoring - Nanoscopic Sensor Applications – Case Study: IEEE
802.15.4 LR-WPANs Standard - Target detection and tracking - Contour/edge detection - Field
sampling.

Text Books
1.Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli and Taieb Znati, “ Wireless Sensor Networks Technology,
Protocols, and Applications“, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
2.Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”,
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2005.

Reference Books
1.K. Akkaya and M. Younis, “A survey of routing protocols in wireless sensor networks”, Elsevier
Ad Hoc Network Journal, Vol. 3, no. 3, pp. 325--349
2.Philip Levis, “ TinyOS Programming”
3.Anna Ha´c, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd.

131
 L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC581 3 0 0 3

HIGH PERFORMANCE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

Syllabus

Principles Of Networks networking principles, Network services, High performance networks,

Network elements, network mechanisms, layered architecture Packet Switched Networks
Principles, OSI & TCP/IP models, transmission media, routing algorithms, Congestion control
algorithms, Internetworking, Ethernet(IEEE 802.3), Tokenring (IEEE 802.5),Token bus
(IEEE802.4). FDDI,

Network security(cryptography, symmetric key algorithms, private key algorithms, digital

signatures, authtication protocols) The Internet And TCP/IP Networks & Circuit Switched
Networks Overview of Internet protocols, Internet control protocols, Elements of transport
Protocols, TCP & UDP ,

Performance of TCP/IP networks, SONET, DWDM, Solitons, Optical Networks fiber principles
(elements of optical fiber communication, acceptanceangle, Numerical aperture, modes, fiber
types), optical links(point to point links,attenuation,optical budgeting, dispersion),splices
,connectors optical Lans,non Semiconductors, opticalamplifiers,Erbium doped Fiber mplifiers,
couplers/splitters, optical switches ATM networks Main features of ATM, Addressing ,signaling,
routing, ATM header structure

Text Books
1. Jean Walrand and Pravin variya , “ High performance Communication networks”, 2nd edition,
Harcourt and Morgan Kauffman, London 2000
2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Computer networks”, PHI Private limited, new Delhi

References
1. Gerd Keiser, MC Graw Hill International edition, optical fiber communication , third edition
2. John M Senior, PHI limited, optical fiber communication , third edition
3. Leon Gracia, Widjaja, “Communication Networks”, Tata Mc Graw –Hill, New Delhi, 2000.
4. Behroz a. Forouzan, “Data communication and networking “, Tata MC Graw –Hill, New Delhi
5. Sumit Kasera, Pankaj Sethi, “ ATM Networks”, Tata Mc Graw- Hill, New Delhi , 2000

132
 M. TECH (VLSI)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING

133
 SEMESTER-1
S.No Course Code Course Title L-T-P Credits
1 12EC551 ALGORITHM FOR VLSI AUTOMATION 3-1-0 4
2 12EC552 HDL AND PLD ARCHITECTURES 3-1-2 5
3 12EC553 IC FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY 3-1-0 4
4 12EC520 IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
5 12EC559 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
6 12EC550 MOS CIRCUIT DESIGN 3-1-2 5
7 KLUC503 SEMINAR 0-0-4 2
TOTAL CREDITS 26

SEMESTER-2
SN Subj Code Description L-T-P Credits
1 12EC554 ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL DESIGN 3-1-2 5
2 12EC555 LOW POWER VLSI CIRCUITS 3-0-2 4
3 12EC556 VLSI SYSTEM DESIGN 3-1-0 4
4 12EC557 DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND TESTABLE DESIGN 3-1-0 4
5 12EC562 SYSTEM ON CHIP DESIGN 3-0-0 3
6 12EC566 CMOS R F CIRCUIT DESIGN 3-0-0 3
7 KLUC501 TERM PAPER 0-0-4 2
TOTAL CREDITS 25

SEMESTER-
3&4
S.No Course Code Course Title L-T-P Credits
1 THESIS 0-0-36 36

TOTAL CREDITS 87

134
 MOS CIRCUIT DESIGN

COURSE CODE: 12EC550 L T P C

3 1 2 5
SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION: Classification of CMOS digital circuits and Circuit design, Overview of
VLSI design methodologies, VLSI design flow, Design hierarchy and concepts, VLSI design
styles, Design quality, Packing technology, CAD technology, Fabrication process flow, CMOS n-
well process, layout design rules.

UNIT II
MOS TRANSISTOR AND CIRCUIT MODELING: MOS structure, MOS system under
external bias, structure and operation of MOS transistor, MOSFET current-voltage characteristics,
MOSFET scaling and small-geometry effects, MOSFET capacitances, Modeling of MOS
transistor using SPICE.

UNIT III
MOS INVERTER STATIC CHARACTERISTICS: Introduction, Resistive-Load Inverter,
Inverter with n-type MOSFET load, CMOS Inverter.

UNIT IV
COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS: Introduction, MOS
logic circuits with depletion nMOS loads, CMOS logic Circuits, Complex logic circuits, CMOS
transmission gates (Pass gates), Behavior of bistable elements, SR latch circuit, clocked latch and
flip-flop circuits, CMOS D-latch and Edge-triggered flip-flop.

UNIT V
DYNAMIC LOGIC AND SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORIES: Basic principles of pass
transistor circuits, voltage bootstrapping, synchronous dynamic circuit techniques, Dynamic
CMOS circuit techniques, High-performance dynamic CMOS circuits, DRAM, SRAM,
Nonvolatile memory.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits” TMH 2003.
2. Neil H. E. Weste and David. Harris Ayan Banerjee,, “CMOS VLSI Design” - Pearson
Education, 1999.

REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. Jan M. Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits”
Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Uyemura, “Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems” Wiley-India, 2006.
3. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design ", 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall,1998.
4. Kamran Ehraghian, Dauglas A. Pucknell and Sholeh Eshraghiam, “Essentials of VLSI
Circuits and Systems” – PHI, EEE, 2005 Edition.

***

135
 ALGORITHMS FOR VLSI DESIGN AUTOMATION

COURSE CODE: 12EC551 L T P C

3 1 0 4

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN METHODOLOGIES: Design Automation tools, Algorithmic
Graph Theory, Computational Complexity, Tractable and Intractable Problems.

UNIT II
LAYOUT: Compaction, Placement, Floor planning and Routing Problems, Concepts and
Algorithms.

UNIT III
MODELING: Gate Level Modeling and Simulation, Switch level modeling and simulation, Basic
issues and Terminology, Binary – Decision diagram, Two – Level Logic Synthesis.

UNIT IV
HARDWARE MODELS: Internal representation of the input algorithm, Allocation, Assignment
and Scheduling, Some Scheduling Algorithms, Some aspects of Assignment problem, High – level
Transformations.

FPGA TECHNOLOGIES: Physical Design cycle for FPGA’s partitioning and routing for
segmented and staggered models. MCM technologies, MCM physical design cycle, Partitioning,
Placement – Chip array based and full custom approaches, Routing –Maze routing, Multiple stage
routing, Topologic routing, Integrated Pin – Distribution and routing, routing and programmable
MCM’s.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.H.Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley 1999.
2. Naveed Sherwani, “Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation” 3rd edition,
Springer International Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. Hill & Peterson, “Computer Aided Logical Design with Emphasis on VLSI” Wiley,1993.
2. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design: Systems on silicon” Pearson Education Asia, 2nd
Edition, 1998.
***

136
 HDL AND PLD ARCHITECTURES

L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC552 3 1 2 5

SYLLABUS:

INTRODUCTION TO VERILOG HDL: Basic concepts, Design modeling, Tasks and

functions, Timing and delays, user-defined primitives, PLI, Simulation and Synthesis Tools.

SYNTHESIS OF COMBINATIONAL & SEQUENTIAL LOGIC: Decoders and encoders,

Multiplexers and Demultiplexers, Priority encoder, Priority decoder, Comparators, Adders,
synthesis of three-state devices and bus interfaces. , Latches & Flip-flops, counters, registers,
explicit state machines, , implicit state machines.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES: Full Custom Design, Semicustom Design,

Programmable Logic Devices, Read Only Memory (ROM), Programmable Read Only Memory
(PROM), and Programmable Logic Array (PLA), and Programmable Array Logic (PAL).

CPLDS: Basic Architecture, XC9500 CPLD, GAL, Altera series – Max 5000, Max 7000 Series ,
ALTERA FLEX Logic – 10000 Series CPLDs. AMD’s – CPLD (Mach 1 to 5).

FPGAS: Introduction, Basic Architecture, Design flow, Xilinx XC3000 & XC4000 Architectures,
Actel Architectures, ALTERA’s FLEX 8000, and ALTERA’s FLEX 10000 FPGAs.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Michael D.Celetti “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL” Prentice Hall,
2009.
2. S.Trimberger, Edr., Field Programmable Gate Array Technology, Kluwer Academic
Publications, 1994.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Verilog digital system design RT level synthesis testbench and verification by
Zainalabedin Navabi, 2008 Mc Graw Hill Publishers.
2. Stephen Brown Zvonko Vranesic “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design”
McGraw-Hill, 2008.

SIMULATION BOOKS:
1. Verilog Hdl A Guide To Digital Design And Synthesis, Edition: 2 by Samir Palnitkar.

***

137
 IC FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY
L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC553 3 1 0 4

SYLLABUS:

INTRODUCTION TO IC TECHNOLOGY: Basic fabrication steps and their Importance.

ENVIRONMENT OF IC TECHNOLOGY: Concepts of Clean room and safety requirements,

Concepts of Wafer cleaning processes and wet chemical etching techniques.

IMPURITY INCORPORATION: Solid State diffusion modeling and technology; Ion

Implantation modeling, technology and damage annealing, characterization of Impurity profiles.

OXIDATION: Kinetics of Silicon dioxide growth both for thick, thin and ultra thin films,
Oxidation technologies in VLSI and ULSI, Characterization of oxide films, High k and low k
dielectrics for ULSI.

LITHOGRAPHY: Photolithography, E-beam lithography and newer lithography techniques for

VLSI/ULSI, Mask generation.

CHEMICAL VAPOUR DEPOSITION TECHNIQUES: CVD techniques for deposition of

polysilicon, silicon dioxide, silicon nitride and metal films.

EPITAXIAL GROWTH OF SILICON: modeling and technology.

METAL FILM DEPOSITION: Evaporation and sputtering techniques, Failure mechanisms in

metal interconnects Multi-level metallization schemes.

PLASMA AND RAPID THERMAL PROCESSING: PECVD, Plasma etching and RIE
techniques; RTP techniques for annealing, growth and deposition of various films for use in ULSI.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.M.Sze(2nd Edition )”VLSI Technology”, McGraw Hill Companies Inc,2003.
2. C.Y. Chang and S.M.Sze (Ed), “ULSI Technology”, McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 1996.

REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. Stephena, Campbell, “The Science and Engineering of Microelectronic Fabrication”,
Second Edition, Oxford University Press, 2005.
2. James D.Plummer, Michael D.Deal, ”Silicon VLSI Technology” Pearson Education.

***

138
 IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING

L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC520 3 0 0 3

UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING AND IMAGE TRANSFORMS: Basic steps
of Image processing system sampling and quantization of an Image – Basic relationship between
pixels Image Transforms: 2 – D Discrete Fourier Transform, Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT),
Discrete Wavelet transforms.

UNIT II
IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES: Image Enhancement: Spatial Domain methods:
Histogram Processing, Fundamentals of Spatial Filtering, Smoothing Spatial filters, Sharpening
Spatial filters Frequency Domain methods: Basics of filtering in frequency domain, image
smoothing, image sharpening, selective filtering Image Segmentation: Segmentation concepts,
point, line and Edge detection, Thresholding, region based segmentation.

UNIT III
IMAGE COMPRESSION: Image compression fundamentals – coding Redundancy, spatial and
temporal redundancy. Compression models : Lossy and Lossless, Huffmann coding, Arithmetic
coding, LZW coding, run length coding, Bit Plane coding, transform coding, predictive coding ,
wavelet coding, JPEG standards.

UNIT IV
BASIC STEPS OF VIDEO PROCESSING: Analog video, Digital Video, Time varying Image
Formation models : 3D motion models, Geometric Image formation , Photometric Image
formation, sampling of video signals, filtering operations.

UNIT V
2-D MOTION ESTIMATION: Optical flow, general methodologies, pixel based motion
estimation, Block matching algorithm, Mesh based motion Estimation, global Motion Estimation,
Region based motion estimation, multi resolution motion estimation. Waveform based coding,
Block based transform coding, predictive coding, Application of motion estimation in video
coding.

Text Books:
1. Gonzaleze and Woods ,”Digital Image Processing “, 3rd edition , Pearson.
2. Yao wang, Joem Ostarmann and Ya – quin Zhang, ”Video processing and communication
“,1st edition , PHI.

Reference Books:
1. M. Tekalp ,”Digital video Processing”, Prentice Hall International.

***

139
 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING

L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC559 3 0 0 3

SYLLABUS:

INTRODUCTION TO DSP SYSTEMS: Introduction; representation of DSP algorithms: Block

Diagram, signal flow graph, data flow graph, dependence graph.

ITERATION BOUND: Data flow graph representations, loop bound and iteration bound, longest
path matrix algorithm, iteration bound of Multirate data flow graphs.

PIPELINING AND PARALLEL PROCESSING: Pipelining and parallel processing of FIR

digital filters, pipeline interleaving in digital filters: signal and multichannel interleaving.

RETIMING, UNFOLDING AND FOLDING: retiming techniques; algorithm for unfolding,

Folding transformation, systolic architecture design, systolic array design methodogy.

FAST CONVOLUTION, FILTERS AND TRANSFORMS: Cook-toom algorithm, modified

cook-toom algorithm, winogard algorithm, iterated convolution Algorithm strength reduction in
filters and transforms.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Keshab k. Parhi,” VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems: Design and
Implementation”, Wiley, inter science, 1999.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. S.Y.kung, H.J.White house, T. Kailath,” VLSI and Modern Signal Processing”, Prentice
hall, 1985.
***

140
 ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL DESIGN

L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC554 3 1 2 5

BASIC MOS DEVICE PHYSICS: General considerations of MOS devices, second order effects,
MOS device models.

PASSIVE & ACTIVE CURRENT MIRRORS: Basic current mirrors, Cascode current mirror,
Active Current Mirrors - large signal analysis, small signal analysis, common mode properties.

AMPLIFIERS DESIGN: Single Stage (CS,CG,CD) configurations, Cascade Stage; frequency

response( miller effect) of CG, CS, CD, Types of noise, noise in single stage amplifiers.

DIFFERENTIAL PAIR: Operation, Basic Differential Pair, differential pair with MOS loads,
Frequency response of Cascade & Differential Pair.

OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS: Op-Amp topologies, single stage, Two stage, cascade, Gain
BW product, Slew rate, Stability & frequency compensation, noise in differential and operational
amplifiers.

FEEDBACK: properties of feedback, Feedback topologies and effect of loading.

ANALOG MULTIPLIER AND PLL: Analysis of four quadrant and variable transconductance
multiplier, Voltage Controlled Oscillator, closed loop analysis of PLL.

SWITCHED CAPACITOR: Sampling Switches, Switched capacitor amplifiers, design

techniques for switched capacitor filters.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Behzad Razavi, “Design Of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, Tata Mc Graw
Hill,2005.

REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. Jacob Baker, “CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design”, John Wiley, 2008.
2. Gray & Mayer, Analysis & Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, 4th edition, Wiley,2001.
***

141
 LOW POWER VLSI CIRCUITS

L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC555 3 0 2 4
SYLLABUS:

INTRODUCTION: Need for low power VLSI chips, Sources of power dissipation on Digital
Integrated circuits. Emerging Low power approaches.

DEVICE & TECHNOLOGY IMPACT ON LOW POWER: Dynamic dissipation in CMOS,

Transistor sizing& gate oxide thickness, Impact of technology Scaling, Technology & Device
innovation.

SIMULATION POWER ANALYSIS: SPICE circuit simulators, gate level logic simulation,
capacitive power estimation, static state power, gate level capacitance estimation, architecture
level analysis, data correlation analysis in DSP systems, Monte Carlo simulation.

PROBABILISTIC POWER ANALYSIS: Random logic signals, probability & frequency,

probabilistic power analysis techniques, signal entropy.

LOW POWER CIRCUIT’S: Transistor and gate sizing, network restructuring and
Reorganization. Special Flip Flops & Latches design, high capacitance nodes, low power digital
cells library.

LOGIC LEVEL: Gate reorganization, signal gating, logic encoding, state machine encoding, pre-
computation logic.

LOW POWER ARCHITECTURE & SYSTEMS: Power & performance management,

switching activity reduction, parallel architecture with voltage reduction, flow graph
transformation, low power arithmetic components.

LOW POWER CLOCK DISTRIBUTION: Power dissipation in clock distribution, single driver
Vs distributed buffers, Zero skew Vs tolerable skew, chip & package co design of clock network.

SPECIAL TECHNIQUES: Power Reduction in Clock networks, CMOS Floating Node, Low
Power Bus Delay balancing, and Low Power Techniques for SRAM.

Text Books:
1. Gary K. Yeap, “Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, KAP, 2002.
2. Rabaey, Pedram, “Low Power Design Methodologies” Kluwer Academic.

References Books:
1. Kaushik Roy, Sharat Prasad, “Low-Power CMOS VLSI Circuit Design” Wiley, 2000.
2. Yeo, “CMOS/BiCMOS ULSI Low Voltage Low Power” Pearson Education.

***

142
 VLSI SYSTEM DESIGN

L T P C
COURSE CODE: 12EC556 3 1 0 4

SYLLABUS:

DESIGN METHODOLOGY: Structured design techniques; Programmable logic; Gate array and
sea of gates design; cell based design; full custom design; Design flow; Design Economics.

DATA PATH SUBSYSTEMS: Adders; One/zero Detectors; Comparators; Counters; Shifters;

Multipliers; Power and Speed Trade-off.

MEMORY AND ARRAY SUBSYSTEMS: SRAM, DRAM, ROM, Serial access memories;
CAM, PLAs; Array yield, reliability; Power dissipation in Memories.

SPECIAL-PURPOSE SUBSYSTEMS: Packaging; power distribution; I/O pads.

INTERCONNECT: Interconnect parameters; Electrical wire models, capacitive parasitics;

Resistive parasitics; Inductive parasitic; Crosstalk; Advanced Interconnect Techniques.

TIMING ISSUES: Timing classification; Synchronous design; Self-timed circuit design.

CLOCK SYNTHESIS AND SYNCHRONIZATION: Synchronizers; Arbiters; Clock Synthesis;

PLLs; Clock generation; Clock distribution; Synchronous Vs Asynchronous Design.

Text Books:
1. Neil H. E. Weste, David. Harris and Ayan Banerjee,, “CMOS VLSI Design” - Pearson
Education, Third Edition, 2004.
2. Jan M. Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits”
Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2003.

References Books:
1. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits” TMH, Third
Edition, 2003.
2. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design ", 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall,1998.

Simulation Books:
1. Etienne Sicard, Sonia Delmas Bendhia, “Basics of CMOS Cell Design”, TMH, EEE,
2005.
***

143
 DIGITAL SYSTEM AND TESTABLE DESIGN

COURSE CODE: 12EC557

L T P C
3 1 0 4
UNIT–I
DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Introduction: Importance of Testing, Testing During the VLSI
Lifecycle, Challenges in VLSI Testing, Levels of Abstraction in VLSI Testing, Historical Review
of VLSI Test Technology. Testability Analysis, Design for Testability Basics, Scan Cell Designs,
Scan Architectures, Scan Design Rules, Scan Design Flow Scan Extraction, Scan Verification,
Scan Design Costs, Special-Purpose Scan Designs, RTL Design for Testability.

UNIT–II
LOGIC AND FAULT SIMULATION: Introduction, Simulation Models, Logic Symbols, Logic
Element Evaluation, Timing Models, Logic Simulation, Fault Simulation. Boundary Scan and
Core-Based Testing: Digital Boundary Scan, Boundary Scan for Advanced Networks, Embedded
Core Test Standard.

UNIT–III
TEST GENERATION: Introduction, Random Test Generation, Theoretical Background,
Designing a Stuck-At ATPG for Combinational Circuits, Designing a Sequential ATPG, Un-
testable Fault Identification, Designing a Simulation-Based ATPG, Advanced Simulation-Based
ATPG, Advanced Simulation-Based ATPG, ATPG for Non-Stuck-At Faults.

UNIT–IV
LOGIC BUILT-IN SELF-TEST: Introduction, BIST Design Rules, Test Pattern Generation,
Output Response Analysis, Logic BIST Architectures, BIST Architectures Using Concurrent
Checking Circuits, Fault Coverage Enhancement, BIST Timing Control, A Design Practice: BIST
Rule Checking and Violation Repair ,Logic BIST System Design, RTL BIST Synthesis, Design
Verification and Fault Coverage Enhancement.

UNIT–V
MEMORY DIAGNOSIS AND BUILT-IN SELF-REPAIR: Introduction, Refined Fault Models
and Diagnostic Test Algorithms, BIST with Diagnostic Support, RAM Functional Fault Models
and Test Algorithms, RAM Defect Diagnosis and Failure Analysis, RAM Redundancy Analysis
Algorithms, Memory Built-In Self-Test, Built-In Self-Repair.

Text Books:
1. LAUNG-TERNG WANG,CHENG-WEN WU XIAOQING WEN “VLSI Test
Principles and Architectures” ELSEVIER Publishers, 2006.
2. M.L. Bushnell and V.D. Agrawal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital,
Memory and Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.

Reference Books:
1. M. Abramovici, M.A. Breuer and A.D. Friedman, "Digital Systems and Testable
Design” Jaico Publishing House, 2002.
2. P.K. Lala, "Digital Circuit Testing and Testability", Academic Press, 2002.

***

144
 SYSTEM ON CHIP DEIGN

COURSE CODE: 12EC562

L T P C
3 0 0 3
SYLLABUS:

SYSTEM LEVEL DESIGN: System Level Design – Tool & methodologies for system level
design, System level space & modeling language, SOC block based design & IP assembly,
Performance evaluation methods for multiprocessor SOC design.

POWER MANAGEMENT AND SYNTHESIZING: System level power management,

Processing modeling & design tools, embedded software modeling & design using performance
metrics to select microprocessor for IC deign, Parallelizing High Level Synthesize. Acode
Transformational approach to High Level Synthesize.

MICRO ARCHITECTURE DESIGN AND POWER OPTIMIZATION: Micro architecture

design, Cycle accurate system level modeling, performance evaluation, Micro Architectural power
estimation optimization, Design planning.

SOFTWARE DESIGN VERIFICATION: Logical verification, Design & Verification

languages, Digital simulation, using transactional, level models in an Soc design, Assertion based
verification.

HARDWARE DESIGN VERIFICATION: Hardware acceleration & emulation, Formal

property verification, TEST, DFT, ATPG, Analog & mixed signal test.

Text Books:
1. Louis Scheffer Luciano Lavagno and Grant Martin, “EDA for IC System Verififcation
and Testing”, CRC,2006.

Reference Books:
1. Wayone Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design: SOCDesign”
2. Prakash Rashnikar, Peter Paterson, Lenna Singh” System On A chip Verification
methodlogy & Techniques”, Kluwer Academic Piblishers.
3. Alberto Sangiovanni Vincentelli,” Surviving the SOC Revolution: A Guide to
Platformbased Design “, Kluwer Academic Publishers.

***

145
 CMOS RF CIRCUIT DESIGN

COURSE CODE: 12EC566

L T P C
3 0 0 3
SYLLABUS:
INTRODUCTION TO RF DESIGN AND WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY: Design and
Application, Complexity and choices of Technology. Basic concepts in RF design Non linearly
and Time Variance, Inter symbol interference, random process and noise. Sensitivity and dynamic
range, conservation of gains and distortion.

RF MODULATION: Analog and Digital modulation of RF circuits, Comparison of various

techniques for power efficiency, coherent and non coherent detection, Mobile RF communication
and basics of Multi access techniques. Receiver and Transmitter architectures, direct conversion
and two step transmitters.

RF TESTING: RF testing for heterodyne, Homodyne, Image reject, Direct If and sub sampled
receivers.

BJT AND MOSFET BEHAVIOR AT RF FREQUENCIES: BJT and MOSFET behavior at RF

Frequencies, modeling of the transistors and SPICE model, Noise performance and limitations of
devices, integrated parasitic elements at high frequencies and their monolithic implementation.

RF CIRCUITS DESIGN: Overview of RF Filter design, Active RF components and modeling

Matching and Biasing Networks. Basic blocks in RF systems and their VLSI implementation, Low
noise Amplifier design in various technology , Design of Mixers at GHz frequency range, various
mixers working and implementation. Oscillators Basic topologies VCO and definition of phase
noise, Noise power and trade off. Radio frequency Synthesizers PLLS, Various RF synthesizer
architectures and frequency dividers, Design issues in integrated RF filters.

Text Books:
1. B.Razavi, “ RF Microelectronics” PHI 1998
2. R. Jacob Baker, H.W Li D.E. Boyce “COMS Circuits Design, Layout and Simulation”,
PHI 1998.

Reference Books:
1. Thomas H.Lee “Design of COMS RF Integrated Circuits” Cambridge University press
1998.
2. Y.P. TSIVIDIS, “Mixed Analog and Digital Devices and Technology”, TMH 1996.
***

146
 M. TECH (Embedded Systems)
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS & COMPUTER ENGINEERING

147
 M.Tech Embedded Systems
Course structure for the A.Y. 2012-2014
S No Course Code Semester: - 1 L T P Cr
1 12-EM501 Microcontrollers for Embedded System Design. 3 1 2 5
2 12-EM502 Real Time Concepts for Embedded Systems 3 1 0 4
3 12-EM503 VLSI Technology & Design 3 1 2 5
4 12-EM504 Wireless communications & Networks 3 1 0 4
5 Elective – 1 –GROUP-A 3 0 0 3
6 Elective – 2 –GROUP-B 3 0 0 3
7 Seminar 0 0 4 2
Total Credits 26

S No Course Code Semester: - 2 L T P Cr

1 11-EM601 Advanced Embedded Processor Architectures 3 1 2 5
2 11-EM602 Digital Signal Processors and Architectures 3 1 0 4
3 11-EM603 Hardware Software Co –Design 3 10 0 4
4 11-EM604 Linux System Concepts 3 1 2 5
5 Elective – 3 --GROUP-A 3 0 0 3
6 Elective -4 --GROUP-B 3 0 0 3
7 Term Paper 0 0 4 2
Total Credits 26

S.No. Course Code Second Year Credits

1 Thesis 36
TOTAL CREDITS 88

COURSE CODE GROP-A

11-EM-E30 CPLD & FPGA Architectures and Applications
11-EM-E31 Network Security & Cryptography
11-EM-E32 Embedded Networking
11-EM-E33 Ad-hoc & Wireless Sensor Networks
11-EM-E34 Robotics
11-EM-E35 System Modeling and Simulation
GROUP-B
11-EM-E40 Embedded Linux
12-EM-E41 System On Chip Architecture
11-EM-E42 Advanced Computer Networks
11-EM-E43 Image and Video Processing
12-EM-E44 Real Time Operating Systems
12-EM-E45 Object Oriented Analysis and Design

148
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) First Semester 2012-2013

Course No. : 12-EM501

Course Title : Micro Controllers for Embedded System Design
Course Structure : 3-1-2
SYLLABUS:
UNIT – I: Introduction to Embedded Systems
Overview of Embedded Systems, Processor Embedded into a system, Embedded Hardware
Units and Devices in system, Embedded Software, Complex System Design, Design Process
in Embedded System, Formalization of System Design, Classification of Embedded Systems.

UNIT – II: Microcontrollers and Processor Architecture & Interfacing

8051 Architecture. Real world interfacing, Introduction to advanced architectures, processor
& memory organization, Instruction-level parallelism, and performance metrics.

UNIT – III: PIC Microcontroller Hardware

Introduction, Architectural overview, Memory organization, interrupts and reset, I/O ports,
Timers

Unit – IV: Device Drivers & Interrupt service Mechanism

Programmed-I/O Busy-wait approach without ISM,ISR concept, Interrupt sources, Interrupt
service mechanism, Multiple Interrupts, context and the periods for context switching,
Interrupt latency and deadline, Classification of processors ISM from context-saving angle,
Direct Memory Access, Device driver programming

UNIT – V: Devices &Communication Buses for Devices Network

IO Types and examples, Serial communication Devices, Parallel Device ports, Networked
Embedded systems, Serial Bus communication protocols.

Text Books:
1. Embedded Systems - Architecture Programming and Design – Raj Kamal, 2nd ed., 2008,
TMH.
2. Embedded C Programming and the Microchip PIC-Richard Barnett, O” Cull, Cox, 2009,
Cengage Learning.

Reference Books:
1. Embedded Microcomputer Systems, Real Time Interfacing – Jonathan W. Valvano –
Brookes Cole, 1999, Thomas Learning

149
 MICROCONTROLLERS AND INTERFACING LAB
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Cycle - I: The following Programs are to be written in Embedded C and Compile them using
RIDE and Top view Simulator
1. Study of I/O Ports of 89c51 Microcontroller
2. Interfacing of 7 – Segment displays to 89c51
3. Interfacing of 2 – line 16 – character LCD display
4. Generation of PWM signal as are of the portliness
5. Study of Timer / Counters of 89c51
6. Study of External Interrupts of 89c51
7. Study of Serial Port of 89c51
8. Interfacing of Keyboard & 7 – Segment display to 89c51

Cycle – II: The following Experiments are to be executed on 8051 Target system by writing
programs in Assembly Language and using cross assembler.
9. Interfacing of Stepper Motor
10. Interfacing of DC Motor
11. Interfacing of Multichannel A/D Converter

Cycle-III: The following Experiments are to be executed on AT89S52 Target system by

writing programs in Embedded-C
12. To Establish a Serial Communication Between Host and Target Board(AT 89S52)
Using RS-232 Protocol
13. To Interface EEPROM to AT89S52 Using IIC Protocol.

NOTE: Minimum Ten Experiments to be done

150
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) First Semester 2012-2013

Course No. : 12-EM502

Course Title : REAL TIME CONCEPTS FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Course Structure : 3-1-0
SYLLABUS

UNIT I
Introduction: Examples of Embedded Systems, Definition of Embedded Systems,
Architecture of Embedded Systems, Real- Time Embedded Systems , Design Issues and
Current Trends for Embedded Systems
Hard versus soft Real- Time Systems: Jobs and Processes, Release Times, Deadlines and
Timing Constraints, Hard and Soft Timing Constraints, Hard Real Time Systems, Soft Real
Time Systems

UNIT II
A Reference Model of Real – Time Systems: Processors and Resources, Temporal
Parameters of Real Time Workload, Periodic Task Model, Precedence Constraints and Data
Dependency, Functional Parameters- preemptivity of jobs, criticality of jobs, Resource
Parameters of Jobs and Parameters of Resources, Scheduling Hierarchy- Scheduler and
Schedules, Feasibility, Optimality and Performance Measures.

Classification of Real Time Scheduling Approaches: Clock- Driven Approach, Weighted

Round- Robin Approach, Priority- Driven Approach, Dynamic versus Static Systems,
Effective Release Times and Deadlines, optimality of the EDF and LST algorithms, Non
optimality of the EDF and LST algorithms, Challenges in validating timing constraints in
priority –driven systems Off-line versus On-line Scheduling

UNIT III:
Clock-Driven Scheduling : Notations and Assumptions, Static, Timer -Driven Scheduler,
General Structure of Cyclic Schedules, Cyclic Executives, Improving the Average Response
Time of Aperiodic Jobs, Scheduling Sporadic Jobs-Acceptance test ,EDF Scheduling of
accepted jobs and implementation, Pros and Cons of Clock Driven Scheduling,

UNIT IV:
Priority-Driven Scheduling of Periodic Tasks: Static Assumption, Fixed Priority v/s
Dynamic Priority Algorithms, schedulability test for the EDF algorithm, a schedulability test
for fixed priority tasks with short response times-time demand analysis, schedulability test for
fixed priority tasks with arbitrary response times: busy intervals, general schedulability test,
sufficient schedulability conditions for RM & DM algorithms: schedulable utilization of the
RM algorithm for tasks with Di=pi, schedulable utilization of fixed priority tasks with
arbitrary relative deadlines
Scheduling Aperiodic and Sporadic Jobs in Priority-Driven Systems: Assumptions and
Approaches, Deferrable Servers- Operations of Deferrable Servers, Constant utilization
server Scheduling of sporadic jobs-a simple acceptance test in deadline driven systems, a
simple acceptance test in fixed- priority driven systems

151
UNIT V:
Resources and Resource Access control: Assumptions on Resources and Their Usage,
Effects of Resource Contention and Resource Access Control, Non-preemptive Critical
Sections, Basic Priority Inheritance Protocol, Basic Priority Ceiling Protocol- Definition,
computation of blocking time, Controlling accesses to Multiple Unit Resources
Real-Time Operating Systems: Overview- Threads and Tasks, The Kernel, Time Services
and Scheduling Mechanisms- Time Services, Scheduling Mechanisms, Other Basic
Operating System Functions- Communication and Synchronization, Event Notification and
Software Interrupt, Memory Management, I/O and Networking

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Real Time Systems – By Jane W.S.Liu -Low Price Edition , Pearson Education Asia
2. Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems - Qing Li with Caroline Yao
published by CMP Books

152
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) First Semester 2012-2013

Course No. : 12-EM503

Course Title : VLSI Technology & Design
Course Structure : 3-1-2
SYLLABUS:

UNIT – I:
Review of Microelectronics and Introduction to MOS Technologies: MOS, CMOS, BiCMOS
Technology.
Basic Electrical Properties of MOS, CMOS &BiCMOS Circuits: Ids-Vds relationships,
Threshold Voltage Vt, Gm, Gds and ωo, Pass Transistor, MOS, CMOS & Bi CMOS
Inverters, Zpu/Zpd, MOS Transistor circuit model, Latch-up in CMOS circuits.

UNIT – II:
Layout Design and Tools: Transistor structures, Wires and Bias, Scalable Design rules,
Layout Design and Tools.
Logic Gates & Layouts: Static Complementary Gates, Switch Logic, Alternative Gate
circuits, Low power gates, Resistive and Inductive interconnect delays.

UNIT – III:
Combinational Circuit Design: Delay Estimation, Logical Effort and Transistor Sizing ,
Power Dissipation, Circuit Families, Circuit Pitfalls, Low-power Logic Design, Comparison
of Circuit Families, Silicon-on-Insulator Circuit Design

UNIT –IV:
Sequential Circuit Design : Introduction, Sequencing Static Circuits, Circuit Design of
Latches and Flip-flops: Conventional CMOS Latches and Flip-Flops, Pulsed Latches,
Resettable Latches and Flip-Flops, Enabled Latches and Flip-flops. Static Sequencing
Element Methodology: Choice of Elements, Low-power Sequential Design. Synchronizers: A
simple synchronizer, arbiter.

UNIT – V:
Floor Planning and System Design: Floor planning methods, Global interconnect, Floor
Plan design, off-chip connections, Register Transfer Design, Pipelining

Text Books:
1. Essentials of VLSI Circuits and Systems, K. Eshraghian. D, A.Pucknell, 2005, PHI.
2. Modern VLSI Design - Wayne Wolf, fourth edition, Pearson Education.
3. CMOS VLSI Design A Circuits and systems perspective Third Edition Neil H.E.Weste
References:
1. Introduction to VLSI systems – A Logic, Circuit and System Perspective- Ming Bo, Liu,
CRC Press, 1st Edition 2011.
2. Principals of CMOS VLSI Design – N.H.E Weste, K.Eshraghian, 2nd ed., Adisson
Wesley.

153
 HDL and FPGA LAB
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
The following Programs are to be written in HDL (VHDL/Verilog) Verify the
functionality in FPGAs(Spartan 3e)
Cycle-I

1. Design of full adder, Subtractor in data flow, Behavioral and Strucral Modeling’s.
2. Design of Multiplexers (4:1, 8:1) and Demultiplexers (1:4, 1:8).
3. Design of Encoders (with priority and without priority ) and Decoders
4. Design of Comparators (1-bit, 2-bit, 4-bit) .
5. Design of Code converters:
(a) Binary to Gray
(b) Gray to Binary
(c) BCD to Seven Segment
6. Design of Ripple carry, Carry Select Adders.

Cycle-II

7. Design of Flip Flops (SR,JK,T,D)

8. Design of Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters
9. Design of Barrel Shifter and 8-bit ALU
10. Design of Shift Registers (SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO).
11. Design of Finite State Machines (Moore and Mealy).
12.Design of Memories(ROM,RAM)

NOTE: After completion of these experiments any one application are to be Develop by
Group

Tools Required : Xilinx 11.1i, Modelsim 5.7f, Digilent

Hardware Required: Spartan 3e FPGA Boards

154
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – II

Course No. : 12-EM504

Course Title :Wireless Communications & Networks
Course Structure : 3-1-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT I
Introduction to Mobile and Wireless Landscape: Definition of Mobile and
Wireless, Components of Wireless Environment, Challenges, Applications, Overview
of Wireless Networks, Categories of Wireless Networks, open Research topics.
Wireless LAN :Infra redVs radio transmission, Infrastructure and Ad-hoc Network,
IEEE 802.11: System architecture, Protocol architecture. Bluetooth: User scenarios,
Architecture.

UNIT II:
Global System for Mobile Communications(GSM): Introduction, Mobile services,
System architecture, Radio interface, Localization and calling, Handover, Security.
(Wireless) Medium Access Control :Motivation for a specialized MAC (Hidden and
exposed terminals, Near and far terminals), SDMA, FDMA, TDMA, CDMA.

UNIT III:
Mobile Network Layer:
Mobile IP: Goals, assumptions, entities and terminology, IP packet delivery, agent
advertisement and discovery, registration, tunneling and encapsulation,
optimizations, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Mobile Ad hoc Networks (MANETs): Overview, Properties of a MANET, spectrum
of MANET applications, routing and various routing algorithms.

UNIT IV
Mobile Transport Layer:Traditional TCP, Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile
TCP, Fast retransmit/fast recovery, Transmission /time-out freezing, Selective
retransmission, Transaction oriented TCP.

UNIT V
Broadcast Systems: Overview, Cyclical repetition of data, Digital audio
broadcasting: Multimedia object transfer protocol, Digital video broadcasting: DVB
data broadcasting, DVB for high-speed internet access, Convergence of broadcasting
and mobile communications.
Text Book:
1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.MartynMallick, “Mobile and Wireless Design Essentials”, Wiley, 2008.
2.Asoke K Talukder, et al, “Mobile Computing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
3.Mobile Computing, Raj Kamal,Oxford University Press.
4.William Stallings, “ Wireless Communications & Networks”, Person, Second
Edition, 2007.
5.JimGeier, “Wireless Networks first-step”, Pearson, 2005.
155
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Second Semester 2012-2013

Course No. : 11-EM601

Course Title : Advanced Embedded Processor Architecture
Course Structure : 3:1:2
SYLLABUS:
UNIT I:
ARM Processor as System-on-Chip: Acorn RISC Machine – Architecture
inheritance – ARM programming model. 3 and 5 stage pipeline ARM organization –
ARM instruction execution and implementation – ARM Co-processor interface

UNIT II:
ARM Assembly Language Programming: ARM instruction types – data transfer,
data processing and control flow instructions – ARM instruction set – Co-processor
instructions, Thumb Instruction Set.

UNIT III: Architectural Support for System Development: Advanced

Microcontroller bus architecture – ARM memory interface – ARM reference
peripheral specification – Hardware system prototyping tools – ARMulator – Debug
architecture.

UNIT IV:
ARM Processor Cores: ARM7TDMI, ARM8, ARM9TDMI, ARM10TDMI, The
AMULET Asynchronous ARM Processors- AMULET1

UNIT V:
Embedded ARM Applications: The VLSI Ruby II Advanced Communication
Processor, The VLSI ISDN Subscriber Processor, The OneC™ VWS22100 GSM
chip, The Ericsson-VLSI, Bluetooth Baseband Controller, The ARM7500 and
ARM7500FE.

Text Books:
1. ARM System on Chip Architecture – Steve Furber – 2nd ed., 2000, Addison
Wesley
Professional.
2. Design of System on a Chip: Devices and Components – Ricardo Reis, 1st ed.,
2004, Springer
References:
1. Co-Verification of Hardware and Software for ARM System on Chip Design
(Embedded
Technology) – Jason Andrews – Newnes, BK and CDROM
2. System on Chip Verification – Methodologies and Techniques –PrakashRashinkar,
Peter
Paterson and Leena Singh L, 2001, Kluwer Academic Publishers.

156
 ADVANCED EMBEDDED PROCESSOR LAB

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Basic Experiments

1. Interfacing of LEDS to P1.16 to P1.23

2. Interfacing Switches to P1.24 to P1.31
3. Interfacing Buzzer and Relay
4. Interfacing of stepper motor
5. Establishing a communication Link between kit and PC using Serial Port
6. Study of External Interrupts
7. Interfacing of 2 line 16 character LCD display
8. Study of Timer/Counter feature of LPC 2148

Design Experiments

1. Interfacing of temperature sensor LM 35 using on chip ADC

2. Interfacing 7 Segment Display using I2C interface
3. Controlling Speed of DC motor using On Chip PWM module
4. Interfacing a serial EEPROM using ARM7 Internal I2C Bus
5. Interfacing of GLCD
6. Interfacing RTC using I2C Bus

Note: Students have to complete at least six Basic experiments and one Design
Experiment.

157
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Second Semester 2012-2013

Course No. : 11-EM602

Course Title : Digital Signal Processors and Architectures
Course Structure : 3-1-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT I
Introduction To Digital Signal Processing: Introduction, A Digital signal-
processing system, The sampling process, Discrete time sequences. DiscreteFourier
Transform (DFT) and Fast Fourier Transform (FFT), Linear time-invariant systems,
Digital filters,Decimation and interpolation, Analysis and Design tool for DSP
Systems MATLAB, DSP using MATLAB.
Computational Accuracy In DSP Implementations: Number formats for signals
and coefficients in DSP systems, Dynamic Range and Precision, Sources of errorin
DSP implementations, A/D Conversion errors, DSP Computational errors, D/A
Conversion Errors,Compensating filter.

UNIT II
Architectures for Programmable DSP Devices: Basic Architectural features, DSP
Computational Building Blocks, Bus Architecture and Memory, DataAddressing
Capabilities, Address Generation Unit, Programmability and Program Execution,
Speed Issues,Features for External interfacing.

UNIT III
Execution Control and Pipelining: Hardware looping, Interrupts, Stacks, Relative
Branch support, Pipelining and Performance, Pipeline Depth, Interlocking, Branching
effects, Interrupt effects, Pipeline Programming models.
Programmable Digital Signal Processors: Commercial Digital signal-processing
Devices, Data Addressing modes of TMS320C54XX DSPs, Data Addressing modes
of TMS320C54XX Processors, Memory space of TMS320C54XX Processors,
Program Control, TMS320C54XX instructions and Programming, On-Chip
Peripherals, Interrupts of TMS320C54XXprocessors, Pipeline Operation of
TMS320C54XX Processors.

UNIT IV
Implementations Of Basic DSP Algorithms: The Q-notation, FIR Filters, IIR
Filters, Interpolation Filters, Decimation Filters, PID Controller, AdaptiveFilters, 2-D
Signal Processing.
Implementation Of FFT Algorithms: An FFT Algorithm for DFT Computation, A
Butterfly Computation, Overflow and scaling, Bit-Reversed indexgeneration, An 8-
Point FFT implementation on the TMS320C54XX, Computation of the signal
spectrum.

UNIT V
Interfacing Memory And I/O Peripherals To Programmable DSP Devices:
Memory space organization, External bus interfacing signals, Memory interface,
Parallel I/O interface,Programmed I/O, Interrupts and I/O, Direct memory access
(DMA).A Multichannel buffered serial port (McBSP), McBSP Programming, a
CODEC interface circuit, CODECprogramming, A CODEC-DSP interface example

158
Text Books
1. Digital Signal Processing – Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, Thomson Publications,
2004.
2. DSP Processor Fundamentals, Architectures & Features – Lapsley et al. 2000, S.
Chand & Co.

References
1. Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Programming and Applications – B.
Venkataramani and
M. Bhaskar, 2002, TMH.
2. Digital Signal Processing – Jonatham Stein, 2005, John Wiley.

159
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Second Semester 2012-2013

Course No. : 11-EM603

Course Title : Hardware Software Co -Design
Course Structure : 3-1-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT –I
Co- Design Issues
Co- Design Models, Architectures, Languages, A Generic Co-design Methodology.
Co- Synthesis Algorithms:
Hardware software synthesis algorithms: hardware – software partitioning distributed
system co-synthesis.

UNIT –II
Prototyping and Emulation:
Prototyping and emulation techniques, prototyping and emulation environments,
future developments in emulation and prototyping
Target Architectures:
Architecture Specialization techniques, System Communication infrastructure, Target
Architecture and Application System classes, Architecture for control dominated
systems (8051-Architectures for High performance control), Architecture for Data
dominated systems (ADSP21060, TMS320C60), Mixed Systems.

UNIT – III
Compilation Techniques and Tools for Embedded Processor Architectures:
Modern embedded architectures, embedded software development needs, compilation
technologies practical consideration in a compiler development environment.

UNIT – IV
Design Specification and Verification:
Design, co-design, the co-design computational model, concurrency coordinating
concurrent computations, interfacing components, design verification, implementation
verification, verification tools, interface verification

UNIT – V
Languages for System – Level Specification and Design-I
System – level specification, design representation for system level synthesis, system
level specification languages.
Languages for System – Level Specification and Design-II
Heterogeneous specifications and multi-language co-simulation the cosyma system
and lycos system.

Text Books:
1. Hardware / software co- design Principles and Practice – Jorgen Staunstrup, Wayne
Wolf – 2009, Springer.
2. Hardware / software co- design Principles and Practice, 2002, kluwer academic
publishers

160
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Second Semester

Course No. : 12-EM604

Course Title : Linux System Concepts
Course Structure : 3-1-2
SYLLABUS:
UNIT1
Introduction: Structure of a computer system, looking at OS as a System
Programming.
Development tools: Compilation tools and its functionalities, Debugging
applications, Using Make, Source code Control Tools, Creating Libraries and
Implementing System Calls.
Processes & Inter Process Communication: Pipes and FIFO’s, Asynchronous I/O,
Signals & its importance, Sockets, Threads, POSIX Threads, Multi-threading using
POSIX Threads.

UNIT – II
Operating Systems Concepts: Structure of Linux Operating System, Process
Management, Memory Management, File System Management, I/O Management,
Networking Subsystem, Storage Management.

UNIT – III
Linux Kernel: Making partitions, Linux installation, Compilation of open sources,
Configuration & Compilation of kernel sources, working with Modules.

UNIT – IV
Linux Kernel APIs: Kernel Features, Interrupts and Exceptions, Debugging, Timers,
Synchronization techniques, ioctl’s, The proc file system, Unified Device Model and
sysfs, Memory Management and Allocation, User and Kernel Space communication,
Sleep and Wait Queues, Interrupt Handling.

UNIT – V:
Linux Device drivers: Skeleton of device drivers, Block Drivers, PCI, Direct
Memory Access, Network Drivers, USB Drivers, MTD, Asynchronous I/O, I/O
Scheduling

Text Books:
1. Linux Kernel Development, Robert Love, 2nd Edition, 2006, Pearson
Education.
2. Advanced Programming in UNIX Environment– Richard Stevens, Addison-
Wesley, 1992.
Reference Books:
1. Understanding the Linux Kernel, Third Edition Daniel P. Bovet , Marco
Cesati, 3rd edition, Orally Publications
2. Linux Device Drivers, 3rd edition, Linux Device Drivers, 3rd Edition Jonathan
Corbet, Alessandro Rubini , Greg Kroah-Hartman, Orally Publications

161
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Group-A 2012-2013

Course No. : 11-EM-E30

Course Title : CPLD and FPGA Architecture and Applications
Course Structure : 3-0-0

UNIT – I
Programmable Logic: Read Only Memory (ROM), PROM, Programmable
Logic Array (PLA)/Programmable Array Logic (PAL). Combinational circuit
realization using ROM, PROM

UNIT – II
CPLDs : Sequential PLDs. PGAs – Features, Programming and applications using
CPLDs,- Altera series – Max 5000/7000 Series and ALTERA FLEX Logic – 10000
Series CPLDs. AMD’s – CPLD (Mach 1 to 5);

UNIT - III
FPGAs: Logic blocks, routing architecture, Design flow, Technology Mapping for
FPGAs, Case studies – Xilinx XC4000 & ALTERA’s FLEX 8000/10000 FPGAs

UNIT - IV
Design Techniques, Rules, and Verification: Objectives, Hardware
Description Languages, Top-Down Design, Synchronous Design, Floating Nodes,
Bus Connection, Design for Test, and Testing Redundant Logic, What is Verification?
Simulation, Static Timing Analysis, Assertion Languages & Formal Verification.

UNIT - V
Electronic Design Automation Tools: Objectives, Simulation Software, Test
Bench Generators, In situ Tools, Synthesis Software, Automatic Test Pattern
Generation (ATPG). Scan Insertion Software, Built-In Self-Test (BIST) Generators,
Static Timing Analysis Software, Formal Verification Software, Place and Routing
Software, Programming Tools.

Text Books:
1. Michael D.Celetti “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL” Prentice
Hall, 2009
2. John F Wakerly “Digital Design Principles & Practices” Prentice Hall, 2001.
3. Bob Zeidman “Designing with FPGAs & CPLDs” Focal Press, 2002
4. S.Trimberger, Edr., Field Programmable Gate Array Technology, Kluwer
Academic Publicatgions, 1994
Reference Books:
1. Ian Grout “Digital Systems Design with FPGA’s and CPLD’s” ELSEVIER
2. Stephen Brown “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design” MCH
2008
3. Dueck “Digital Design with CPLD Applications and VHDL” Thomson
4. P.K.Chan & S. Mourad, “Digital Design Using Field Programmable Gate
Array”, jPrentice Hall (Pte), 1994.

162
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – I

Course No. : 11-EM-E31

Course Title : Network Security & Cryptography
Course Structure : 3-0-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT-I
Introduction: Attacks, Services and Mechanisms, Security attacks, Security services,
A Model for Internetworksecurity. Classical Techniques: Conventional Encryption
model, Steganography, Classical EncryptionTechniques.

UNIT-II
Modern Techniques: Simplified DES, Block Cipher Principles, Data Encryption
standard, Strength of DES, Differential and Linear Cryptanalysis, Block Cipher
Design Principles and Modes of operations.
Algorithms: Triple DES, International Data Encryption algorithm, Blowfish, RC5,
CAST-128, RC2, Characteristics of Advanced Symmetric block cifers.
Conventional Encryption: Placement of Encryption function, Traffic confidentiality,
Key distribution, Random Number Generation.
Public Key Cryptography: Principles, RSA Algorithm, Key Management, Diffie-
Hellman Key exchange, Elliptic Curve Cryptography.

UNIT-III
Number theory: Prime and Relatively prime numbers, Modular arithmetic, Fermat’s
and Euler’s theorems, Testing forprimality, Euclid’s Algorithm, the Chinese
remainder theorem, Discrete logarithms.
Message authentication and Hash functions: Authentication requirements and
functions, Message Authentication, Hash functions, Security of Hash
functions and MACs.

UNIT-IV
Hash and Mac Algorithms: MD File, Message digest Algorithm, Secure Hash
Algorithm, RIPEMD-160, and HMAC. Digital signatures and Authentication
protocols:Digital signatures, Authentication Protocols, Digital signature standards.
Authentication Applications:Kerberos, X.509 directory Authentication service.
Electronic Mail Security: Pretty Good Privacy, S/MIME.

UNIT-V
IP Security: Overview, Architecture, Authentication, Encapsulating Security
Payload, Combining security Associations,Key Management.:Web Security
Web Security requirements, Secure sockets layer and Transport layer security, Secure
Electronic Transaction. Intruders, Viruses and Worms :Intruders, Viruses and
Related threats. Fire Walls :Fire wall Design Principles, Trusted systems.

Text Book:
1. Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice - William Stallings,
2000, PE.

References:
1. Principles of Network and Systems Administration, Mark Burgess,JohnWiel

163
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – I

Course No. : 11-EM-E32

Course Title : Advanced Digital signal processing
Course Structure : 3-0-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT I
Review of DFT, FFT, IIR Filters, and FIR Filters, Multirate Signal Processing:
Introduction, Decimation by a factor D, Interpolation by a factor I, and Sampling
rate conversion by a rational factor I/D, Multistage Implementation of Sampling Rate
Conversion, Filter design & Implementation for sampling rate conversion,
Applications of Multirate Signal Processing

UNIT II
Non-Parametric methods of Power Spectral Estimation: Estimation of spectra
from finite duration observation of signals, Non-parametric Methods: Bartlett, Welch
& Blackman &Tukey methods, Comparison of all Non-Parametric methods

UNIT III
Parametric Methods of Power Spectrum Estimation: Autocorrelation & Its
Properties, Relation between auto correlation & model parameters, AR Models -
Yule-Waker& Burg Methods, MA & ARMA models for power spectrum estimation.

UNIT –IV
Linear Prediction : Forward and Backward Linear Prediction – Forward Linear
Prediction, Backward Linear Prediction, Optimum reflection coefficients for the
Lattice Forward and Backward Predictors. Solution of the Normal Equations:
Levinson Durbin Algorithm, Schur Algorithm. Properties of Linear Prediction Filters

UNIT V
Finite Word Length Effects: Analysis of finite word length effects in Fixed-point
DSP systems – Fixed, Floating Point Arithmetic – ADC quantization noise & signal
quality – Finite word length effect in IIR digital Filters – Finite word-length effects in
FFT algorithms.

Textbooks:
1. Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms & Applications - J.G.Proakis&
D.G.Manolokis, 4th ed., PHI.
2. Discrete Time signal processing - Alan V Oppenheim & Ronald W Schaffer, PHI.
3. DSP – A Pratical Approach – Emmanuel C.Ifeacher, Barrie. W. Jervis, 2 ed.,
Pearson
Education.

References:
1. Modern spectral Estimation : Theory & Application – S. M .Kay, 1988, PHI.
2. Multirate Systems and Filter Banks – P.P.Vaidyanathan – Pearson Education
3. Digital Signal Processing – S.Salivahanan, A.Vallavaraj, C.Gnanapriya, 2000,TMH

164
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – I

Course No. : 11-EM-E33

Course Title :Ad-hoc Wireless & Sensor Networks
Course Structure : 3-0-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT I
Introduction to Ad Hoc Networks: Characteristics of MANETs, Applications of
MANETs and challenges of MANETs - Routing in MANETs: Criteria for
classification, Taxonomy of MANET routing algorithms, Topology based routing
algorithms, Position based routing algorithms, Other routing algorithms.
UNIT II
Data Transmission: Broadcast storm problem, Broadcasting, Multicasting and
Geocasting - TCP over Ad Hoc: TCP protocol overview, TCP and MANETs,
Solutions for TCP over Ad hoc
UNIT III
Basics of Wireless Sensors and Applications: Applications, Classification of sensor
networks, Architecture of sensor network, Physical layer, MAC layer, Link layer.
UNIT IV
Data Retrieval in Sensor Networks: Routing layer, Transport layer, High-level
application layer support, Adapting to the inherent dynamic nature of WSNs, Sensor
Networks and mobile robots - Security: Security in Ad Hoc networks, Key
management, Secure routing, Cooperation in MANETs, Intrusion Detection systems.
UNIT V
Sensor Network Platforms and Tools: Sensor Network Hardware, Berkeley motes,
Sensor Network Programming Challenges, Node-Level Software Platforms -
Operating System: TinyOS - Imperative Language: nesC, Dataflow style
language: TinyGALS, Node-Level Simulators, ns-2 and its sensor network extension,
TOSSIM
TEXT BOOKS:
1.Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks – Theory and Applications, Carlos Corderio Dharma
P.Aggarwal, World Scientific Publications, March 2006, ISBN – 981-256-681-3
2.Wireless Sensor Networks: An Information Processing Approach, Feng Zhao,
Leonidas Guibas, Elsevier Science, ISBN – 978-1-55860-914-3 ( Morgan
Kauffman)

165
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – I

Course No. : 11-EM-E34

Course Title :Robotics
Course Structure : 3-0-0
SYLLABUS:
Unit – I :
Introduction & Basic Definitions: Introduction, Control Programs for Robots,
Industry Applications of Robots, Pick and Place, Gantry and Armtype Robots in
typical set-ups like Automobile Industry
Coordinate Systems :Cartesian, Cylindrical, Polar, and Revolute systems: Robot
Positioning: Robot Arms; Axes, their ranges, offset and In-line Wrist: Roll, Pitch and
Yaw, their meaning in Robotics

Unit-II :
Mechanical Aspects: Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics, Motion planning and Mobile
Mechanisms

Unit-III :
Sensors and Applications: Range and Use of Sensors, Micro switches, Resistance
Transducers, Piezo-electric, Infrared and Lasers. Applications of Sensors : Reed
Switches, Ultrasonic, Barcode Readers and RFID

Unit-IV
Robot Systems: Hydraulic and Electrical Systems including pumps, valves,
solenoids, cylinders, stepper motors, Encoders andAC Motors

Unit-V
Programming of Robots: Programming of Robots such as Lego Robots,
Programming environment, Example Applications, Safetyconsiderations

Text Books:
1. Introduction to Robotics – P.J.Mckerrow, ISBN : 0201182408
2. Introduction to Robotics – S.Nikv, 2001, Prentice Hall,
3. Mechatronics and Robotics: Design & Applications – A.Mutanbara, 1999,CRC
Press.

References:
1. Robotics – K.S.Fu, R.C.Gonzalez and C.S.G.Lee, 2008, TMH.

166
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Group-B

Course No. :11-EM-E40

Course Title : Embedded Linux
Course Structure : 3-0-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT – I:
Introduction: History of Embedded Linux, Embedded Linux versus Desktop Linux,
Embedded Linux Distributions, Architecture of Embedded Linux, Linux Kernel
Architecture, Linux Start-Up Sequence, GNU Cross-p\Platform Tool chain.

UNIT – II:
Board Support Package: Inserting BSP in Kernel Build Procedure, Boot Loader
Interface, Memory Map, Interrupt Management, PCI Subsystem, Timers, UART, and
Power Management.
Embedded Storage: Flash Map, MTD—Memory Technology Device, MTD
Architecture, Flash-Mapping Drivers, MTD Block and Character devices, Embedded
File systems, Optimizing Storage Space.

UNIT – III:
Embedded Drivers: Linux Serial Driver, Ethernet Driver, I2C subsystem on Linux,
USB Gadgets, Watchdog Timer, and Kernel Modules.

UNIT-IV:
Porting Applications: Architectural Comparison, Application Porting Road Map,
Programming with Pthreads, Operating System Porting Layer (OSPL), Kernel API
Driver.

Unit-V:
Real-Time Linux: Linux and Real-Time, Real-Time Programming in Linux, Hard
Real-Time Linux.

Text Books:
1. Embedded Linux System Design and Development, P.Raghavan, Amol Lad,
SriramNeelakandan, 2006, Auerbach Publications
Reference Books:
1. Embedded Linux – Hardware, Software and Interfacing

167
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Third Semester

Course No. : 12-EM-E41

Course Title : System On – Chip Architecture
Course Structure : 3-0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I Introduction ,Design Methodology for Logic cores : SoC Design

flow, General guide lines for design reuse, design process for soft, firm and hard
cores, system integration.

UNIT-II Design Methodology for Memory Cores and Analog cores:

Design methodology for embedded memories, specifications of analog
circuits Design Validation: core level validation, core interface verification SoC
design validation.

UNIT-III On-chip communication Architectures: A quick overlook, Basic concepts

of bus based communication Architectures: Terminology, characteristics of Bus based
communication architectures, data transfer modes, Bus topology types.

UNIT-IV On chip Communication Architecture Standard : standard on chip bus

based communication architectures, socket based on chip interface standards.

UNIT-V Verification and security Issues in On chip communication Architectures:

verification of on chip communication protocols, compliance verification for IP
block integration, basic concepts for SoC security, security support in standard bus
protocols Networks on chip: network topology, switching strategies, routing
algorithms, flow control, clocking schemes, NOC architectures.

Text Books :

1. System On a Chip Design and Test? by Rochit Rajsuman, Library of Congress

Cataloging-in-Publication Data,2000.

2. On chip communication Architectures? by Sudeep Pasricha and Nikil Dutt ,

Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,2008

168
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – II

Course No. : 11-EM-E42

Course Title : Advanced Computer Networks
Course Structure : 3-0-0
SYLLABUS:
Unit -I:
Congestion and Quality of Service (QoS): Data traffic, Congestion, Congestion
Control, Open loop and Closed Loop Congestion Control in TCP andFrame Relay,
Quality of Service, Flow Characterization, Flow Classes, Need For QoS, Resource
Allocation,Best Effort Service Features, Techniques to Improve QoS.
Queue Management: Passive, Active (RED), and Fair (BRED, Choke) Queue
Management Schemes, Scheduling, Traffic Shaping, Resource Reservation and
Admission Control Scheduling, Integrated and Differential Services.

Unit-II:
Wireless Local Area Networks: Introduction, Wireless LAN Topologies, Wireless
LAN Requirements, the Physical Layer, the Medium Access Control (MAC) Layer,
Latest Developments.
Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs): Introduction to PAN Technology and
Applications, Commercial Alternatives- Bluetooth, Home RF.
Wireless Wide Area Networks and MANS: The Cellular Concept, Cellular
Architecture, The First-Generation Cellular Systems, The Second- Generation
Cellular Systems, The Third- Generation Cellular Systems, Wireless in Local Loop,
Wireless ATM, IEEE 802.16 Standard.

Unit-III:
Cellular Systems and Infrastructure- Based Wireless Networks: Cellular Systems
Fundamentals, Channel Reuse, SIR and User Capacity, Interference Reduction
Techniques, Dynamic Resource Allocation, Fundamental Rate Limits.
Virtual Private Network (VPN): Types of VPN, VPN General Architecture,
Disadvantages, VPN Security Issues, VPN Standards.

Unit-IV:
ATM Protocol Reference Model: Introduction, Transmission Convergence (TC)
Sub-layer, Physical Medium Dependent (PMD) Sub-layer, Physical Layer Standards
for ATM.
ATM Layer: ATM Cell Header Structure at UNI, ATM Cell Header Structure at
NNI, ATM Layer Functions.
ATM Adaptation Layer: Service Classes and ATM Adaptation Layer, ATM
Adaptation Layer 1 (AAL1), ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2), ATM Adaptation
Layer 3/4 (AAL3/4), ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5).
ATM Traffic and Service Parameterization: ATM Traffic Parameters, ATM
Service Parameters, Factors Affecting QoS Parameters, ATM Service Categories,
QoS and QoS Classes.

169
Unit-V:
Interconnection Networks: Introduction, Banyan Networks- Properties, Crossbar
Switch, Three Stage Class Networks, Rearrangeable Networks, Folding Algorithm,
Benes Networks, Looping Algorithm, Bit- Allocation Algorithm.
SONET/SDH: SONET/SDH Architecture, SONET Layers, SONET Frames, STS
Multiplexing, SONET Networks.

Text Books:
1. Wireless Communications - Andrea Goldsmith, 2005, Cambridge University Press.
2. Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols - C. Siva Ram Murthy and
B.S.Manoj,
2004, PHI.
3. Data Communication and Networking - B. A.Forouzan, 2nd updating, 2004,TMH

References:
1. Introduction to Broadband Communication Systems- Sadiku, Mathew N.O.,
Akujuobi,
Cajetan.M, PHI
2. Wireless Networks- P. Nicopolitidis, A. S. Pomportsis, G. I. Papadimitriou, M. S.
Obaidat,
2003, JohnWiley& Sons
3. High Performance TCP / IP Networking – Mahaboob Hassan, Jain Raj, PHI.
4. Telecommunication System Engineering – Roger L. Freeman, 4/ed., Wiley-
Interscience, John
Wiley & Sons, 2004.

170
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – II

Course No. : 11-EM-E43

Course Title :Image and Video Processing
Course Structure : 3-0-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT I
Fundamentals of Image Processing and Image Transforms: Basic steps of Image
Processing System Sampling and Quantization of an image – Basic relationship
betweenpixelsImage Transforms: 2 D- Discrete Fourier Transform, Discrete Cosine
Transform (DCT), Wavelet Transforms:Continuous Wavelet Transform, Discrete
Wavelet Transforms.

UNIT II
Image Processing Techniques:
Image Enhancement: Spatial domain methods: Histogram processing,
Fundamentals of Spatial filtering, Smoothing spatial filters,Sharpening spatial
filters.Frequency domain methods: Basics of filtering in frequency domain, image
smoothing, image sharpening,Selective filtering.
Image Segmentation: Segmentation concepts, Point, Line and Edge Detection,
Thresholding, Region Based segmentation.

UNIT III
Image Compression: Image compression fundamentals - Coding Redundancy,
Spatial and Temporal redundancy, Compressionmodels: Lossy& Lossless, Huffman
coding, Arithmetic coding, LZW coding, Run length coding, Bit plane
coding, Transform coding, Predictive coding, Wavelet coding, JPEG Standards.

UNIT IV
Basic steps of Video Processing: Analog Video, Digital Video. Time-Varying
Image Formation models: Three-Dimensional Motion Models,Geometric Image
Formation, Photometric Image Formation, Sampling of Video signals, Filtering
operations.

UNIT V 2-D
Motion Estimation: Optical flow, General Methodologies, Pixel Based Motion
Estimation, Block- Matching Algorithm, and Mesh basedMotion Estimation, Global
Motion Estimation, Region based Motion Estimation, Multi resolution motion
estimation, Waveform based coding, Block based transform coding, Predictive
coding, Application of motion estimation in Video coding.

Text Books:
1. Digital Image Processing – Gonzaleze and Woods, 3rd ed., Pearson.
2. Video processing and communication – Yao Wang, JoemOstermann and Ya–quin
Zhang. 1st
Ed., PH Int.

References :
1. Digital Video Processing – M. Tekalp, Prentice Hall International

171
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – II

Course No. : 12-EM-E44

Course Title : Real Time Operating Systems
Course Structure : 3-1-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT-I
Review of Operating Systems: Basic Principles, Operating System structures,
System Calls, Files, Processes, Design and Implementation of processes,
Communication between processes, Introduction to Distributed operating system,
Distributed scheduling.
UNIT-II
Overview of RTOS: RTOS Task and Task state, Process Synchronisation- Message
queues, Mail boxes, pipes, Critical section, Semaphores, Classical synchronisation
problem, Deadlocks
UNIT-III
REAL TIME MODELS AND LANGUAGES: Event Based – Process Based and
Graph based Models, Real Time Languages, RTOS Tasks, RT scheduling, Interrupt
processing, Synchronization, Control Blocks, Memory Requirements.
UNIT IV
REAL TIME KERNEL: Principles, Design issues, Polled Loop Systems, RTOS
Porting to a Target, Comparison and study of various RTOS like QNX, VX works,
PSOS, C Executive- Case studies.
UNIT V
RTOS APPLICATION DOMAINS: RTOS for Image Processing, Embedded RTOS
for voice over IP, RTOS for fault Tolerant Applications, RTOS for Control Systems.

REFERENCES:
1. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming and Design” Tata
McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. Herma K., “Real Time Systems – Design for distributed Embedded Applications”,
Kluwer Academic, 1997.
3. Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems-A Design Oriented approach” McGraw
Hill 1997.
4. Krishna.C.M, Kang, Shin.G, “Real Time Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1997.
5. Raymond J.A.Bhur, Donald L.Bailey, “An Introduction to Real Time
Systems”, PHI 1999.
6. Mukesh Sighal and Shi.N.G “Advanced Concepts in Operating System”, McGraw
Hill 2000.

172
 KL University
Department of Electronics & Computer Engineering
M.Tech (ES) Elective – II 2011-2012

Course No. : 12-EM-E45

Course Title : Object Oriented Analysis & Design
Course Structure : 3-0-0
SYLLABUS:
UNIT I:
Methodology, Modeling: Object-oriented Methodologies; Rumbaugh et al.’s Object
Modeling Technique; The Booch Methodology; The Jacobson et al. Methodologies;
Patterns; Frameworks; The Unified Approach.

UNIT II:
Unified Modeling Language: Introduction; Static and Dynamic Models; Modeling ;
Introduction to the Unified Modeling Language; UML Diagrams; UML Class
Diagram; Use-Case Diagram; UML Dynamic Modeling; Model Management:
Packages and Model Organization; UML Extensibility; UML Meta-Model.

UNIT III:
Object-Oriented Analysis: Use-Case Driven: Object-Oriented Analysis Process:
Identifying use cases: Introduction; Why Analysis is a Difficult Activity; Business
Object Analysis: Understanding the Business Layer; Use-Case Driven Object-
Oriented Analysis: The Unified Approach; Business Process Modeling; Use-Case
Model; Developing Effective Documentation; Case-Study: Analyzing the Via Net
Bank ATM-The Use-Case Driven Process. Classification: Introduction;
classifications Theory; Approaches for Identifying Classes; Noun Phrase Approach;
Common Class Patterns Approach; Use-Case Driven Approach: Identifying Classes
and Their Behaviors through Sequence/Collaboration Modeling; Classes,
Responsibilities, and Collaborators.

UNIT IV:
Identifying Object Relationships, Attributes, And Methods: Introduction;
Associations; Super-Sub Class Relationships; A-Part-of Relationships-Aggregation;
Case Study: Relationship Analysis for the Via Net Bank ATM System; Class
Responsibility: Identifying Attributes and Methods; Class Responsibility: Defining
Attributes by Analyzing Use Cases and Other UML Diagrams; Defining Attributes
for Via Net Bank Objects; Object Responsibility: Methods and Messages; Defining
Methods for Via Net Bank Objects. The Object-Oriented Design Process And
Design Axioms: Introduction; The Object-Oriented Design Process; Object-Oriented
Design Axioms; Corollaries.

UNIT V:
Designing Classes: Introduction; The Object-Oriented Design Philosophy; UML
Object Constraint Language; Designing Classes: The Process; Class Visibility:
Designing Well-Defined Public, Private, and Protected Protocols; Designing Classes:
Refining Attributes; Refining Attributes for the Via Net Bank Objects; Designing
Methods and Protocols; Designing Methods for the Via Net Bank Objects; Packages
and Managing Classes. View Layer: Designing Interface Objects: Introduction; User
Interface Design as a Creative Process; Designing View Layer Classes;
173
Macro-Level Process: Identifying View Classes by Analyzing Use Cases; Micro-
Level Process.

Text Books:
(1) Object Oriented Systems Development by Ali Bahrami Tata McGraw Hill
International Editions, Computer Science Series.

Reference Books:
(1) Unified Modeling Language Reference Manual, James Rumbaugh, Jacobson,
Booch, PHI.
(2) The Unified Software Development Process, Ivar Jacobson, Grady Booch, James
Rumbaugh, Pearson Education.

174
 M. TECH (PED)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

ENGINEERING

175
 M.Tech 2012 Batch(PED)
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
Course L-T-
S.No Credits
Code Course Title P
Semester -1
1 11-EE511 POWER ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - I 3-1-2 5
2 11-EE512 ELECTRICAL MACHINE MODELING AND ANALYSIS 3-1-0 4
3 11-EE503 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3-1-0 4
4 11-EE504 MODERN CONTROL THEORY 3-1-0 4
5 ELECTIVE-1 3-0-0 3
6 ELECTIVE-2 3-0-0 3
7 11-EE509 SEMINAR 0-0-4 2
TOTAL CREDITS 25

Semester -2
1 11-EE513 POWER ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS II 3-1-2 5
2 11-EE506 MICRO CONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 3-1-0 4
3 11-EE514 POWER ELECTRONIC CONTROL OF DRIVES 3-1-0 4
4 11-EE515 INTELLIGENT CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL DRIVES 3-1-0 4
5 ELECTIVE-3 3-0-0 3
6 ELECTIVE-4 3-0-0 3
7 11-EE509 TERM PAPER 0-0-4 2
TOTAL CREDITS 25

Semester -3&4
1 KLUC505 THESIS 36

Odd Semester Electives

1 11-EE541 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL 3-0-0 3
2 11-EE532 VLSI 3-0-0 3
3 11-EE533 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3
4 11-EE540 SPECIAL MACHINES 3-0-0 3
5 11-EE534 NON CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES 3-0-0 3

Even Semester Electives

1 11-EE535 FACTS 3-0-0 3
2 11-EE544 ELECTRICAL VEHICLES 3-0-0 3
3 11-EE536 STATE ESTIMATION & ADAPTIVE CONTROL 3-0-0 3
4 11-EE542 EMBEDDED CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES 3-0-0 3
5 11-EE543 AL TECHNIOQUES IN POWER ELECTRONICS & DRIVES 3-0-0 3

176
 POWER ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS – I
Course Code : 11 EE511 L-T-P : 3-1-2
Credits : 5

Syllabus:
Unit I : POWER ELECTRONICS DEVICES:
power electronic devices – SCR, Theory of operation of SCR, Two transistor model
of SCR, Characteristics and ratings, SCR turn on and turn off methods, Firing circuits,
DIAC, TRIAC, IGBT, MOSFET and their characteristics , MTO,ETO , IGCTs ,
MOS-controlled thyristors(MCTs) – Static Induction Thyristors (SITHs) – Power
integrated circuits (PICs) – symbol, structure and equivalent circuit – comparison of
their features.
Unit II : NATURAL COMMUTATED CONVERTERS:
AC to DC Converter- single phase controlled rectifier bridge type - with R load- RL
load- with and without FWD- analysis & wave forms- three phase controlled rectifier
bridge type with R, RL loads with & without FEWD- analysis & waveforms –
performance factors of natural commutated converters - advantages- applications -
power factor improvements.
Unit III : AC VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS:
Single phase Ac voltage controllers- with R & RL loads- Analysis & waveforms-
three phase AC voltage controllers- analysis& wave forms – AC synchronous tap
changers - Matrix converters, cyclo converters
Unit IV : PWM INVERTERS (single phase)
Bridge type- Single phase Inverters. MC Murray- Bedford inverter- and their analysis
& waveforms – Bridge type three phase Inverters with different modes. CSI-some
applications- comparison of VSI & CSI. Simple problems. PWM and their methods,
Advanced modulation techniques for improved performance, stepped, harmonic
injection and delta modulation, Advantages, application
Unit V : D.C - D.C. Converters.
Analysis of step-down and step-up dc to dc converters with resistive and Resistive-
inductive loads – Switched mode regulators – Analysis of Buck Regulators - Boost
regulators – buck and boost regulators – Cuk regulators – Condition for continuous
inductor current and capacitor voltage – comparison of regulators –Multiouput boost
converters – advantages – applications – Numerical problems.
Text books:
1. Power Electronics – Mohammed H. Rashid – Pearson Education –Third Edition –
First Indian reprint 2004.
2. . Power Electronics – Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland and William P. Robbins –
John Wiley AND Sons – Second Edition
Reference Books:
1. Power Electronics by W.Launder
2. Industrial Electronics & Robotics by Shaler & C.Menamee

177
 ELECTRICAL MACHINE MODELING AND ANALYSIS

Course Code : 11 EE512 L-T-P : 3-1-0

Credits : 4

Syllabus:
Unit I: Basic concepts of Modeling
Basic Two-pole Machine representation of Commutator machines, 3-phase
synchronous machine with and without damper bars and 3-phase induction machine,
Kron’s primitive Machine - voltage, current and Torque equations.
DC Machine Modeling
Mathematical model of separately excited D.C motor – Steady State analysis-
Transient State analysis-Sudden application of Inertia Load-Transfer function of
Separately excited D.C Motor- Mathematical model of D.C Series motor, Shunt
motor-Linearization Techniques for small perturbations
Unit II: Reference frame theory
Real time model of a two phase induction machine- Transformation to obtain
constant matrices-three phase to two phase transformation-Power equivalence-
Dynamic modeling of three phase Induction Machine
Generalized model in arbitrary reference frame-Electromagnetic torque-Derivation of
commonly used Induction machine models- Stator reference frame model-Rotor
reference frame model-Synchronously rotating reference frame model-Equations in
flux linkages-per unit model

Unit III: Small Signal Modeling of Three Phase Induction Machine

Small signal equations of Induction machine-derivation-DQ flux linkage model
derivation-control principle of Induction machine.

Symmetrical and Unsymmetrical 2 phase Induction Machine

Analysis of symmetrical 2 phase induction machine-voltage and torque equations for
unsymmetrical 2 phase induction machine-voltage and torque equations in stationary
reference frame variables for unsymmetrical 2 phase induction machine-analysis of
steady state operation of unsymmetrical 2 phase induction machine- single phase
induction motor - Cross field theory of single-phase induction machine.
Unit IV: Modeling of Synchronous Machine
Synchronous machine inductances –voltage equations in the rotor’s dq0 reference
frame-electromagnetic torque-current in terms of flux linkages-simulation of three
phase synchronous machine- modeling of PM Synchronous motor.
Unit V: Dynamic Analysis of Synchronous Machine
Dynamic performance of synchronous machine, three-phase fault, comparison of
actual and approximate transient torque characteristics, Equal area criteria
Text Books:
1. R. Krishnan, “Electric Motor Drives - Modeling, Analysis& control”, Pearson
Publications, 1st edition, 2002.
2. P.C.Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D.Sudhoff, “Analysis of Electrical
Machinery and Drive systems”, IEEE Press, Second Edition.
Reference Books:
1. P.S.Bimbra, “Generalized Theory of Electrical Machines” Khanna publications,
5th edition-1995
2. Dynamic simulation of Electric machinery using Matlab / Simulink –Chee Mun
Ong-Prentice Hall.

178
 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (PED & PS)
Course Code :11 EE503 L-T-P : 3-1-0
Credits : 4
Syllabus:
UNIT I: Linear Programming
Standard form of linear programming problem; Simplex method two phase simplex
method; revised simplex method. Duality in Linear programming. Some simple
numerical problems.
UNIT II: Non-Linear Programming
Fibonacci method, Golden section method, Powell’s method, Newton’s method,
Kuhn-Tucker conditions. Some simple numerical problems.
UNIT III: Transportation Problem
Definition of transportation problem, transportation algorithm, North-West corner
method, Vogel approximation method, Least cost method, Hungarian method for
assignment. Some simple numerical problems.
UNIT IV: Project planning through Networks
Arrow diagram representation; Rules for constructing an arrow diagram. PERT and
CPM, critical path calculations, Earliest start and latest completion times;
Determination of floats. Some simple numerical problems.
UNIT V: Dynamic Programming
Multistage decision processes; Types of multistage decision problems, concept of
sub-optimization and the principle of sub-optimality computational procedure in
dynamic programming. Some simple numerical problems.
Text Books:
1. Engineering optimization theory and practice by S.S. Rao New Age International
publications.
2. Operations Research, An introduction by Hamdy A. Taha. PHI learning private
Ltd. New Delhi.
Reference Books:
1. Operations Research by S.D. Sharma, Kedarnath & Ramnath Publishers, Delhi.
2. Introduction to operations research Hiller and Liberman.

179
 MODERN CONTROL THEORY (PED & PS)
Course Code : 11 EE504 L-T-P : 3-1-0
Credits : 4

Syllabus:
UNIT–I: DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTMES
Introduction, Signal Reconstruction, Difference Equation, Z Transfor Function, Response
of Linear Discrete Systems, Z Transform Analysis of Discrete data Control Systems, Z
and S Domain Relation ship, Stability of Discrete systems.
UNIT- II: STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
Introduction, State Descriptions of Digital Processors, State Description of sampled
continuous time plants, Solution of State difference equations, Controllability and
Observability
UNIT-III : NONLINEAR SYSTEMS
Introduction – Non Linear Systems - Types of Non-Linearities – Saturation – Dead-Zone
- Backlash – Jump Phenomenon etc;– Singular Points – Introduction to Linearization of
nonlinear systems, Properties of Non-Linear systems – Describing function–describing
function analysis of nonlinear systems – Stability analysis of Non-Linear systems through
describing functions
.UNIT-IV: STABILITY ANALYSIS
Stability in the sense of Lyapunov, Lyapunov’s stability and Lypanov’s instability
theorems - Stability Analysis of the Linear continuous time invariant systems by
Lyapunov second method– Direct method of Lyapunov – Generation of Lyapunov
functions – Variable gradient and Krasoviskii’s methods – estimation of transients using
Lyapunov functions.
UNIT- V : OPTIMAL CONTROL
Introduction to optimal control - Formulation of optimal control problems – calculus of
variations – fundamental concepts, functionals, variation of functionals – fundamental
theorem of Calculus of variations – boundary conditions – constrained minimization –
formulation using Hamiltonian method – Linear Quadratic regulator
TEXT BOOKS:
1.M.Gopal – Digital Control and state variable methods, Tata Mcgraw’Hill, 2nd eddition
2.M.Gopal - Modern Control System Theory - New Age International (P.Ltd,) 2nd
eddition,1984
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stafani etal , “Design of Feedback control Systems” – Oxford Press, 4th eddition.
2. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering,” Prentice Hall, 4th eddition.
3. Nagarath IJ and M. Gopal, “ Control Systems Engineering”- New Age International
Publishers, 5th eddition.

180
 POWER ELECTRONICS CIRICUITS – II

Course Code : 11 EE513 L-T-P : 3-1-2

Credits : 5
Syllabus:

UNIT I
Resonant pulse inverters – series resonant inverters – series resonant inverters with
unidirectional switches – series resonant inverters with bidirectional Switches –
analysis of half bridge resonant inverter – evaluation of currents and Voltages of a
simple resonant inverter – analysis of half bridge and full bridge resonant inverter
with bidirectional switches – numerical problems.
UNIT II
Frequency response of series resonant inverters – for series loaded inverter – for
parallel loaded inverter – For series and parallel loaded inverters – parallel resonant
inverters – Voltage control of resonant inverters – class E resonant inverter – class E
resonant rectifier – evaluation of values of C’s and L’s for class E inverter and Class
E rectifier – numerical problems.
UNIT II
Multilevel concept – Types of multilevel inverters – Diode clamped multilevel
inverter –Improved diode clamped inverter – Flying capacitors multilevel inverter –
Cascaded multilevel inverter – Hexagram inverter - Principle & Operations –
Switching device currents – DC link capacitor voltage balancing – Features of
multilevel inverters – Comparison of multilevel inverters - Applications – numerical
problems.
UNIT IV
Resonant converters – zero current switching resonant converters – L type ZCS
resonant converter – M type ZCS resonant converter – zero voltage Switching
resonant converters – comparison between ZCS and ZVS resonant Converters – Two
quadrant ZVS resonant converters – resonant dc-link Inverters – evaluation of L and
C for a zero current switching inverter – Numerical problems.
UNIT V
Power supplies - DC power supplies – classification - switched mode dc power
supplies – flyback Converter – forward converter – push-pull converter – half bridge
converter – Full bridge converter – Resonant d c power supplies – bidirectional
power Supplies – Applications - AC power supplies – classification – switched mode
ac power supplies – power line disturbances – power conditioners – uninterruptible
Power supplies – Renewable uninterruptible Power supplies – applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohammed H. Rashid , “Power Electronics”, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition.
2. Bimal K. Bose, “Modern Power Electronics”, PHI publications.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. C.V.Lander, “Power Electronics”, Mc Graw Hills, International Edition.
2. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland and William P. Robbins, “Power Electronics”, John
Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition.
3.G.K. Roy, “Non Conventional Energy Sources” Khanna Publicatoins, 1st Edition –
2004.

181
 MICRO CONTROLLERS & EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

Course Code :11 EE506 L-T-P : 3-1-0

Credits : 4

Syllabus:
UNIT – I
MICRO CONTROLLERS:
Introduction to Micro controllers - Micro controller families - Features of 8051 Micro
controller - 8051 Architecture - Block diagram of 8051 Micro controller - Register
organization - Addressing modes - Instruction set - Distinction between CISC and
RISC - Assembler directives – Architecture of 16 bit micro controller.

UNIT – II
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS:
An Embedded System - Embedded System Classification – Components of an
Embedded System Hardware - Overview of Processors in the System - Other
hardware units - Software embedded into the system - Exemplary Embedded Systems
- Embedded System on a Chip (SOC) and the use of VLSI design circuit – Structural
units in Processor

UNIT – III
DEVICE NETWORK AND EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING:
Input/output devices – Device I/O types and Examples – Synchronous, Iso-
synchronous and Asynchronous communication from Serial Devices – Timer and
Counting devices - Programming in Assembly language (ALP) versus High Level
Language - C program elements - Macros and functions - Multiple function calls in a
cyclic order in the main Function - C Program compiler and Cross compiler

UNIT – IV
REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS:
Operating System services – Goals of an operating system – Process management –
Memory management - Device management - File System Organization and
Implementation - I/O Subsystem – IEEE Standard POSIX functions for
Standardization of RTOS and inter-task communication functions – Inter-Process
Communication and Synchronization - OS Security Issues – Mobile OS

UNIT – V
Hardware Software Co-design in an Embedded System:
Embedded System Project management – Embedded System design and Co-Design
issues in System development Process – Design cycle in the development phase for an
Embedded System – Uses of a Target System or its Emulator and In-Circuit Emulator
– Use of software tools for development of an Embedded System – Use of Scopes and
logic analyzers for system hardware tests.

Text Books
1. Mazidi & Mc Kinley, ” The 8051 Micro controller and Embedded Systems
using Assembly and c”, 2nd edition.
2. Rajkamal, “Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design”,
TATA McGraw-Hill Publications.
Reference Books
1. Dr.K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded/Real-time Operating System”, Dreamtech
Press.
182
 POWER ELECTRONIC CONTROL OF DRIVES

Course Code : 11 EE514 L-T-P : 3-1-0

Credits : 4
Syllabus:

Unit-I
Control of induction motor, Review of steady-state operation of Induction motor,
Equivalent circuit analysis, torque-speed characteristics. Voltage Source Inverter Fed
Induction motor drives &Current Source Inverter Fed Induction motor drives. control
of induction by Slip power recovery schemes.
Unit-II
Vector control of Induction Motor : Principles of vector control, Direct vector control,
derivation of indirect vector control, implementation – block diagram; estimation of
flux, flux weakening operation.

Unit-III

Control of Synchronous motor drives : Synchronous motor and its characteristics-

Control strategies-Constant torque angle control- power factor control, constant flux
control, flux weakening operation, Load commutated inverter fed synchronous motor
drive, motoring and regeneration, phasor diagrams. PMSM and BLDC control of
Drives, control of Variable Reluctance Motor Drive

Unit-IV

Speed control of dc Motors-Different types of speed control techniques by using

single phase& three phase ac systems Closed loop control of phase controlled DC
motor Drives. Open loop Transfer function of DC Motor drive- Closed loop Transfer
function of DC Motor drive –Phase-Locked loop control.

Unit- V

Closed loop control of chopper fed DC motor Drives, Speed controlled drive system –
current control loop – pulse width modulated current controller – hysteresis current
controller – modeling of current controller – design of current controller

Text Books:
1. Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives –B. K. Bose-Pearson Publications-
2. Electric Motor Drives- R.Krishanan- Prentice Hall, Indian Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Power Electronics and Motor Control – Shepherd, Hulley, Liang – II Edition,
Cambridge University Press
2. Power Electronic Circuits, Devices and Applications – M. H. Rashid – PHI.
3. Fundamentals of Electrical Drives by GK Dubey, Narosa Publishers.

183
 INTELLIGENT CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES

Course Code : 11 EE515 L-T-P : 3-1-0

Credits : 4

Syllabus:

UNIT I
Introduction and motivation. Approaches to intelligent control. Architecture for
intelligent control. Symbolic reasoning system, rule-based systems, the AI approach.
Knowledge representation. Expert systems.
Concept of Artificial Neural Networks and its basic mathematical model, McCulloch-
Pitts neuron model, simple perceptron, Adaline and Madaline, Feed-forward
Multilayer Perceptron. Learning and Training the neural network.

UNIT II
Data Pre-Processing: Scaling, Fourier transformation, principal-component analysis
and wavelet transformations. Networks: Hopfield network, Self-organizing network
and Recurrent network. Neural Network based controller Case studies: Identification
and control of linear and nonlinear dynamic systems using MATLAB-Neural
Network toolbox.

UNIT III
Genetic Algorithm: Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detail algorithmic steps,
adjustment of free parameters. Solution of typical control problems using genetic
algorithm.
Concept on some other than GA search techniques like tabu search and ant-colony
search techniques for solving optimization problems.

UNIT IV
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets, basic fuzzy set operation and approximate
reasoning. Introduction to Fuzzy logic modeling and control of a system.
Fuzzification, inference and defuzzification. Fuzzy knowledge and rule bases.
Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for nonlinear systems. Self-organizing fuzzy
logic control. Implementation of fuzzy logic controller using Matlab fuzzy-logic
toolbox.

Unit-V:
Fuzzy logic & Neural network applications to Drives
Fuzzy logic applications: Design of Fuzzy PI controller for speed control of DC
motor- Flux programming efficiency improvement of three phase induction motor-
Induction motor speed control-Slip gain tuning of indirect vector control of induction
motor-stator resistance estimation.
Neural network applications:-PWM Controller-Selected harmonic elimination PWM-
Space vector PWM-Vector controlled drive-feedback signal estimation-speed
estimation and flux estimation of induction motor

Text Books:
1. Neural Networks: A comprehensive Foundation – Simon Haykins, Pearson
Edition, 2003.
2. Fuzzy logic with Fuzzy Applications – T.J.Ross – Mc Graw Hill Inc, 1997.
3. Genetic Algorithms- David E Goldberg.
184
Reference Books:
1. Principles of Neurocomputing for science and Engineering,- Fredric M.Ham and
Ivica Kostanic, McGraw Hill, 2001.
2. Neural Network Fundamentals with Graphs, Algorithms and Applications, N.K.
Bose and P.Liang, Mc-Graw Hill, Inc. 1996.
3. Fuzzy logic Intelligence, Control, and Information- John Yen and Reza Langari,
Pearson Education, Indian Edition, 2003.

185
 SPECIAL MACHINES (ELECTIVE)

Course Code : 11 EE540 L-T-P :3-0-0

Credits : 3
Syllabus:
Unit-I:
Induction generators: self excitation requirements, steady state analysis, voltage
regulation, different methods of voltage control, application to mini and micro hydel
systems.
Doubly fed induction machines: control via static converter, power flow,
voltage/frequency control (generation mode), application to grid connected wind and
mini/micro hydel systems.

Unit-II
Brushless DC Machines: construction operation, performance, control and
applications.
Micro Machines: principles of operation of various types. Sensors for control, e.g.
Position sensor, etc. Recent developments in the area.

Unit-III
Linear Machines: Linear Induction Machines and Linear Synchronous Machines.
Construction, operation, performance, control and applications. PMDC and PM
Synchronous Machine, control and applications. Recent developments in electrical
machines

Unit-IV
Stepper Motors: Various types, principle of operation, operating characteristics,
application. Servo Motors. Servo amplifier and control. Special types of permanent
magnet motors for servo application. Various types of specialized actuators. Switched
Reluctance Motor: Construction, operating performance, control and applications.

Unit-V: Synchronous And Special Machines

Construction of synchronous machines-types - Induced emf - Voltage regulation; emf
and mmf methods - Brushless alternators - Reluctance motor - Hysteresis motor -
Stepper motor.

Text Books:
1. P.C Sen, ‘Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics’, Wisley
Edition, Second edition, 1997.
2. Gopal K Dubey, ‘Fundamentals of Electrical Drives’ Narosa Publications,
Second edition, 2008.
3. J Gnanvadivel, N.Rathina prabha et.el, ‘ELECTRICAL MACHINES’,
Anuradha publications.
Reference books:
1. Bimal K. Bose, ‘Modern Power Electronics And AC Drives’, Low Price
Edition, First edition.
2. R.K Rajput, ’Electrical Machines’, Laxmi Publications Pvt Ltd, Fifth
Edition.

186
 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL (ELECTIVE)

Course Code :11 EE541 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3

Syllabus:
UNIT – I
Definition – Basic principles of measurement – Measurement systems, generalized
configuration and functional descriptions of measuring instruments – examples.
Dynamic performance characteristics –sources of error, Classification and elimination
of error.open and closed systems Servomechanisms–Examples with block diagrams–
Temperature, speed & position control systems.

UNIT II:
Measurement of Displacement: Theory and construction of various transducers to
measure displacement – Piezo electric, Inductive, capacitance, resistance, ionization
and Photo electric transducers, Calibration procedures,measurement of temperature -
Classification – Ranges – Various Principles of measurement – Expansion, Electrical
Resistance – Thermistor – Thermocouple – Pyrometers – Temperature Indicators.

UNIT – III
MEASUREMENT OF PRESSURE : Units – classification – different principles used.
Manometers, Piston, Bourdon pressure gauges, Bellows – Diaphragm gauges. Low
pressure measurement – Thermal conductivity gauges – ionization pressure gauges,
Mcleodpressuregauge.

UNIT – IV
MEASUREMENT OF LEVEL : Direct method – Indirect methods – capacitative,
ultrasonic, magnetic, cryogenic fuel level indicators – Bubler level indicators,flow
measurement : Rotameter, magnetic, Ultrasonic, Turbine flow meter, Hot – wire
anemometer, Laser Doppler Anemometer (LDA).

UNIT – V
MEASUREMENT OF SPEED : Mechanical Tachometers – Electrical tachometers –
Stroboscope, Noncontact type of tachometer Measurement of Acceleration and
Vibration Different simple instruments – Principles of Seismic instruments –
Vibrometer and accelerometer using this principle.

TEXT BOOKS :
1. D.S Kumar “Mechanical Measurement Control” 3rd edition, Metropolitan
Publishers, 2004.
2. Mechanical Measurements / BeckWith, Marangoni, Linehard, PHI / PE

REFERENCES :
1. Measurement systems: Application and design, Doeblin Earnest. O. Adaptation by
Manik and Dhanesh/ TMH
2. Instrumentation and Control systems/ S.Bhaskar/ Anuradha Agencies.

187
 VLSI DESIGN.(ELECTIVE)
Course Code : 11 EE 532 L-T-P : 3-0-0
Credits : 3
Syllabus:
UNIT-I:
Introduction to CMOS circuits: MOS transistors, MOS switches, CMOS logic:
Inverter, combinational logic, NAND, NOR gates, compound gates, Multiplexers.
Memory: Latches and registers. Circuit and system representations: Behavioral,
structural and physical representations

UNIT-II
MOS transistor theory: NMOS, PMOS enhanment mode transistors, Threshold
voltage, body effect, MOS device design equations: basic DC equations, second order
effects, sub threshold region, channel-length modulation, mobility variation, impact
ionization-hot electrons

UNIT-III
MOS models, small signal AC characteristics, CMOS inverter DC characteristics,
static load MOS inverters, bipolar devices, CMOS processing technology: An
overview of silicon semiconductor technology:

UNIT-IV
basic CMOS technology, CMOS process enhancement, layout design rules, Latch up,
technology related CAD issues . CMOS circuit and logic design: CMOS logic gate
design: fan in, fan-out, typical CMOS NAND and NOR Delays, transistor sizing.

UNIT-V
Basic physical design of simple logic gates. CMOS logic structures. Clocking
strategies: single phase memory structures, PLL techniques, single phase logic
structures, two phase clocking, memory structures, And logic structures, I/O
Structures: out put pads, input pads.

TEXT BOOK
1. Weste, Eshragian, Principles of CMOS VLSI design, Addison Wesley, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Douglas A Pucknell and Kamaran Eshragian, Basic VLSI design, 3rd edition,
2001.
2. J.S.Smith, Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Addison Wesley, 2004

188
 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ELECTIVE)

Course Code : 11 EE533 L-T-P : 3-0-0

redits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT-I: Digital Filter Structures:

Introduction- Structure for realization of Discrete systems, Structures for FIR systems,
Cascaded and Lattice filter, Structures for IIR Filters- Cascaded and Lattice filters,
State space analysis of structures- Solution to state equations.

UNIT-II: Implementation of DTS:

Representation of Numbers- fixed binary, floating, Error in rounding, Trunk -
Quantization of Filter coefficients, quantization coefficients in FIR, Round off effects
in Filters-Limit cycle oscillations, Scaling to prevent overflow.

UNIT-III: Digital filter design:

General considerations- Design of FIR filter using windows- Design of IIR digital
filters-Using Bilinear transformations of IIR filters- FIR filter Design-based on Least
Square Method - Design of FIR digital filters with least Square –Inverse( Wiener
Filter )- design of IIR digital filters in Frequency domain.

UNIT-IV: Analysis of finite Word length effects:

The Quantization process and errors- Reduction of Product round-off errors using
feedback –Quantization of fixed point and floating point Numbers- Analysis of
coefficient Quantization effects – Dynamic range scaling- overflow oscillations.

UNIT V: Power Spectrum Estimation:

Estimation of spectra from Finite Duration Observations signals – Non-parametric
methods for power spectrum estimation-Walsh methods-Blackman & Tukey method.
– Parametric method for power spectrum Estimation - Minimum variance spectral
estimation.

Text Books:
1. Digital Signal Processing principles, Algorithms and Applications – John
G. Proakis -PHI –3rd edition-2002.
2. Discrete Time Signal Processing – Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Shafer -
PHI-
1996 1st edition-9th reprint.

Reference Books:
1. Digital Signal Processing – S.Salivahanan, A.Vallavaraj, C. Gnanapriya –
TMH - 2nd reprint-2001
2. Digital Filter Analysis and Design - Auntonian -TMH

189
 NON CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES (ELECTIVE)

Course Code : 11 EE534 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT I : SOLAR RADIATION

Extraterrestrial solar radiation, terrestrial solar radiation, solar thermal conversion,
solar ponds, solar heating/cooling technique, solar distillation, photovoltaic energy
conversion, solar cells – 4 models.

UNIT II:WIND ENERGY

Planetary and local winds, vertical axis and horizontal axis wind mills, principles of
wind power, maximum power, actual power, wind turbine operation.

UNIT III: ENERGY FROM OCEANS

Ocean temperature differences, principles of OTEC plant operations, wave energy,
devices for energy extraction, tides, simple single pool tidal system.

UNIT IV: GEOTHERMAL ENERGY

Origin and types, Bio fuels, classification, direct combustion for heat and electricity
generator, anaerobic digestion for biogas, biogas digester, power generation.

UNIT V: MICRO- HYDEL ELECTRIC SYSTEMS:

Power potential –scheme layout-generation efficiency and turbine part flow-
geothermal energy extraction.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Godfrey Boyle “Renewable Energy”, Oxford Publications, Second edition.
2. G. D. Rai, “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, First
edition.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Roger H.Charlier, Charles W. “ Ocean Energy- Tide and Tidal Power”ISBN:
Library of Congress Control Number: 2008929624_c Springer-Verlag Brerlin
Heidelberg 2009.
2. John Twidell & Toney Weir: E&F.N. Spon, “Renewable Energy Sources”,
Taylor & Francis New York, 2nd edition.
3. John F.Walker & N.Jenkins, “Wind Energy Technology”, John Willey and
Sons Chichester, U.K – 1997.

190
 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE)
Course Code : 11 EE535 L-T-P : 3-0-0
Credits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT – 1 FACTS Concept and General System Considerations

Introduction to Facts devices, Power Flow in AC system, Dynamic stability
Considerations and the importance of the controllable parameters, Definitions on
FACTS, Basic types of FACTS Controllers, Basic concept of voltage source
converters, Single phase, there phase full wave bridge converters operation,
Transformer connections for 12 pulse, 24 and 48 pulse operation.

UNIT II CONVERTERS
Three level voltage source converter, pulse width modulation converter, Design of
pwm converter to reduce the harmonics, basic concept of current source Converters,
Comparison of current source converters with voltage source converters.

UNIT-III Static shunt Compensators

SVC and STATCOM Operation & characteristics and Control of TSC,TSR,
STATCOM, Comparison between SVC and STATCOM – STATCOM for transient
and dynamic stability enhancement.

UNIT – IV Static Series Compensation

GCSC, TSSC, TCSC and SSSC Operation and Control External system Control for
series Compensator SSR and its damping – Static Voltage and Phase angle Regulators
- TCVR and TCPAR –Operation and Control.

UNIT –V UPFC and IPFC

The unified power flow Controller – Operation –Comparison with other FACTS
devices – control of P and Q – dynamic performance – special Purpose FACTS
controllers – Interline Power flow Controller – Operation and Control.

Text Books :
1. N.G Hingorani & L.Gyugyi “ Understanding FACTS: Concepts and
Technol;ogy of Flexible AC
Transmission System” , IEEE Press,2000
2. K.R.Padiyar “FACTS Controller in power Transmission and Distribution”
New Age Int Publisher,2007

Reference Books:

1. Ned Mohan e.al “Power Electronics” John wiley & Sons

2. T.J.E Millor, “Reactive power control in electric Systems” John wiley & sons

191
 ELECTRIC VEHICLES (ELECTIVE)
Course Code : 11 EE544 L-T-P : 3-0-0
Credits : 3
Syllabus:

UNIT-I:Introduction to Alternate Propulsion Systems: History and working principle

of hybrid vehicles, configurations of hybrid vehicles, case studies of hybrid vehicles,
fuel oil reserves and depletion, the need for alternate propulsion devices, introduction
to electric vehicle, introduction to hybrid vehicle.

UNIT-II: Motors and Drives: Electromagnetic force, torque production from

electromagnets, working principle of DC motor, variants of DC motors, torque-speed
characteristics of DC motors, speed control of DC motors, merits and limitations of
DC motors, Introduction to AC motors, Induction, permanent magnet and switched
reluctance motors: working principle, torque-speed characteristics and control.

UNIT-III: Battery Technology: Energy density of various energy sources and storage
devices, basics of battery, working principle, construction, of lead-acid, nickel
cadmium, nickel metal hydride and lithium ion batteries, high voltage battery, various
configurations of battery, maintenance free and low maintenance battery,
recombination battery, AGM and valve regulated battery, battery capacity, current
and voltage characteristics during charging and discharging, battery modeling,
Peukart Capacity and discharging, battery failure modes, good practices of battery
maintenance.

UNIT-IV: Energy Storage Devices for Hybrid Vehicles: Super capacitor, ultra
capacitor, fly wheel technology, Vehicle dynamics, tractive effort, aerodynamic
resistance, maximum tractive effort limited by ground adhesion, acceleration
performance, gradeability, maximum speed of a vehicle, Working principle of fuel
cell, various types of fuel cells and details, performance and efficiency of fuel cells,
fuel cell voltage pattern, fuel cell vehicles, supply and storage of hydrogen.

UNIT-V: Design of Plug-in Electric Vehicle (EV): Requirement of drive train of EV,
various configurations of drive train in EV, transmissions systems, motor sizing for
EV, tractive effort and transmission requirement, general EV configuration, Energy
consumption pattern in EV, driving pattern in EV, control of EV,Case studies of
series and parallel hybrid vehicle design practices.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jefferson, C.M., Barnard and R.H., Hybrid Vehicle Propulsion, WIT Press,
Boston, 2002
2. Husain and Iqbal, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles : Design Fundamentals, CRC
Press, London, 2003

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. International Journal of Electric and Hybrid Vehicle, Inderscience Publications.
2. International Journal of Alternate Propulsion, Inderscience Publications.
3. Erjavec, Jack, Arias and Jeff Hybrid, Electric and Fuel-Cell Vehicles, Thomson,
Australia, 2007

192
 EMBEDDED CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES (ELECTIVE)
Course Code : 11 EE542 L-T-P : 3-0-0
Credits : 3
Syllabus:

UNIT I: MC68HC11 MICROCONTROLLER

Architecture memory organization – Addressing modes – Instruction set –

Programming techniques – simple programs

UNIT II: PERIPHERALS OF MC68HC11

I/O ports – handshaking techniques – reset and interrupts – serial communication

interface – serial peripheral interface – programmable timer – analog / digital
interfacing – cache memory

UNIT III: PIC 16C7X MICROCONTROLLER

Architecture – memory organization – addressing modes – instruction set –

programming techniques – simple operation.

UNIT IV: PERIPHERAL OF PIC 16C7X MICROCONTROLLER

Timers – interrupts – I/O ports – I2C bus for peripheral chip access – A/D converter –
VART
UNIT V: SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROCONTROLLERS

Interfacing LCD display – Keypad interfacing – AC load control – PID control of DC

motor – stepper motor control – brush less DC motor control.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. B. Peatman , ‘Design with PIC Microcontrollers,’ Pearson Education, Asia 2004

2. Michael Khevi, ‘The M68HC11 Microcontroller Applications in control,
Instrumentation and communication’, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOK:

1. John B. Peatman, ‘Design with Microcontrollers’, Mc-Graw Hill

193
 STATE ESTIMATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL (ELECTIVE)
Course Code : 11 EE536 L-T-P : 3-0-0
Credits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT I : Elements of Probability Theory

Introduction, Random variables, Probability functions, Expected value, Characteristic
function, Independence, Correlation Gaussian distribution, Elements of theory of
stochastic processes.

UNIT II : Least Squares Estimation

Least squares and Regression models, Estimation of parameters, Simulation of
Recursive estimation, Wiener filtering, General filter optimization.

UNIT III : Optimal Prediction And Filtering For Discrete Systems

Optimal prediction for discrete linear systems, optimal estimation for discrete
systems, Kalman filter for discrete linear systems.

UNIT IV : Model Reference Adaptive Schemes

Introduction, MIT Rule, Determination of the adaptation gain, Lyapunov theory,
Design of MRAS using Lyapunov theory, Applications of adaptive control.

UNIT V : Robust And Self Oscillating Systems

Robust high gain feedback control, Self oscillating adaptive systems, Variable
structure systems, practical issues and implementation.

BOOKS:

1.Stochastic optimal linear estimation and control by J.S. Meditch, McGraw Hill book
company
2.Adaptive control by Karl J. Astrom and Bjorn Witten Mark second edition, Pearson
Education; 2006

194
 AI TECHNIQUES IN POWER ELECTRONICS &
DRIVES (ELECTIVE)

Course Code :11 EE543 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT-I : ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK

Fundamentals of artificial neural networks – Basic concepts of neural networks -
Biological Prototype - Artificial neuron – Basic models of artificial neural networks –
connections – learning - Activation functions - Important terminologies of ANN -
Neural Network Architecture - Single layer artificial neuron networks - Multilayer
artificial neuron networks – Recurrent networks.

UNIT-II : SUPERVISED LEARNING NETWORK

Perceptron Network – Perceptron learning rule - Architecture- Perceptron training
algorithms – Adaline – Architecture – Madaline - Architecture – Training Algorithms
- Architecture of Back Propagation Network- Back Propagation Learning – Back
Propagation Algorithms.

UNIT-III : FUZZY LOGIC

Introduction – Fuzzy sets - basic Fuzzy set operations – Properties of Fuzzy sets -
Membership function - features of membership function - Fuzzy Inference Systems -
Methods of FIS – defuzzification methods – centroid method – weighted average
method

UNIT-IV: GENETIC ALGORITHMS

Introduction- Characteristics of Genetic algorithms- Basic operators and
Terminologies in GAs - search space – Effects of Genetic operators - Traditional
Algorithm Vs Genetic Algorithm -Simple GA - General Genetic Algorithm

UNIT-V: APPLICATIONS OF POWER ELECTRONICS & DRIVES

Neural network based Control: Neural network based Control of DC Motor Drive,
Neural network based Control of Induction Motor, Neural network based Control of
Stepper Motor - Fuzzy Logic Control: Fuzzy Logic Control of DC Motor Drive,
Fuzzy Logic Control of Induction Motor, Fuzzy Logic Control of Stepper Motor

TEXT BOOKS
1. S.N.Sivanandam & S.N.Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India
(P) Ltd., 1st Indian Edition 2008
2. Alok Jain, ‘Power Electronics & its Applications”, Penram international
Publishing, Second Edition
REFERENCE BOOK
1. J.S.R. Jang, C.T. Sun and E. Mizutani “Neuro Fuzzy and Soft Computing”,
Pearson Education.
195
 M. TECH (POWER SYSTEMS)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

ENGINEERING

196
 M.Tech 2012 Batch(PS)
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
Course
S.No L-T-P Credits
Code Course Title
Semester -1
1 11-EE501 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DYNAMICS 3-1-2 5
2 11-EE502 EHVAC AND HVDC TRANSMISSION 3-1-0 4
3 11-EE503 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 3-1-0 4
4 11-EE504 MODERN CONTROL THEORY 3-1-0 4
5 ELECTIVE-1 3-0-0 3
6 ELECTIVE-2 3-0-0 3
7 11-EE509 SEMINAR 0-0-4 2
TOTAL CREDITS 25
Semester -2
1 11-EE505 REAL TIME CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS 3-1-2 5
2 11-EE506 MICRO CONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 3-1-0 4
3 11-EE507 POWER SYSTEMS PROTECTION 3-1-0 4
4 11-EE508 POWER QUALITY 3-1-0 4
5 ELECTIVE-3 3-0-0 3
6 ELECTIVE-4 3-0-0 3
7 11-EE509 TERM PAPER 0-0-4 2
TOTAL CREDITS 25
Semester -3&4
1 KLUC505 THESIS 36
Odd Semester Electives
1 11-EE530 REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION & MANAGEMENT 3-0-0 3
2 11-EE532 VLSI 3-0-0 3
3 11-EE531 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PLANNING & AUTOMATION 3-0-0 3
4 11-EE534 NON CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES 3-0-0 3
5 11-EE533 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3-0-0 3

Even Semeter Electives

1 11-EE536 STATE ESTIMATION & ADAPTIVE CONTROL 3-0-0 3
2 11-EE535 FACTS 3-0-0 3
3 11-EE539 AL TECHNIQUES IN POWER SYSTEMS 3-0-0 3
4 11-EE537 POWER SYSTEM RESTRUCTURING & DEREGULATION 3-0-0 3
5 11-EE538 ENERGY CONSERVATION & AUDIT 3-0-0 3

197
 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DYNAMICS
Course Code : 11 EE501 L-T-P : 3-1-2
Credits : 5
Syllabus:
UNIT-I: POWER SYSTEM STABILITY
Basic definitions, statement of the problem, elementary model, Swing equations,
power angle equations, Natural frequencies of oscillations, and single-machine-
infinite bus system-Equal area criterion-classical model of a multi machines systems.
UNIT-II: RESPONSE TO SMALL DISTURBANCES
The unregulated synchronous machine, Modes of oscillations of an unregulated multi
machine system, regenerated synchronous machine, Distribution of power impacts.

UNIT-III: SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE

Reactance and Time constants of a synchronous machine- Basic notions and relation
to short circuit oscillogram. Circuit equations of Synchronous machine and parks
Transformations, Vector diagrams in steady state and transient state, Power angle
curves of a salient pole machine, a procedure for multi machines systems, effect of
saturation, effect of damper windings as stability, damper action explained by theory
of induction - motor.
UNIT-IV: EXCITATION SYSTEMS
Typical Excitations configurations and excitation, (Automatic) Voltage regulators,
Exciter Build- up, excitation system response and computer representations of
excitations systems (types 1, 2, 3 and 4).
UNIT-V: EFFECT OF EXCITATION ON STABILITY
Effect on (a) Power limits, (b) Transient stability, (c) Dynamic stability, approximate
excitation system representation, supplementary stabilizing signals.

Text Books:
1. P.M.Anderson and A.A.Foud, “Power System Control and Stability”, The
IOWA state university press: AMES, IOWA, USA-GALGOTIA Publications
(Indian English Language Edn.1981).
2. Edward Wilson Kim bark, “Power System Stability: Synchronous
Machines”, Volume 3 Dover publications Inc., New York(1961)
Reference Books:

1. M. Powella & P. G. Murthy, “Transient Stability of Power Systems - Theory

& Practice”, John Wiley Publications.(1994).

198
 EHVAC & HVDC TRANSMISSION
Course Code : 11 EE502 L-T-P : 3-1-0
Credits : 4

Syllabus:
UNIT-I: Introduction:
Need of EHV transmission, Limitations, Comparison of EHV-AC & HVDC
transmission, Interconnected Network and Role of Interconnecting Transmission
Lines.

UNIT-II : EHV-AC Transmission:

Parameters of EHV line, over-voltages due to switching, Ferro resonance, line
insulator and clearance, corona, long distance transmission with series & shunt
compensations, principle of half wave transmission, flexible ac transmission.

UNIT-III: HV DC Transmission
Types of dc links, terminal equipments & their operations, HVDC system control,
reactive power control, harmonics, multiterminal dc (MTDC) system, ac/dc system
analysis, protection of terminal equipments.

UNIT-IV: Insulation Requirement of EHV-AC and HVDC

Classification, Insulation design aspect, Difference between Insulation Coordination-
EHV-AC and HVDC, Insulation Coordination, Surge arrester protection in HVDC
and EHV-AC Substation, Clearance for HVDC and EHV-AC.

UNIT-V: Towers for (EHV-AC and HVDC)

Types and configuration of self supporting and flexible towers, Foundation of towers,
mechanical design of towers Tower design based on switching surges and lightning
strokes.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. K. R. Padiyar, HVDC Power Transmission System, Wiley Eastern Limited.
2. EHV-AC, HVDC Transmission and Distribution Engineering, S. Rao, Khanna
Publications.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rakesh Das Begmudre, Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering,
Wiley Eastern Limited
2. E.W.Kimbark, EHV-AC and HVDC Transmission Engineering &Practice,
Khanna Publishers.

199
 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (PED & PS)
Course Code :11 EE503 L-T-P : 3-1-0
Credits : 4

Syllabus:

UNIT I: Linear Programming

Standard form of linear programming problem; Simplex method two phase simplex
method; revised simplex method. Duality in Linear programming. Some simple
numerical problems.

UNIT II: Non-Linear Programming

Fibonacci method, Golden section method, Powell’s method, Newton’s method,
Kuhn-Tucker conditions. Some simple numerical problems.

UNIT III: Transportation Problem

Definition of transportation problem, transportation algorithm, North-West corner
method, Vogel approximation method, Least cost method, Hungarian method for
assignment. Some simple numerical problems.

UNIT IV: Project planning through Networks

Arrow diagram representation; Rules for constructing an arrow diagram. PERT and
CPM, critical path calculations, Earliest start and latest completion times;
Determination of floats. Some simple numerical problems.

UNIT V: Dynamic Programming

Multistage decision processes; Types of multistage decision problems, concept of
sub-optimization and the principle of sub-optimality computational procedure in
dynamic programming. Some simple numerical problems.

Text Books:
1. Engineering optimization theory and practice by S.S. Rao New Age International
publications.
2. Operations Research, An introduction by Hamdy A. Taha. PHI learning private
Ltd. New Delhi.

Reference Books:
1. Operations Research by S.D. Sharma, Kedarnath & Ramnath Publishers, Delhi.
2. Introduction to operations research Hiller and Liberman.

200
 MODERN CONTROL THEORY (PED & PS)
Course Code : 11 EE504 L-T-P : 3-1-0
Credits : 4

Syllabus:
UNIT–I:
DIGITALCONTROLSYSTMES
Introduction, Signal Reconstruction, Difference Equation, Z Transfor Function, Response
of Linear Discrete Systems, Z Transform Analysis of Discrete data Control Systems, Z
and S Domain Relation ship, Stability of Discrete systems.

UNIT- II: STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS

Introduction, State Descriptions of Digital Processors, State Description of sampled
continuous time plants, Solution of State difference equations, Controllability and
Observability

UNIT-III : NONLINEAR SYSTEMS

Introduction – Non Linear Systems - Types of Non-Linearities – Saturation – Dead-Zone
- Backlash – Jump Phenomenon etc;– Singular Points – Introduction to Linearization of
nonlinear systems, Properties of Non-Linear systems – Describing function–describing
function analysis of nonlinear systems – Stability analysis of Non-Linear systems through
describing functions

UNIT-IV: STABILITY ANALYSIS

Stability in the sense of Lyapunov, Lyapunov’s stability and Lypanov’s instability
theorems - Stability Analysis of the Linear continuous time invariant systems by
Lyapunov second method– Direct method of Lyapunov – Generation of Lyapunov
functions – Variable gradient and Krasoviskii’s methods – estimation of transients using
Lyapunov functions.

UNIT- V : OPTIMAL CONTROL

Introduction to optimal control - Formulation of optimal control problems – calculus of
variations – fundamental concepts, functionals, variation of functionals – fundamental
theorem of Calculus of variations – boundary conditions – constrained minimization –
formulation using Hamiltonian method – Linear Quadratic regulator

TEXT BOOKS:
1.M.Gopal – Digital Control and state variable methods, Tata Mcgraw’Hill, 2nd eddition
2.M.Gopal - Modern Control System Theory - New Age International (P.Ltd,) 2nd
eddition,1984

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stafani etal , “Design of Feedback control Systems” – Oxford Press, 4th eddition.
2. Ogata K, “Modern Control Engineering,” Prentice Hall, 4th eddition.
3. Nagarath IJ and M. Gopal, “ Control Systems Engineering”- New Age International
Publishers, 5th eddition.

201
 REAL TIME CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEM

Course Code : 11 EE505 L-T-P : 3-1-2

Credits : 5

Syllabus:

UNIT – I
Unit Commitment Problem: Introductions to UCP, thermal & Hydral constraints in Unit
commitment-Economic Dispatch: Economic importance -characteristics of thermal,
nuclear and hydro-generator units - Economic dispatch problem –Thermal system
dispatch with network losses – line loss formula –The Lambda iteration method – first
order gradient method – base point and participation factors – Economic dispatch Vs unit
commitment.

UNIT – II
Load frequency control-I: Definition of control area – single area control – Block
diagram representation – steady state analysis – dynamic response – proportional plus
integral control of single area block diagrams – AGC multi area system –static and
dynamic response – tie line bias control – Inter connected systems- Automatic voltage
control

UNIT – III
Load Frequency Control-II: Load frequency control of 2-area system -uncontrolled case
and controlled case- tie-time bias control.

UNIT – IV
Computer control of power systems: Energy control centre – various levels – SCADA
system – computer configuration functions – monitoring – data acquisition and controls –
EMS system – expert system applications for power system operation. Communication
protocol IEC61850
Security control: Security analysis and monitoring – system operating states by security
control functions – generator and line outages by linear sensitivity factors.

UNIT – V
State estimation: Power system state estimation – Weighted least square state
estimation – state estimation of AC network. Treatment of bad data – network
observability and pseudo measurements.

Text Books
1. Allen J. Wood and Bruce F. Wollenberg “Power Generation, Operation &
Control” 2nd edition, John Wiley and Sons.
2. I.J. Nagarath & D. P. Kothari , “Modern power system analysis” 3rd Edition,
TMH

Reference Books
1. I. Elgard , “Electric Energy Systems Theory – An Introduction” TMH.
2. Abhijit Chakrabarti & Sunita Halder “ Power System Analysis operation and Control
“ 1st edition, PHI
3. Mahalanabis A.K., Kothari D.P. and Ahson S.I., “Computer aided power system
analysis and control”, TMH

202
 POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

Course Code : 11 EE507 L-T-P : 4-0-0

Credits : 4

Syllabus:

UNIT-I
Need for protection systems: Nature and causes of faults, types of faults, effects of
faults, fault statistics, evolution of protective relays, zones of protection, primary &
back up protection, essential qualities of protection, classification of protective relays
and schemes, CT, PT, summation transformer, phase-sequence current segregating
network.

UNIT-II
Protection of Power System Equipment - Generator, Transformer, Generator-
Transformer Units, Transmission Systems, Bus-bars, Motors.

UNIT-III
Pilot wire and Carrier Current Schemes; Use of optical fibers for protection schemes.
System grounding –ground faults and protection; Load shedding and frequency
relaying; Out of step relaying; Re-closing and synchronizing

UNIT-IV
Static Relays: Advantages of static relays, working principles of static impedance,
static reactance using phase comparator, static distance, static over current, static
differential relay using amplitude comparator, use of sampling comparator.

UNIT-V
Microprocessor based protection relays – Working principles of P based over
current, impedance, reactance directional, reactance (distance) & mho relays – digital
relaying algorithms, various transform techniques employed like discrete Fourier,
Walsh-Hadamard, Haar, microprocessor implementation of digital distance relaying
algorithms – protection of lines against lightning & traveling waves.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. T.S. Madhava Rao, “Power System Protection: Static Relays With Microprocessor
Applications”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd edition.
2. Badri Ram & DN Viswakarma, “Power System Protection & Switch Gear”,
McGraw Hill

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. A.R. Van C. Washington, “Protective Relays Their Theory & Practice”, Vol.I &
II, John Wiley & Sons.
2. Singh L.P ,Digital Protection, Protective Relaying from Electromechanical to
Microprocessor, John Wiley & Sons, 1994
3. D. Robertson, “Power System Protection – Reference Manual”, Oriel Press,
London, 1982.
4. C.R. Mason, “The art and science of protective relaying”, John Wiley &sons.
5. S. Sunil Rao, “Switch Gear & Protection”, Khanna Publisher’s, Delhi.

203
 POWER QUALITY
Course Code : 11 EE508 L-T-P : 4-0-0
Credits : 4

Syllabus:

Unit I: Introduction
Introduction of the Power Quality (PQ) problem, Terms used in PQ: Voltage, Sag,
Swell, Surges, Harmonics, over voltages, spikes, Voltage fluctuations, Transients,
Interruption, overview of power quality phenomenon, Remedies to improve power
quality, power quality monitoring

Unit II: Long Interruptions

Interruptions – Definition – Difference between failure, outage, Interruptions – causes
of Long Interruptions – Origin of Interruptions – Limits for the Interruption frequency
– Limits for the interruption duration – Short interruptions

Unit III: Short Interruptions

Definition, origin of short interruptions, basic principle, fuse saving, voltage
magnitude events due to re-closing, voltage during the interruption, monitoring of
short interruptions, difference between medium and low voltage systems. Multiple
events, single phase tripping – voltage and current during fault period, voltage and
current at post fault period, stochastic prediction of short interruptions.

Unit IV: Voltage sag – characterization – Single phase

Voltage sag – definition, causes of voltage sag, voltage sag magnitude, monitoring,
theoretical calculation of voltage sag magnitude, voltage sag calculation in non-
radial systems, meshed systems, voltage sag duration - Three phase faults, phase
angle jumps, magnitude and phase angle jumps for three phase unbalanced sags, load
influence on voltage sags.

Unit V: Mitigation of Interruptions and Voltage Sags

Overview of mitigation methods – from fault to trip, reducing the number of faults,
reducing the fault clearing time changing the power system, installing mitigation
equipment, improving equipment immunity, different events and mitigation methods.
System equipment interface – voltage source converter, series voltage controller,
shunt controller, combined shunt and series controller.

Text books:
1. Math H J Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems: voltage sags and
interruptions”, Wiley-IEEE Press, 1999.
2. Roger C Dugan, Surya Santoso, Mark F. McGranaghan, H. Wayne Beaty,
“Electrical power systems quality”, Second edition, 2002.

Reference Book:
1. Angelo Baggini, “Hand book of power quality”, wiley publications, 2008.

204
 REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION AND MANAGEMENT
(ELECTIVE-1)

Course Code : 11 EE530 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3

Syllabus:

LOAD COMPENSATION: Objectives and specifications – reactive power

characteristics – inductive and capacitive approximate biasing – Load compensator as
a voltage regulator – phase balancing and power factor correction of unsymmetrical
loads- example.: Steady – state reactive power compensation in transmission system:
Uncompensated line – types of compensation – Passive shunt and series and dynamic
shunt compensation – examples. TRANSIENT STATE REACTIVE POWER
COMPENSATION IN TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS: Characteristic time periods
– passive shunt compensation – static compensations- series capacitor compensation –
compensation using synchronous condensers –: Reactive power coordination:
Objective – Mathematical modeling – Operation planning – transmission benefits –
Basic concepts of quality of power supply – disturbances- steady –state variations –
effects of under voltages – frequency – Harmonics, radio frequency and
electromagnetic interferences. DEMAND SIDE MANAGEMENT: Load patterns –
basic methods load shaping – power tariffs- KVAR based tariffs penalties for voltage
flickers and Harmonic voltage levels: Distribution side Reactive power Management:
System losses –loss reduction methods – examples – Reactive power planning –
objectives – Economics Planning capacitor placement – retrofitting of capacitor banks
. USER SIDE REACTIVE POWER MANAGEMENT: KVAR requirements for
domestic appliances – Purpose of using capacitors – selection of capacitors – deciding
factors – types of available capacitor, characteristics and Limitations. REACTIVE
POWER MANAGEMENT IN ELECTRIC TRACTION SYSTEMS AND ARC
FURNACES: Typical layout of traction systems – reactive power control
requirements – distribution transformers- Electric arc furnaces – basic operations-
furnaces transformer –filter requirements – remedial measures –power factor of an arc
furnace

TEXT BOOKS:
1. T.J.E.Miller, “Reactive power control in Electric power systems”, John Wiley
and sons, 1982.
2. D. M. Tagare, “Reactive power Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hong Chen, “Practices of reactive power management and compensation”,
PJM Interconnection, Norristown, PA;
2. T E Miller, “Reactive Power Control in Power Systems”, John Wiley, 1982.

205
 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PLANNING & AUTOMATION (ELECTIVE)

Course Code : 11 EE531 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3
Syllabus:

Unit-I: Distribution system planning and load characteristics:

Planning and forecasting techniques, present and future role of computer, load
characteristics, load forecasting, methods of forecasting, regression analysis,
correlation analysis and time series analysis, load management, tariff, diversified
demand method, and metering of energy.

Unit-II: Distribution transformers:

Types, Regulation and Efficiency, use of monograms for obtaining efficiency,
distribution factors, KW-KVA-Method of determining regulation.
Design of sub transmission lines and distribution substation: Introduction, sub
transmission systems, distribution substation, substation bus schemes, description and
comparison of switching schemes, substation location and rating, application of
network flow techniques in rural distribution networks to determine optimum location
of substation.

Unit-III: Design considerations on primary systems:

Introduction, types of feeders, voltage levels, radial type feeders, feeders with
uniformly distributed load and non-uniformly distributed loads.
Design considerations of secondary systems: Introduction, secondary voltage levels,
secondary banking existing systems improvement.

Unit-IV: Capacitors in distribution systems and distribution system protection:

Effects of series and shunt capacitors, justification of capacitors, procedure to
determine optimum capacitor size and location, basic definition and types of over
current protection device, objective of distribution system protection, coordination of
protective devices.

Unit-V: Distribution system automation:

Reforms in power sector, methods of improvement, reconfiguration, reinforcement,
automation, communication systems, sensors, automation systems architecture,
software and open architecture, RTU and data communication, SCADA requirement
and application functions, GIS/GPS based mapping of distribution network,
communication protocol for distribution systems, integrated substation, metering
systems, revenue improvement, issuing multiyear tariff and availability based tariff,
Grounding system: earth and safety, nature and size of earth electrodes, design of
earthing schemes.

Text Books:
1. Electrical Power Distribution Engineering by Turan Gonen, McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
1. Electrical Power Distribution by A. S. Pabla, TMH, 5th Ed., 2004.

206
 NON CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES (PED & PS)
Course Code : 11 EE534 L-T-P : 3-0-0
Credits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT I : SOLAR RADIATION

Extraterrestrial solar radiation, terrestrial solar radiation, solar thermal conversion,
solar ponds, solar heating/cooling technique, solar distillation, photovoltaic energy
conversion, solar cells – 4 models.
UNIT II:WIND ENERGY
Planetary and local winds, vertical axis and horizontal axis wind mills, principles of
wind power, maximum power, actual power, wind turbine operation.
UNIT III: ENERGY FROM OCEANS
Ocean temperature differences, principles of OTEC plant operations, wave energy,
devices for energy extraction, tides, simple single pool tidal system.
UNIT IV: GEOTHERMAL ENERGY
Origin and types, Bio fuels, classification, direct combustion for heat and electricity
generator, anaerobic digestion for biogas, biogas digester, power generation.
UNIT V: MICRO- HYDEL ELECTRIC SYSTEMS:
Power potential –scheme layout-generation efficiency and turbine part flow-
geothermal energy extraction.

Text books:
1.Godfrey Boyle “Renewable Energy”, Oxford Publications, Second edition.
2.G. D. Rai, “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, First
edition.

Reference books:
1.Roger H.Charlier, Charles W. “ Ocean Energy- Tide and Tidal Power”ISBN:
Library of Congress Control Number: 2008929624_c Springer-Verlag Brerlin
Heidelberg 2009.
2.John Twidell & Toney Weir: E&F.N. Spon, “Renewable Energy Sources”,
Taylor & Francis New York, 2nd edition.
3.John F.Walker & N.Jenkins, “Wind Energy Technology”, John Willey and Sons
Chichester, U.K – 1997.

207
 VLSI DESIGN.(ELECTIVE)
Course Code : 11 EE 532 L-T-P : 0-0-3
Credits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT-I:
Introduction to CMOS circuits: MOS transistors, MOS switches, CMOS logic:
Inverter, combinational logic, NAND, NOR gates, compound gates, Multiplexers.
Memory: Latches and registers. Circuit and system representations: Behavioral,
structural and physical representations
UNIT-II
MOS transistor theory: NMOS, PMOS enhanment mode transistors, Threshold
voltage, body effect, MOS device design equations: basic DC equations, second order
effects, sub threshold region, channel-length modulation, mobility variation, impact
ionization-hot electrons
UNIT-III
MOS models, small signal AC characteristics, CMOS inverter DC characteristics,
static load MOS inverters, bipolar devices, CMOS processing technology: An
overview of silicon semiconductor technology:
UNIT-IV
basic CMOS technology, CMOS process enhancement, layout design rules, Latch up,
technology related CAD issues . CMOS circuit and logic design: CMOS logic gate
design: fan in, fan-out, typical CMOS NAND and NOR Delays, transistor sizing.
UNIT-V
Basic physical design of simple logic gates. CMOS logic structures. Clocking
strategies: single phase memory structures, PLL techniques, single phase logic
structures, two phase clocking, memory structures, And logic structures, I/O
Structures: out put pads, input pads.
TEXT BOOK
1.Weste, Eshragian, Principles of CMOS VLSI design, Addison Wesley, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Douglas A Pucknell and Kamaran Eshragian, Basic VLSI design, 3rd edition,
2001.
2. J.S.Smith, Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Addison Wesley, 2004

208
 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ELECTIVE)

Course Code : 11 EE533 L-T-P : 0-0-3

Credits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT-I: Digital Filter Structures:

Introduction- Structure for realization of Discrete systems, Structures for FIR systems,
Cascaded and Lattice filter, Structures for IIR Filters- Cascaded and Lattice filters,
State space analysis of structures- Solution to state equations.

UNIT-II: Implementation of DTS:

Representation of Numbers- fixed binary, floating, Error in rounding, Trunk -
Quantization of Filter coefficients, quantization coefficients in FIR, Round off effects
in Filters-Limit cycle oscillations, Scaling to prevent overflow.

UNIT-III: Digital filter design:

General considerations- Design of FIR filter using windows- Design of IIR digital
filters-Using Bilinear transformations of IIR filters- FIR filter Design-based on Least
Square Method - Design of FIR digital filters with least Square –Inverse( Wiener
Filter )- design of IIR digital filters in Frequency domain.

UNIT-IV: Analysis of finite Word length effects:

The Quantization process and errors- Reduction of Product round-off errors using
feedback –Quantization of fixed point and floating point Numbers- Analysis of
coefficient Quantization effects – Dynamic range scaling- overflow oscillations.

UNIT V: Power Spectrum Estimation:

Estimation of spectra from Finite Duration Observations signals – Non-parametric
methods for power spectrum estimation-Walsh methods-Blackman & Tukey method.
– Parametric method for power spectrum Estimation - Minimum variance spectral
estimation.

Text Books:
1.Digital Signal Processing principles, Algorithms and Applications – John
G. Proakis -PHI –3rd edition-2002.
2. Discrete Time Signal Processing – Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Shafer -
PHI-1996 1st edition-9th reprint.

Reference Books:
3. Digital Signal Processing – S.Salivahanan, A.Vallavaraj, C. Gnanapriya –
TMH - 2nd reprint-2001
4. Digital Filter Analysis and Design - Auntonian -TMH

209
 AI TECHNIQUES IN POWER SYSTEMS

Course Code : 11 EE539 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3
SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK: Fundamentals of artificial neural networks –
Basic concepts of neural networks - Biological Prototype - Artificial neuron – Basic
models of artificial neural networks - connections– learning - Activation functions -
Important terminologies of ANN - Neural Network Architecture - Single layer
artificial neuron networks - Multilayer artificial neuron networks – Recurrent
networks.

UNIT-II
SUPERVISED LEARNING NETWORK: Perceptron Network – Perceptron
learning rule - Architecture- Perceptron training algorithms – Adaline – Architecture
–Madaline - Architecture – Training Algorithms - Architecture of Back Propagation
Network- Back Propagation Learning– Input layer computation– Hidden layer
computation – Output layer computation– Back Propagation Algorithms.

UNIT-III
FUZZY LOGIC: Introduction – Fuzzy sets- basic Fuzzy set operations – Properties
of Fuzzy sets - Membership function- features of membership function - Fuzzy
Inference Systems - Methods of FIS – defuzzification methods – centroid method –
weighted average method.

UNIT-IV
GENETIC ALGORITHMS: Introduction- Characteristics of Genetic algorithms-
Basic operators and Terminologies in Gas - search space – Effects of Genetic
operators - Traditional Algorithm Vs Genetic Algorithm -Simple GA - General
Genetic Algorithm.

UNIT-V
APPLICATION TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: ANN based Short Term Load
Forecasting - load flow studies - Fuzzy Logic based Unit Commitment and Genetic
Algorithm based Economic Dispatch.

Text Books:
1. S.N.Sivanandam & S.N.Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India
(P) Ltd., 1st Indian Edition 2008.
2. J.S.R. Jang, C.T. Sun, E. Mizutani “Neuro Fuzzy and Soft Computing”,
Pearson education.

Reference Books:
1. D.E Goldberg,” Genetic Algorithms”, Addison – Wisley 1999.
2. Bast kosko, “Neural networks &Fuzzy systems”, Prentice Hall.

210
 STATE ESTIMATION & ADAPTIVE CONTROL (ELECTIVE-4)
(Common to Both PED & PS)

Course Code : 11 EE536 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3

Syllabus:

Elements of probability theory: definition of probability and random variable,

probability functions, expected value, mean and covariance, independence and
correlation, Gaussian distribution and its properties.

Stochastic processes and system models: Elements of the theory of stochastic

processes, mean value function and covariance kernel, independent and correlated
stochastic processes, stationery and non sequence model, Gaussian white process.

Non parametric methods & parametric methods: Nonparametric methods:

Transient analysis-frequency analysis-Correlation analysis-Spectral analysis. Liner
Regression: The Lease square estimate-best liner unbiased estimation under linear
constraints-Prediction error methods: Description of Prediction error methods-
Optimal Prediction –relationships between Prediction error methods and other
identification methods theoretical analysis.

Adaptive control schemes Introduction – users- Definitions-auto tuning-types of

adaptive control-gain scheduling controller-model reference adaptive control schemes
– self tuning controller. MRAC and STC: Approaches – The Gradient approach –
Lyapunov functions – Passivity theory – pole placement method Minimum variance
control – Predictive control.

Adaptive control and application: Stability – Convergence – Robustness –

Application of adaptive control, direct model reference adaptive control. Introduction:
Basic approaches to adaptive control. Applications of adaptive control. Identification:
Error formulations linear in the parameters. Direct adaptive control: Linear error
equations with dynamics. Gradient and pseudo-gradient algorithms. Strictly positive
real transfer functions. Kalman-Yacubovitch-Popov lemma. Passivity theory.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dan Simon, “Optimal State Estimation”, Wiley Intersience, 2006.
2. S. Sastry and M. Bodson, Adaptive Control: Stability, Convergence, and
Robustness, Prentice-Hall, 1989.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. K.J. Astrom and B. Wittenmark, Adaptive Control, Addison-Wesley, 2nd
edition, 1995.
2. I.D. Landau, R. Lozano, and M. M'Saad, Adaptive Control, Springer Verlag,
London, 1998.
3. Meditch, “Stochastic Optimal Linear Estimation and Control” Mc-Graw Hill
Company, 1969.
4. K.S. Narendra and A.M. Annaswamy, Stable Adaptive Systems, Prentice-
Hall, 1989.
211
 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS (Common for PS & PED)
Course Code : 11 EE535 L-T-P : 3-0-0
Credits : 3

Syllabus:

UNIT – I
FACTS and CONVERTER Concepts
Introduction to FACTS devices, Power Flow in AC system , Dynamic stability
Consideration and the importance of the controllable parameter , Definition of
FACTS , Basic types of FACTS Controllers, Basic concepts on voltage source
converters, basic concepts of current source Converter, Comparison of current
converters with voltage source converters, concepts on PWM technique and Three
level voltage Source converter

UNIT – II
Static Shunt Compensators
SVC and STATCOM Operation & Characteristics and Control of TSC, TSR,
STATCOM, comparison between SVC and STATCOM, STATCOM for transient and
dynamic stability enhancement.

UNIT – III
Static series Compensators
GCSC,TSSC,TCSC and SSSC Operation and Control External system control for
series Compensator SSR and its damping, Static Voltage and Phase angle Regulator,
TCVR and TCPAR Operation and Control.

UNIT – IV
UPFC and IPFC
The Unified Power Flow Controller Operation, Comparison with other FACTS
devices, control of P and Q, Dynamic Performance, Special purpose of FACTS
Controllers, Interline Power Flow Controller Operation and Control.

UNIT –V
Custom Power devices
Introduction to custom power devices, Shunt active filter for power distribution
system, Reactive power compensation by series connected compensator, Load
Compensation & Distribution STATCOM, Application of STATCOM for reactive
power compensation and voltage regulation, Concepts of DVR, UPQC.

Text Books:
1) N.G. Hingorani & L. Gyugyi “ Understanding FACTS: Concepts and
technology of Flexible AC Transmission System” , IEEE press, 2000
2) K.R. Padiyar, “FACTS Controllers In Power Transmission and Distribution”
, New Age Int Publisher, 2007

Reference Books:
1) Ned Mohan et. al. “power Electronics” John Wiley & Sons
2) T.J.E. Miller, “ Reactive Power Control in Electric Systems”, John Wiley &
Sons

212
 ENERGY CONSERVATION & AUDIT

Course Code : 11 EE537 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3

Syllabus:

BASIC PRINCIPLES OF ENERGY AUDIT:Energy audit- definitions, concept,

types of audit, energy index, cost index, pie-charts, Sankey diagrams, load profiles,
Energy conservation schemes- Energy audit of industries- energy saving potential,
energy audit of process industry, thermal power station, building energy audit.

ENERGY MANAGEMENT:
Principles of energy management, organizing energy management program,
initiating, planning, controlling, promoting, monitoring, reporting - Energy manger,
Qualities and functions, language, Questionnaire - check list for top management.
Demand side management.

ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS: Energy efficient motors, factors affecting

efficiency, loss distribution, constructional details, characteristics - variable speed,
variable duty cycle systems, RMS hp- voltage van at ion-voltage unbalance- over
motoring- motor energy audit.

POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT, LIGHTING AND ENERGY

INSTRUMENTS: Power factor - methods of improvement, location of capacitors,
PF with non linear loads, effect of harmonics on PF , PF motor controllers - Good
lighting system design and practice, lighting control, lighting energy audit - Energy
Instruments- watt meter, data loggers, thermocouples, pyrometers, lux meters, tongue
testers, application of PLC's.

ECONOMIC ASPECTS AND ANALYSIS: Economics Analysis - Depreciation

Methods, time value of money, rate of return, present worth method, replacement
analysis, life cycle costing analysis - Energy efficient measures- calculation of
simple payback method, net present worth method - Power factor correction,
lighting - Applications of life cycle costing analysis, return on investment.

Text Books:
1. W.C.Turner, “Energy management hand book”, John wiley and sons
Energy management and good lighting practice: fuel efficiency- book let 12-
EEO
2. W.K. Murphy, G- Mckay Butier worth, “Energy management”, Heine mann
publications, (20070.

Reference Books:
1. Paulo Callaghan, “Energy management”, 1st edition, Mc-graw Hill Book
company, (1998)
2. Giovanni and Petrecca, “Industrial Energy Management: Principles and
Applications”, The Kluwer international series-207 (1999)
3. Howard E.Jordan, “Energy-Efficient Electric Motors and their applications”,
Plenum pub corp; 2nd ed. (1994)

213
 POWER SYSTEM RESTRUCTURING, DEREGULATION & POWER
MARKETS

Course Code : 15 EE 538 L-T-P : 3-0-0

Credits : 3

Syllabus:

Key Issues in Electric Utilities Introduction – Restructuring models – Independent

System Operator (ISO) – Power Exchange - Market operations – Market Power –
Standard cost – Transmission Pricing – Congestion Pricing – Management of Inter
zonal/Intra zonal Congestion. Open Access Same-time Information System (OASIS)
Structure of OASIS - Posting of Information – Transfer capability on OASIS.

Available Transfer Capability (ATC) Transfer Capability Issues – ATC – TTC –

TRM – CBM Calculations – Calculation of ATC based on power flow. Electricity
Pricing Introduction – Electricity Price Volatility Electricity Price Indexes –
Challenges to Electricity Pricing – Construction of Forward Price Curves – Short-time
Price Forecasting.

Power System Operation in Competitive Environment Introduction – Operational

Planning Activities of ISO- The ISO in Pool Markets – The ISO in Bilateral Markets
Operational Planning Activities of a GENCO. Market Power : Introduction -
Different types of market Power – Mitigation of Market Power - Examples.

Transmission Congestion Management :Introduction - Transmission Cost

Allocation Methods : Postage Stamp Rate Method - Contract Path Method - MW-
Mile Method – Unused Transmission Capacity Method - MVA-Mile method –
Comparison of cost allocation methods.

Text Books:
1. Loi Lei Lai, “Power System Restructuring and Deregulation”, John Wiley &
Sons Ltd., England, (2001).
2. Kankar Bhattacharya, “Operation of Restructured Power System”, Math H.J.
Boller and Jaap E.Daalder Kulwer Academic Publishers, (2001).

Reference Books:
1. Mohammad Shahidehpour and Muwaffaq alomoush, “Restructured Electrical
Power Systems”, Marcel Dekker, Inc., (2001).
2. P. Venkatesh,B V Manikandan,S Charles Raja and A Srinivasa Rao, “Electric
Power System Analysis, Security & Deregulation”, PHI, (2012).

214
 M.TECH IN THERMAL ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

215
 MTECH IN THERMAL ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL
S.No Course Code Course Title L-T-P Credits
Semester -1
ADVANCED ENGINEERING
1 11ME501 3-1-2 5
THERMODYNAMICS
ADVANCED FLUID
2 11ME502 3-1-0 4
MECHANICS
GAS TURBINES AND JET
3 11ME503 3-1-2 5
PROPULSION
ENERGY CONSERVATION &
4 11ME504 3-1-0 4
MANAGEMENT
RENEWABLE ENERGY
5 11ME530 3-0-0 3
SYSTEMS
REFRIGERATION AND AIR
6 11ME541 3-0-0 3
CONDITIONING
7 11ME551 SEMINAR 0-0-4 2
8
Semester -2
HEAT EXCHANGER
1 MEC625 3-1-0 4
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
COMPUTATIONAL
2 MEC626 METHODS IN THERMAL 3-1-2 5
ENGINEERING
DESIGN OF THERMAL
3 MEC627 3-1-0 4
SYSTEMS
ANALYSIS OF THERMAL
4 MEC628 3-1-0 4
POWER CYCLES
ADVANCED INTERNAL
5 MEC629 3-0-0 3
COMBUSTION ENGINES
6 MEC631 GAS DYNAMICS 3-0-0 3
7 TERM PAPER 0-0-4 2
8
Semester -3,4
1 TE THESIS/PROJECT 36

216
 I semester

Course Code : 11ME501

Course Title : Advanced Engineering Thermodynamics
Course Structure :3–1-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
Availability, Irreversibility and Second-Law Efficiency for a closed System and
steady state Control Volume. Availability Analysis of Simple Cycles.
Thermodynamic Potentials, Maxwell relations, Generalized relation for changes in
Entropy, Internal Energy and Enthalpy, Generalized Relations for Cp and Cv Clausius
Claypeyron Equation, Joule-Thomson Coefficient, Bridgman Tables for
thermodynamic relations.

UNIT II
Different Equations of State, Fugacity, Compressibility, Principle of Corresponding
States, Use of generalized charts for enthalpy and entropy departure, fugacity
coefficient, Lee-Kesler generalized three parameter tables. Fundamental property
relations for systems of variable composition, partial molar prosperities, Real gas
mixtures, Ideal solution of real gases and liquids, Equilibrium in multi phase systems,
Gibbs phase rule for non-reactive components.

UNIT III
Thermo chemistry, first Law analysis of reacting systems, Adiabatic Flame
temperature, Entropy change of reacting systems, Second Law analysis of reacting
systems, Criterion for reaction equilibrium composition.

UNIT IV
Microstates and Microstates, Thermodynamic probability, Degeneracy of energy
levels, Maxwell-Boltzman, Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein Statistics, Microscopic
Interpretation of heat and work, Evaluation of entropy, Partition function, Calculation
of the Microscopic properties from partition functions. Collision Theory and
Transport properties.

UNIT V
Conjugate Fluxes and Forces, Entropy Production, Onsager’s Reciprocity relations,
thermo-electric phenomena and formulations. Thermodynamics of High-Gas flow.

Text Books:
1.Holman, J.P., Thermodynamics, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1998.
2.Sonntag, R.E., and Vann Wylen, G, Introduction to Thermodynamics,
Classical and Statistical, third Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1991.

References Books:
1.Kenneth Wark Jr., Advanced Thermodynamics for Engineers, McGraw-Hill
Inc., 2001.
2.Rao, Y.V.C., Postulational and Statistical thermodynamics, Allied Publisher
Limited, New Delhi, 1994.
***
217
Course Code : 11ME502
Course Title : Advanced Fluid Mechanics
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
Concept of continuum and definition of a fluid. Body and surface forces, stress tensor,
Scalar and vector fields, Eulerian and Lagrangian description of flow. Motion of fluid
element - translation, rotation and vorticity; strain rate tensor, continuity equation,
stream function and velocity potential.

UNIT II
Transport theorems, constitutive equations, derivation of Navier Stokes equations for
compressible flow. Exact solutions of Navier Stokes equations: plane Poiseuille flow
and Couette flow, Hagen-Poiseuille flow.

UNIT III
Flow between two concentric rotating cylinders, Stoke's first and second problem,
Hiemenz flow, flow near a rotating disk, and flow in convergent- divergent channels.
Slow viscous flow: Stokes and Oseen's approximation,

UNIT IV
Theory of hydrodynamic lubrication. Boundary layer: derivation, exact solutions,
Blasius, Falkner Skan, series solution and numerical solutions. Approximate methods.
Momentum integral method.

UNIT V
Two dimensional and axisymmetric jets. Description of turbulent flow, velocity
correlations, Reynold's stresses, Prandtl's Mixing Length Theory, Karman's velocity
defect law, universal velocity distribution.

Text Books:
1. Advanced Fluid Mechanics, Som and Biswas, Tata McGraw Hill Fluid
Mechanics, A.K.Mohanty.

References Books:
1. Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, Schlitching.
2. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, Shaughnessy, Oxford University Press.

218
Course Code : 11ME503
Course Title : Gas Turbines and Jet Propulsion
Course Structure :3–1-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT–I
Thermodynamic cycle analysis of gas turbines; Types of gas turbine, gas turbine v/s internal
combustion engine (Diesel & Petrol Engines) gas turbine v/s steam engine / turbines, Gas turbine
plant component, Application of gas turbine. Open and closed cycles.
UNIT–II
Axial flow turbines; blade diagrams and design of blading, performance characteristics. Centrifugal
and axial flow compressors, blowers and fans. Theory and design of impellers and blading.
Matching of turbines and compressors. Fuels and combustion, effect of combustion chamber
design and exhaust on performance.
UNIT-III
Basic principles and methods of heat recovery. Thermodynamic cycle analysis and efficiencies of
propulsive devices. Open cycle gas turbine with regeneration, re-heating and intercooling, effects
of regeneration, re-heating and intercolling on efficiency,
UNIT–IV
Jet propulsion Introduction, theory of jet propulsion, types of jet engines, energy flow through jet
engines, thrust, thrust power, and propulsive efficiency, turbo jet, turbo prop, turbo fan engines,
pulse jet and ram jet engines, performance characteristics of these engines, thrust segmentation
application of jet engines, concept of rocket propulsion.
UNIT-V
Thrust equation, classification and comparison of ram jets, turbojets, pulse jets and rockets.
Performance of turbo-prop, turbo-jet and turbofan engines. Augmentation of thrust.

Text Books:
1) Gas turbine and propulsion system P.R.Khajuria.
2) Domkundwar, “Thermal Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai and Co Ltd. Delhi.

References Books:
1) P L Ballaney, “Thermal Engineering”. Khanna Publications, Delhi.
2) R K Rajput, “Thermal Engineering”, Laxmi Publication ltd. New Delhi.

***
Course Code : 11ME504
Course Title : Energy Conservation and Management
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
General energy problem. Global and national energy scenario, primary energy sources, energy use
patterns, Basic Principles, laws of Thermo dynamics. Irreversibility, entropy enthalpy, heat engine,
refrigeration cycle, thermal efficiency and thermal exchange ratio. Critical and economic thickness
of insulation. Optimum use of prime movers for power generation, techniques cogeneration
technology. Energy conservation methods in power plants, conservation of energy in energy
intensive industries.

UNIT II
Maintenance engineering friction, lubrication and tribological innovations, predictive and
preventive maintenance, Energy audit, case studies.

UNIT III
Heating, lighting and Air conditioning of building and measures for conservation of electrical
energy. Energy conservation in domestic gadgets. Industrial heating and energy conservation in
electric and oil fired furnances. Measures for Reduction of losses in Transmission and distribution
systems.

UNIT IV
Energy efficient electric drives, energy efficient motors, V.S.D. power factor improvement in
power system. Energy conservation in transportation systems especially in electric vehicle.

UNIT V
Load curve analysis and load managements, DSM, Energy storage for power systems,
(Mechanical, Thermal, electrical and Magnetic) Restructuring of electric tariff from energy
conservation considerations, payback period.

Text Books:
1. Energy Technology:S.Rao,Dr.B.B.Purulekhar,Khanna Publishers.
2. Elect. Energy Utilization & Conservation: By - Dr. S.C.Tripathi, Tata Mc Graw Hill
Publishers.
References Books:
1. Energy Efficiency Manual: for everyone who uses energy, pays for utilities, designs and
builds, is interested in energy conservation and the environment.
2. Donald R. Wulfinghoff (Author) –Energy Institute Press,Maryland,U.S.A.
3. Title: Handbook of Energy Conservation, (Set 2 Volumes)
ISBN: 9789810828288 (Set ISBN)- Alkem Company (S) Pte LtdAdd: 1, Penjuru Close
Singapore 608617.

***
Course Code : 11ME530
Course Title : Renewable Energy Systems
Course Structure :3–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
Energy scenario and renewable energy sources: global and Indian situation. Potential of non-
conventional energy sources, economics. Solar Radiation: Solar thermal process, heat transfer
devices, solar radiation measurement, estimation of average solar radiation. Solar energy storage:
stratified storage, well mixed storage, comparison.
UNIT II
Hot water system, practical consideration, solar ponds, Non-convective solar pond, extraction of
thermal energy and application of solar ponds. Wind energy: The nature of wind. Wind energy
resources and modeling. Geothermal energy: Origin and types of geothermal energy and
utilization.

UNIT III
OTEC Ocean temperature differences. OTEC systems. Recent OTEC developments. Wave energy:
Fundamentals. Availability Wave-energy conversion systems. Tidal energy: Fundamentals.
Availability Tidal-energy conversion systems. ; Energy from biomass: Photosynthesis; Biomass
resource; Utilization of biomass.

UNIT-VI
Bio-Energy: Biomass and its uses, Classification of biomass, Biomass as a source of energy,
Characteristics of biomass, Biomass conversion processes, Buiqueting of biomass, Gasification and
combustion of biomass, Gasifies.
UNIT-V
Biogas as a rural energy source, Environmental significance, Biogas production
mechanism, Biogas plant and its components, Types of biogas plants, Design and
construction features.
Text Books:
1. S.P.Sukhatme, Solar Energy Principle of Thermal Collection and Storage’, Tata.
2. McGraw Hill, 1990.G.L. Johnson, Wind energy systems, Prentice Hall Inc. New Jersey
J.M.Kriender, Principles of Solar Engineering’, McGraw Hill, 1987.

Reference Books:
1. V.S. Mangal, Solar Engineering’, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992.
2. N.K.Bansal, Renewable Energy Source and Conversion Technology’, Tata McGraw Hill,
1989.
3. P.J. Lunde.,Solar Thermal Engineering’, John Willey & Sons, New York, 1988. J.A.
Duffie, and W.A. Beckman, Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes’, Wiley & Sons.

***
Course Code : 11ME541
Course Title : Refrigeration & Air Conditioning
Course Structure :3–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I

INTRODUCTION TO REFRIGERATION: Necessity and applications, unit of refrigeration and

C.O.P, methods of refrigeration.

AIR REFRIGERATION: Reversed Carnot Cycle, Bell Coleman cycle, Advantages and
disadvantages of air refrigeration, Open and Dense air systems, Actual air craft refrigeration
system, types of systems, problems.

UNIT-II

REFRIGERANTS: Nomenclature, Desirable properties, common refrigerants used, Eco friendly

refrigerants, ODP

VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION: Working principle, essential components of

plant, simple vapour compression refrigeration cycle, Effect of condenser pressure , evaporator
pressure, sub cooling and super heating. Multi pressure systems – multistage compression, multi
evaporator system, use of p–h charts, problems.

UNIT-III

SYSTEM COMPONENTS: Compressors general classification, comparison, advantages and

disadvantages, Condensers - classification, working, Evaporators - classification, working.
Expansion devices - types, working.

VAPOUR ABSORPTION SYSTEM: Calculation of max COP, description and working of NH3 -
water system, Li - Br, H2O system, principle of operation of three fluid absorption system and
salient features.
UNIT-IV

PRODUCTION OF LOW TEMPERATURE: Cascade system, Production of Solid CO2.

STEAM JET REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Principle of working, application, merits and
demerits.

NON-CONVENTIONAL REFRIGERATION METHODS: Principle and operation of

thermoelectric refrigerator (ii) Vortex tube or Hilsh tube (iii) Pulse Tube (iv) Cooling by adiabatic
de magnetization.

UNIT-V

INTRODUCTION TO AIR CONDITIONING: Psychometric properties and processes, sensible

and latent heat loads, SHF, need for ventilation, infiltration, concept of human comfort and
effective temperature, comfort air conditioning, industrial air conditioning and requirements, air
conditioning load calculations.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS: classification, concepts of RSHF, ASHF, ESHF & ADP,
filters, grills and registers, deodorants, fans and blowers.

Text Books:

1. A course in refrigeration and air conditioning by S.C.Arrora & Domkundwar.

2. Principles of Refrigeration by Dossat.

References Books:
1. Refrigeration and air conditioning by Stocker.
2. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, P.L.Balaney.

***
 II semester

Course Code : ME C625

Course Title : Heat Exchanger Analysis and Design
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TYPES OF HEAT EXCHANGERS: Over all heat transfer co-efficient,
LMTD of heat exchanger analysis (parallel flow, counter flow) simulation of heat exchangers.

UNIT II
WORKING OF HEAT PIPE: Different types of heat pipes, heat pipe components ,advantages of
heat pipe, applications, analysis and design if heat pipe.

UNIT III
ANALOGY AND RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN HEAT EXCHANGERS: Analogy
between momentum and heat transfer. Recent developments in the design of compact heat
exchangers, insulation-design and selection.

UNIT IV

PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER: Compact heat exchanger, Codes of mechanical design of heat
exchanger. Computerized methods for design and analysis of heat exchanger. Performance
enhancement of heat exchanger, fouling of heat exchanger. Testing, evaluation and maintenance of
heat exchanger.

UNIT V
BASIC DESIGN METHODS FOR HEAT EXCHANGER: Design of shell and tube type heat
exchanger, TEMA code. Furnaces, Radioactive heat exchangers, Regenerators, Principles of boiler
design, recuperators, matrix heat exchanger and heat pipe exchanger.
Text Books:
1. J.P. Hallman, “Heat Transfer”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1968.

References Books:
1. J.G. Knudsen and D.L. Katz," Fluid Dynamics and Heat Transfer", McGraw Hill, New
York, 1958.
***
Course Code : ME C626
Course Title : Computational Methods in Thermal Engineering
Course Structure : 3-1-2

SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I
Review of basic fluid mechanics and the governing (Navier-Stokes) equations, Techniques for
solutionof PDEs.

UNIT-II
FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD (FD): finite element method and finite volume method.
Finite volume (FV) method in one-dimension, Differencing schemes, steady and unsteady
calculations.

UNIT-III
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS: FV discretizationin two and three dimensions, SIMPLE algorithm
and flow field calculations, variants of SIMPLE, Introduction to Turbulence and turbulence
modeling, illustrative flow computations.

UNIT-IV
INTRODUCTION TO COMMERCIAL SOFTWARE’S FLUENT AND CFX: grid
generation, flow prediction and post-processing Application of FD methods for unsteady and
steady heat conduction problems.

UNIT-V
GLOBAL MODELLING UNDER DYNAMIC CONDITIONS: numerical methods for
integrating ordinary differential equations and systems of equations; use of EES software;
applications to systems with thermal storage, mass storage, etc.

Text Books:
1. Computational fluid dynamics by Anderson.

References Books:
1. Stocker, Wilbert F; design o thermal systems.

***
Course Code : MEC627
Course Title : Design of Thermal Systems
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
Modeling of Thermal Systems: types of models, mathematical modeling, curve fitting, linear
algebraic systems, numerical model for a system, system simulation, methods for numerical
simulation.

UNIT II
Acceptable Design of a Thermal System: initial design, design strategies, design of systems from
different application areas, additional considerations for large practical systems; Economic
Considerations: calculation of interest, worth of money as a function of time, series of payments,
raising capital, taxes, economic factor in design, application to thermal systems.

UNIT III
Problem Formulation for Optimization: optimization methods, optimization of thermal systems,
practical aspects in optimal design, Lagrange multipliers, optimization of constrained and
unconstrained problems, applicability to thermal systems; search methods: single-variable problem,
multivariable constrained optimization, examples of thermal systems; geometric, linear, and
dynamic programming and other methods for optimization, knowledge-based design and additional
considerations, professional ethics.
UNIT-IV
Optimization, Objective function formulation, Constraint equations, Mathematical formulation,
Calculas method, Dynamic programming, Geometric programming, linear programming methods,
solution procedures.

UNIT-V
Equation fitting, Empirical equation, best fit method, method of least squares. Modeling of thermal
equipments such as turbines, compressors, pumps, heat exchangers, evaporators and condensers

Text Books:
1.W.F. Stoecker, Design of Thermal Systems - McGraw-Hill, 1971.
2.N.V. Suryanarayana, Design & Simulation of Thermal Systems - MGH, 2002.

References Books:
1.Y. Jaluria, Design and Optimization of Thermal Systems –CRC Press, 2007.
2.Bejan, G. Tsatsaronis, M.J. Moran, Thermal Design and Optimization - Wiley,1996.
3.R. F. Boehm, Developments in the Design of Thermal Systems – Cambridge University
Press, 1997.
***
Course Code : MEC628
Course Title : Analysis of Thermal Power Cycles
Course Structure :3–1-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
STEAM POWER PLANTS CYCLE: Rankine cycle – Reheat cycle – Regenerative cycle with
one and more feed heaters – Types of feed heaters – Open and closed types – Steam traps types.

UNIT II
COGENERATION: Condensing turbines – Combined heat and power – Combines cycles –
Brayton cycle Ranking cycle combinations – Binary vapour cycle.

UNIT III
AIR STANDARD CYCLES: Cycles with variable specific heat – fuel air cycle – Deviation from
actual cycle.

UNIT IV
BRAYTON CYCLE: Open cycle gas turbine – Closed cycle gas turbine – Regeneration – Inter
cooling and reheating between stages.

UNIT V
REFRIGERATION CYCLES: Vapour compression cycles – Cascade system – Vapour
absorption cycles – GAX Cycle.

Text Books:
1.Nag. P.K., Power Plant Engineering, 2nd Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002.
2.Nag. P.K., Engineering Thermodynamics, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005.

Reference Books:
1.Arora, C.P., Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, 2nd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004.
2.Culp R., Principles of Energy Conversion, McGraw-Hill, 2000.

***
Course Code : MEC629
Course Title : Advanced Internal Combustion Engines
Course Structure :3–0-0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I
Thermodynamic Analysis of I.C.Engine Cycles. Effect of design and operating parameters on cycle
efficiency. Modified fuel-air cycle considering heat losses and valve timing. Engine dynamics and
torque analysis. Use of Combustion chart. Thermodynamic cycle with supercharging both S.I. and
C.I. Engines. Limits of Supercharging.
UNIT II
Methods of Supercharging and Superchargers. Fuels and combustion in S.I. engines, knocking and
fuel rating. Energy balance, volumetric efficiency, measurement of indicated and brake power.

UNIT-III
Advanced theory of carburetion. Fuel Injection Systems for S.I. and C.I. Engines. Cooling of
engine and governing of engine. Ignition system: conventional and electronic.

UNIT IV
Variable compression ratio engine. Theoretical analysis, methods of obtaining variable
compression ratio, Wankel rotary combustion engine, Stratified charged engine.

UNIT V
Methods of charge stratification, Dual fuel and Multifuel engines, Biofuels, Variable Valve timing
engines, Exhaust emissions, its measurement and control. Fault diagnosis of S.I. Engines.

Text Books:
1. Fundamentals of I.C. Engines by H.B.Heywood, McGraw Hill I.C.Engine Theory and
Practices, Vol.I & II C.F.Taylor, MIT Press .

References Books:
1. I.C.Engine, Mathur and Sharma, Dhanpat Rai and Sons Fundamentals of I.C.Engine by
Ganeshan, Tata McGraw Hill.

***
Course Code : MEC631

Course Title : Gas Dynamics

Course Structure :3–0–0

SYLLABUS:

UNIT I

GAS DYNAMICS: Energy equation for flow process, Stagnation state, Velocity of sound, Critical
states, Various regions of flow, Mach number, Critical Mach number, Mach cone, Crocco number,
Effect of Mach number of compressibility. T-S and H-S diagrams showing nozzle and diffuser
processes.

UNIT II

ISENTROPIC FLOW: Isentropic flow with variable area - Mach number variation, Hugoniot
equation, Area ratio as a function of Mach number, Impulse function, Mass flow rate, flow through
nozzles, Flow through diffusers.

UNIT III

FLOW THROUGH CONSTANT AREA DUCTS: Flow in constant area ducts with friction,
Fanno curves and Fanno flow equation, Solution of Fanno flow equation, Variation of flow
properties, Variation of Mach number with duct length, isothermal flow with friction. Flow in
constant area ducts with Heat transfer, Rayleigh line, Rayleigh flow equation, Variation of flow
properties, Maximum heat transfer.

UNIT IV

NORMAL SHOCK GAS DYNAMICS: Flow with normal shock waves, Governing equation,
Prandtl - Meyer equation, Impossibility of rarefaction shock, Mach number in the downstream of
the normal shock. Static pressure ratio, Temperature ratio, Density ratio and stagnation pressure
ratio across the shock, Entropy change, Characteristic of flow through convergent and divergent
nozzle with various backpressure. Normal shocks in Fanno and Rayleigh flow, Flow with oblique
shock waves (Qualitative Treatment).

UNIT V

MEASUREMENTS IN COMPRESSIBLE FLOW: Introduction, Pressure measurements,

Temperature measurements, Velocity and direction, density problems.

HIGH TEMPETATURE GAS DYNAMICS: Importance of High Temperature flows, Nature of

High temperature flows.
Text Books:

1.Gas dynamics by E Radhakrishnan, PHI.

2.Fundamentals of compressible flow with Aircraft and Rocket propulsion by S.M.Yahya ,
Wiley Eastern. 2 ed.
Reference Books:
1. Gas dynamics through problems by Zoeb Hussain, New Age Int.
2. Introduction to gas Dynamics by Alan J. Chapman, William F. Walker, Holt, Rineharl
and Winstion.
3. Gas dynamics and jet propulsion by S.L.Somasundaram.

***